View ADVANTESTR3264_6933472.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

manual number c printed in japan advantest corporation all rights reserved . r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) foe-8335033h00 1998 first printing october 1, 1998 applicable models r3264 r3267 r3273 cover free datasheet http:///
no. esg00 safety-1 safety summary to ensure thorough understanding of all functions and to ensure efficient use of this instrument, please read the manual carefully before using. note that advantest bears absolutely no responsibility for the result of operations caused due to incorrect or inappropriate use of this instrument. if the equipment is used in a manner not specified by advantest, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. ? warning labels warning labels are applied to advantest products in locations where specific dangers exist. pay careful attention to these labels during handling. do not remove or tear these labels. if you have any questions regarding warning labels, please ask your nearest advantest dealer. our address and phone number are listed at the end of this manual. symbols of those warning labels are shown below together with their meaning. danger : indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious personal injury. warning : indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in death or serious personal injury. caution : indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in personal injury or a damage to property including the product. basic precautions please observe the following precautions to prevent fire, burn, electric shock, and personal inju- ry. ? use a power cable rated for the voltage in question. be sure however to use a power cable conforming to safety standards of your nation when using a product overseas. when inserting the plug into the electrical outlet, first turn the power switch off and then insert the plug as far as it will go. when removing the plug from the electrical outlet, first turn the power switch off and then pull it out by gripping the plug. do not pull on the power cable itself. make sure your hands are dry at this time. before turning on the power, be sure to check that the supply voltage matches the voltage requirements of the instrument. be sure to plug the power cable into an electrical outlet which has a safety ground terminal. grounding will be defeated if you use an extension cord which does not include a safety ground terminal. be sure to use fuses rated for the voltage in question. do not use this instrument with the case open. do not place objects on top of this product. also, do not place flower pots or other containers containing liquid such as chemicals near this product. safety summary
safety summary safety-2 when the product has ventilation outlets, do not stick or drop metal or easily flammable ob- jects into the ventilation outlets. when using the product on a cart, fix it with belts to avoid its drop. when connecting the product to peripheral equipment, turn the power off. caution symbols used within this manual symbols indicating items requiring caution which are used in this manual are shown below to- gether with their meaning. danger : indicates an item where there is a danger of serious personal injury (death or seri- ous injury). warning : indicates an item relating to personal safety or health. caution : indicates an item relating to possible damage to the product or instrument or relat- ing to a restriction on operation. safety marks on the product the following safety marks can be found on advantest products. : attention - refer to manual. : protective ground (earth) terminal. : danger - high voltage. : caution - risk of electric shock. replacing parts with limited life the following parts used in the instrument are main parts with limited life. replace the parts listed below before their expected lifespan has expired to maintain the perfor- mance and function of the instrument. note that the estimated lifespan for the parts listed below may be shortened by factors such as the environment where the instrument is stored or used, and how often the instrument is used. the parts inside are not user-replaceable. for a part replacement, please contact the advantest sales office for servicing. there is a possibility that each product uses different parts with limited life. for more informa- tion, refer to chapter 1.
safety summary safety-3 main parts with limited life hard disk mounted products the operational warnings are listed below. do not move, shock and vibrate the product while the power is turned on. reading or writing data in the hard disk unit is performed with the memory disk turning at a high speed. it is a very delicate process. store and operate the products under the following environmental conditions. an area with no sudden temperature changes. an area away from shock or vibrations. an area free from moisture, dirt, or dust. an area away from magnets or an instrument which generates a magnetic field. make back-ups of important data. the data stored in the disk may become damaged if the product is mishandled. the hard disc has a limited life span which depends on the operational conditions. note that there is no guarantee for any loss of data. precautions when disposing of this instrument when disposing of harmful substances, be sure dispose of them properly with abiding by the state-provided law. harmful substances: (1) pcb (polycarbon biphenyl) (2) mercury (3) ni-cd (nickel cadmium) (4) other items possessing cyan, organic phosphorous and hexadic chromium and items which may leak cadmium or arsenic (excluding lead in sol der). example: fluorescent tubes, batteries part name life unit power supply 5 years fan motor 5 years electrolytic capacitor 5 years lcd display 6 years lcd backlight 2.5 years floppy disk drive 5 years memory backup battery 5 years
environmental conditions safety-4 this instrument should be only be used in an area which satisfies the following conditions: an area free from corrosive gas an area away from direct sunlight a dust-free area an area free from vibrations figure-1 environmental conditions operating position figure-2 operating position storage position figure-3 storage position this instrument can be used safely under the following conditions: altitude of up to 2000 m installation categories ii pollution degree 2 vibration direct sunlight corrosive gas dust front keep at least 10 centimeters of space between the rear panel and any other surface front this instrument should be stored in a horizontal position. when placed in a vertical (upright) position for storage or transportation, ensure the instrument is stable and secure. -ensure the instrument is stable. -pay special attention not to fall.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) cautions-1 other information for the r3267 series flip down stand the metal flip down stand beneath the front panel can be used to provide a better viewing angle. use the instrument with the flip down stand opened all the way. be sure to support the analyzer firmly with one hand when opening or closing the stand. note the following when using the flip down stand: use the analyzer on flat surfaces so that the weight of the analyzer is evenly distributed. do not put any objects on the analyzer. do not lean on the analyzer. do not place anything under the analyzer. do not slide the analyzer. do not use excessive force when pressing keys. do not use the analyzer on a slippery place. do not use the wire flip down stand as a carry handle. never drag the instrument or push it from behind when the flip down stand is opened because the stand may close shut and jar the instrument.. insert this end into the hole (for both sides). other information for the r3267 series
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) other information for the r3267 series cautions-2 make sure the flip down stand is folded shut when: the spectrum analyzer is not in use. connecting or disconnecting cables using the analyzer on a cart caution: 1. make sure that the flip down stand is in the normal position when the instrument is used with the flip down stand swung open. 2. make sure that the instrument is used according to the instructions presented in this section and be careful not to catch your fingers when opening or closing the stand. memory cards there is a possibility that writing, reading or formatting memory cards, which comply with the jeida stan- dard, may fail when used with this instrument. in particular, a memory card with no attribute memory or the one whose attribute memory is not defined cannot be used with the instrument, even if it is normally used with personal computers. the following are the restrictions on the memory cards that can be used with the instrument. (1) memory cards compliant with the instrument sram cards the ones that have a memory space of 64 kb or more and are compliant with jeida 4.0 (pcmcia 2.0) or later the ones with or without the attribute memory for the ones without attribute memory or with an empty attribute memory, the following must be met: 1. writing, reading, and physically and logically formatting the media are possible. 2. sectors are arranged from the head of common memory in a single partition without ecc (error check code). for the ones with level 1 device information as attribute information, the following must be met: 1. writing, reading, and physically and logically formatting the media are possible. 2. sectors are arranged from the head of common memory in a single partition without ecc. for the ones with level 2 device information as attribute information, the following must be met: 1. physically formatting the media is not possible. 2. reading or writing the media is possible depending on whether it has ecc or not. without ecc: reading, writing and logically formatting the media are possible. with ecc: reading the media only is possible. for the ones with plural partitions, the partitions written in the first format information can be
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) other information for the r3267 series cautions-3 used (the partitions, however, must be according to the basic dos partitions). disk cards compliant with the pccard-ata standard i/o cards compliant with jeida4.2 (pcmcia2.1) or later under the pcmcia-ata standard for flash disk cards and hard disk cards, the following must be met: 1. logically and physically formatting the media is not possible. 2. for the ones with plural partitions, the partitions written in the first format information can be used (the partitions, however, must be according to the basic dos partitions). eprom cards and plane flash memory cards reading only is possible when data is written in the same format as sram cards. (2) cards that cannot be used with the instrument dram cards i/o cards
certificate of conformity this is to certify, that complies with the provisions of the emc directive 89/336/eec in accordance with en61326 and low voltage directive 73/23/eec in accordance with en61010. advantest corp. rohde&schwarz tokyo, japan engineering and sales gmbh munich, germany instrument, type, designation 3267.04 spectrum analyzer r3264 / r3267 / r3273 series certificate of conformity
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) preface-1 preface this manual(vol.1) provides the information necessary to check functionality, operate and program the r3267 series. the procedure for conducting the performance test is described in a separate volume (vol.2). (1) organization of this manual this manual consists of the following chapters: safety summary to use the analyzer safely, be sure to read this manual first. 1. introduction product description standard accessories and power cable options operating environment operation check cleaning, storing and transporting includes a description of the analyzer and its? parts along with information on its? operating environment and how to per- form a system checkout. 2. operation controls and connectors on the front and rear panels screen annotation basic operation measurement examples describes the names, functions and anno- tations of each part on the panels. you can learn the basic operations of the analyzer through the examples shown in this chap- ter. 3. reference menu index menu map functional description shows a list of operation keys, and describes the function of each key. 4. principle of measurement input saturation acp measurements (internal processing and setting the root nyquist filter for both the full screen and separate screen modes) operation of the gated sweep describes the principle of operation nec- essary for taking measurements more accurately. 5. remote control gpib rs-232 gives an outline of the gpib and rs-232 interfaces, and how to connect and set them up. also included are a list of com- mands necessary for programming and using the program examples. 6. specifications shows the specifications of the analyzer. appendix a.1 before contacting advantest with a problem refer to this section when you have any problems. preface
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) preface preface-2 (2) typeface conventions used in this manual panel keys and soft keys are printed in a contrasting typeface to make them stand out from the text as follows: panel keys: boldface type example: freq, format soft keys: boldface and italic type example: center, trace detector when a series of key operations are described using a comma between two keys. there are various soft menus used to switch between two states such as on/off and auto/mnl. for example, when turning off the display on/off function, the annotation ? display on/off (off)? is used. when switching the rbw auto/mnl function to mnl, the annotation ? rbw auto/mnl (mnl)? is used. (3) trademarks epson is a registered trademark of epson corp. hewlett packard is a registered trademarks of hewlett-packard company. appendix a.2 error messages if an error occurs during operation, an error number and its corresponding error message are displayed. the meaning of each error is explained in this section. appendix a.3 glossary terminology related to the spectrum ana- lyzer is explained in this section. appendix a.4 db conversion formulas
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) c-1 table of contents 1 introduction ........................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 product description ............................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 accessories .......................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3 operating environment ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.3.1 environmental conditions ............................................................................ 1-4 1.3.2 power supply specifications ........................................................................ 1-5 1.3.3 power fuse .................................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.4 power cable .................................................................................................. 1-7 1.4 precautions in use ............................................................................................... 1-8 1.5 system checkout ................................................................................................. 1-10 1.6 cleaning, storing and transporting the r3267 series ........................................ 1-13 1.6.1 cleaning ........................................................................................................ 1-13 1.6.2 storing ........................................................................................................... 1-14 1.6.3 transporting .................................................................................................. 1-14 1.7 about calibration ................................................................................................ 1-15 1.8 concerning limited-life parts ............................................................................. 1-15 2 operation .................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 panel description ................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.1 front panel .................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1.1 display section ........................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1.2 power switch/connector section ............................................................... 2-3 2.1.1.3 floppy disk drive section ......................................................................... 2-4 2.1.1.4 measurement section ......................................................................... 2-4 2.1.1.5 marker section ...................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.1.6 save/recall section .................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.1.7 display control section ................................................................... 2-6 2.1.1.8 entry section .......................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.1.9 remote section ....................................................................................... 2-8 2.1.1.10 control section ......................................................................................... 2-9 2.1.1.11 option section .......................................................................................... 2-9 2.1.2 screen annotation ......................................................................................... 2-10 2.1.3 rear panel ..................................................................................................... 2-12 2.2 basic operation ................................................................................................... 2-14 2.2.1 operating menus and entering data ............................................................ 2-14 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers ....................................... 2-18 2.2.3 measuring frequency using counter ........................................................... 2-23 2.2.4 display line and measuring window .......................................................... 2-26 2.2.5 entering level correction data .................................................................... 2-29 2.2.6 separating two signals ................................................................................ 2-33 2.2.7 dynamic range ............................................................................................. 2-36 table of contents
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) table of contents c-2 2.2.8 uncal message .......................................................................................... 2-39 2.2.9 zooming the frequency domain .................................................................. 2-41 2.2.10 zooming the time domain ........................................................................... 2-44 2.2.11 measurement using the f/t function .......................................................... 2-49 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters .......................................................................... 2-53 2.2.12.1 measuring dual parameters in the frequency domain ............................ 2-53 2.2.12.2 measuring dual parameters in the time domain .................................... 2-57 2.2.13 calibration .................................................................................................... 2-61 2.2.13.1 cal all ....................................................................................................... 2-62 2.2.13.2 total gain ................................................................................................. 2-63 2.2.13.3 cal each item ............................................................................................ 2-64 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function ..................................... 2-65 2.3 measurement examples ....................................................................................... 2-71 2.3.1 measuring average power of digital modulation signal ............................ 2-71 2.3.2 measuring cdma wave?s total power ...................................................... 2-75 2.3.3 measuring the power density of wide band digital modulation signal .... 2-78 2.3.4 measuring cdma channel power ............................................................... 2-81 2.3.5 measuring the occupied bandwidth (obw) ................................................ 2-84 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) .................................. 2-87 2.3.6.1 full screen mode ........................................................................................ 2-87 2.3.6.2 separate display ................................................................................... 2-93 2.3.7 measuring burst signals using the gated sweep ........................................ 2-97 2.3.8 measuring burst signals in the time domain .............................................. 2-101 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements ............................................................. 2-105 2.3.9.1 using the normal and delta markers ......................................................... 2-105 2.3.9.2 using the peak list ..................................................................................... 2-108 2.3.9.3 using the fixed marker function ............................................................... 2-111 2.3.10 third order intermodulation distortion ....................................................... 2-114 2.3.11 am modulation frequency and modulation factor of am signals ............ 2-117 2.3.12 measuring frequency deviation of fm signals ............................................ 2-120 2.3.13 measuring modulation index of fm signals ................................................ 2-123 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals ...... 2-125 2.4 expanded functions ............................................................................................ 2-130 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions .................................................. 2-130 2.4.1.1 saving/recalling basic measurement conditions ...................................... 2-130 2.4.1.2 saving/recalling obw measurement conditions ..................................... 2-137 2.4.1.3 saving/recalling acp measurement conditions ....................................... 2-137 2.4.2 saving screen data ....................................................................................... 2-138 2.4.3 obtaining a hard copy of screen data .......................................................... 2-140 2.4.4 formatting media ......................................................................................... 2-142 2.4.4.1 formatting a floppy disk ........................................................................... 2-142 2.4.4.2 formatting the memory card (option) ...................................................... 2-143 2.4.5 setting date and time .................................................................................. 2-146 2.4.6 setting the screen label ............................................................................... 2-147
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) table of contents c-3 3 reference .................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 menu index .......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 menu map ........................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3 functional description ........................................................................................ 3-20 3.3.1 a key (trace a) ........................................................................................... 3-20 3.3.2 att key (attenuator) .................................................................................. 3-24 3.3.3 b key (trace b) ............................................................................................ 3-25 3.3.4 cal key (calibration) ................................................................................. 3-28 3.3.5 config key (configuration) ...................................................................... 3-30 3.3.6 copy key (copy) ........................................................................................ 3-36 3.3.7 couple key (couple function) ................................................................. 3-37 3.3.8 format key (display format) .................................................................. 3-40 3.3.9 freq key (frequency) ................................................................................ 3-45 3.3.10 lcl key (gpib remote control) ................................................................ 3-48 3.3.11 level key (level) ..................................................................................... 3-49 3.3.12 meas key (measurement) .......................................................................... 3-51 3.3.13 mkr key (marker) ...................................................................................... 3-53 3.3.14 mkr key (marker ) ............................................................................ 3-56 3.3.15 off key (marker off) .................................................................................. 3-57 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) ............................................................ 3-58 3.3.17 preset key (initialization) ........................................................................ 3-63 3.3.18 rcl key (data readout) ............................................................................. 3-64 3.3.19 repeat key (continuous sweep) .............................................................. 3-65 3.3.20 save key (saving data) ............................................................................. 3-66 3.3.21 single key (single sweep) ....................................................................... 3-70 3.3.22 span key (frequency span) ....................................................................... 3-71 3.3.23 srch key (peak search) ............................................................................. 3-72 3.3.24 swp key (sweep time) ............................................................................... 3-75 3.3.25 util key (utility) ........................................................................................ 3-78 3.3.26 window key ............................................................................................. 3-84 3.4 list of settings ..................................................................................................... 3-86 3.4.1 set resolution ............................................................................................... 3-86 3.4.2 set values for rbw, vbw and sweep-time .............................................. 3-86 3.4.3 factory defaults ............................................................................................ 3-87 3.4.4 defaults configuration values ..................................................................... 3-87 3.4.5 parameters range ......................................................................................... 3-90 4 principle of measurement ........................................................... 4-1 4.1 input saturation ................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) ......................................... 4-3 4.2.1 differences between full screen and separate screen operation processes 4-3 4.2.2 root nyquist filter ....................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.3 noise correction function ............................................................................ 4-7
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) table of contents c-4 4.3 operation of the gated sweep ............................................................................. 4-8 4.4 eye opening calculation ..................................................................................... 4-10 4.4.1 calculation using no measurement window .............................................. 4-10 4.4.2 calculation using the measurement window ............................................... 4-11 4.5 phase jitter measurement .................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 additional functions ..................................................................................... 4-12 5 remote programming ....................................................................... 5-1 5.1 gpib command index ........................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 gpib remote programming ................................................................................ 5-7 5.2.1 gpib ............................................................................................................. 5-7 5.2.2 gpib setup ................................................................................................... 5-8 5.2.3 gpib interface functions ............................................................................. 5-9 5.2.4 responses to interface messages .................................................................. 5-10 5.2.5 message exchange protocol ......................................................................... 5-11 5.2.6 command syntax .......................................................................................... 5-12 5.2.7 data formats ................................................................................................. 5-13 5.2.8 status bytes ................................................................................................... 5-14 5.2.9 gpib command codes ................................................................................. 5-21 5.2.10 example programs ........................................................................................ 5-45 5.2.10.1 sample programs for setting or reading measurement conditions ........ 5-45 5.2.10.2 sample programs for reading data .......................................................... 5-47 5.2.10.3 sample programs for inputting or outputting trace data ....................... 5-52 5.2.10.4 program examples using the status byte ................................................ 5-56 5.3 rs-232 remote control function ....................................................................... 5-59 5.3.1 gpib and rs-232 compatibility .................................................................. 5-59 5.3.2 features of rs-232 remote control ............................................................. 5-59 5.3.3 parameter setup window ............................................................................. 5-59 5.3.4 interface connection ...................................................................................... 5-60 5.3.5 data format .................................................................................................. 5-61 5.3.6 differences between rs-232 and gpib ....................................................... 5-62 5.3.7 panel control ................................................................................................ 5-62 5.3.8 remote control usage examples ................................................................. 5-63 6 specifications .......................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 r3264 specifications ........................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 r3267 specifications ........................................................................................... 6-7 6.3 r3273 specifications ........................................................................................... 6-14 6.4 specifications for the memory card (option) ..................................................... 6-21 appendix ................................................................................................................ a-1 a.1 before contacting with a problem ...................................................................... a-1 a.2 error message ...................................................................................................... a-3
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) table of contents c-5 a.3 glossary ............................................................................................................... a-9 a.4 db conversion formulas ..................................................................................... a-16 dimensional outline drawing ......................................................... ext-1 alphabetical index .................................................................................... i-1
f-1 r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) list of illustrations no. title page 1-1 operating environment ..................................................................................................... 1-4 1-2 replacing the power fuse ................................................................................................. 1 -6 1-3 power cable ............................................................................................................... ....... 1-7 1-4 human body ................................................................................................................ ...... 1-9 1-5 floor in the work area .................................................................................................... ... 1-9 1-6 benchboard ................................................................................................................ ....... 1-9 1-7 connecting the power supply cable ................................................................................ 1-10 1-8 start-up screen ........................................................................................................... ....... 1-11 1-9 config menu ............................................................................................................... ...... 1-11 1-10 selftest menu ............................................................................................................ ........ 1-12 1-11 selftest result .......................................................................................................... ......... 1-12 1-12 removing the display filter ............................................................................................. 1 -13 2-1 front panel ............................................................................................................... ......... 2-1 2-2 display section ........................................................................................................... ...... 2-2 2-3 power switch/connector section ..................................................................................... 2-3 2-4 floppy disk drive section ............................................................................................... 2- 4 2-5 measurement section ............................................................................................... 2-4 2-6 marker section ............................................................................................................ 2-5 2-7 save/recall section ....................................................................................................... ... 2-5 2-8 display control section ......................................................................................... 2-6 2-9 entry section ............................................................................................................. ... 2-7 2-10 remote section ........................................................................................................... .. 2-8 2-11 control section .......................................................................................................... ....... 2-9 2-12 option section ........................................................................................................... ....... 2-9 2-13 screen annotation ........................................................................................................ ..... 2-10 2-14 display area names ....................................................................................................... .. 2-11 2-15 rear panel ............................................................................................................... .......... 2-12 2-16 span menu ................................................................................................................ ........ 2-14 2-17 soft menu configuration (config key) ........................................................................ 2-16 2-18 factory defaults ......................................................................................................... ....... 2-19 2-19 calibration output ....................................................................................................... ..... 2-19 2-20 frequency menu ........................................................................................................... .... 2-20 2-21 setting the center frequency ............................................................................................ 2 -20 2-22 setting measurement conditions ...................................................................................... 2-21 2-23 peak search .............................................................................................................. ......... 2-21 2-24 frequency difference between the peak point and a point 3 db levels down .............. 2-22 2-25 frequency difference between the peak point and a point 60 db levels down ............ 2-22 2-26 setting measurement conditions ...................................................................................... 2-24 2-27 frequency counter measurement ..................................................................................... 2-24 2-28 frequency counter measurement (resolution: 10 hz) .................................................... 2-25 2-29 the display line ......................................................................................................... ..... 2-27 2-30 measuring the values relative to the display line ......................................................... 2-27 2-31 the measuring window ................................................................................................... 2- 28 2-32 setting measurement conditions ...................................................................................... 2-30 2-33 displaying the correction table ....................................................................................... 2-3 0
f-2 r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) list of illustrations no. title page 2-34 entering frequency data .................................................................................................. 2-31 2-35 showing a trace whose level is corrected .................................................................... 2-31 2-36 corrected compensation data .......................................................................................... 2-32 2-37 setup for measuring two signals separately ................................................................... 2-33 2-38 two superimposed peaks ................................................................................................. 2- 34 2-39 two discernible peaks .................................................................................................... .2-34 2-40 two distinct peaks can now be seen ............................................................................. 2-35 2-41 setup for verifying the dynamic range .......................................................................... 2-36 2-42 trace prior to changing the rbw .................................................................................... 2-37 2-43 trace after changing the rbw ....................................................................................... 2-37 2-44 trace after changing the vbw ....................................................................................... 2-38 2-45 the trace after averaging ................................................................................................ 2-38 2-46 measuring am signal in separate screen mode .............................................................. 2-39 2-47 screen with uncal message .......................................................................................... 2-40 2-48 uncal message removed ............................................................................................. 2-40 2-49 measuring am signal in separate screen mode .............................................................. 2-41 2-50 displaying the trace in full screen mode ....................................................................... 2-42 2-51 displaying the trace in separate screen mode ................................................................ 2-42 2-52 displaying the magnified lower screen .......................................................................... 2-43 2-53 measuring burst signal in separate screen mode ........................................................... 2-44 2-54 trace of a burst signal .................................................................................................. ... 2-45 2-55 burst signal in the zero span ........................................................................................... 2 -46 2-56 displaying the trace in the separate screen mode .......................................................... 2-46 2-57 observing the leading edge in the separate screen mode .............................................. 2-47 2-58 observing the trailing edge in separate screen mode .................................................... 2-47 2-59 setup to measure pulse signal using 2 screens ............................................................... 2-49 2-60 trace of a burst signal .................................................................................................. ... 2-50 2-61 f/t function displayed in separate screen mode ........................................................... 2-51 2-62 f/t mode in zoom display .............................................................................................. 2-5 1 2-63 setup to measure dual parameters ................................................................................... 2-53 2-64 displaying in separate screen mode ................................................................................ 2-54 2-65 setting for the upper screen in separate screen mode .................................................... 2-55 2-66 setting for the lower screen in separate screen mode ................................................... 2-55 2-67 magnified trace for the lower screen ............................................................................. 2-56 2-68 setup to measure pulse signals with different frequencies using 2 screens ................. 2-57 2-69 upper screen in sync with the trigger signal ................................................................. 2-58 2-70 displaying the traces of 900 mhz and 1800 mhz in the separate screen mode ........... 2-59 2-71 displaying the trace of 1800 mhz for the lower screen ............................................... 2-60 2-72 cal menu ................................................................................................................. .......... 2-62 2-73 editing the limit line 1 ................................................................................................. ... 2-66 2-74 screen displayed after limit line 1 data has been entered .......................................... 2-67 2-75 screen displayed after limit line 2 data has been entered .......................................... 2-67 2-76 setting limit line pass/fail ........................................................................................ 2-68 2-77 pass/fail result using limit line 1 ............................................................................. 2-68 2-78 pass/fail result using limit lines 1 and 2 ................................................................. 2-69 2-79 judgment result after the offset has been changed ....................................................... 2-70 2-80 setup for the average power measurement ..................................................................... 2-71 2-81 checking the input signal ................................................................................................ .2-73
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) list of illustrations f-3 no. title page 2-82 setting measurement conditions for average power measurement ................................ 2-73 2-83 result of an average power measurement ....................................................................... 2-74 2-84 moving the measurement result ...................................................................................... 2-74 2-85 setup for measuring the total power ............................................................................... 2-75 2-86 setting conditions for the total power measurement ...................................................... 2-77 2-87 result of total power measurement ................................................................................ 2-77 2-88 setup for measuring the total power ............................................................................... 2-78 2-89 displaying the measuring window .................................................................................. 2-80 2-90 power density measurement ............................................................................................ 2-80 2-91 setup for measuring the channel power .......................................................................... 2-81 2-92 result of channel power measurement ............................................................................ 2-83 2-93 setup for measuring the occupied bandwidth ................................................................. 2-84 2-94 obw measurement results .............................................................................................. 2-86 2-95 setup measuring adjacent channel leakage power ........................................................ 2-88 2-96 pdc trace ................................................................................................................ .......... 2-89 2-97 cs/bs setup dialog box ................................................................................................... 2-90 2-98 root nyquist filter dialog box ......................................................................................... 2- 91 2-99 acp measurement display in full screen mode ............................................................. 2-91 2-100 measurement using acp graph ................................................................................... 2-92 2-101 acp at the 100 khz ...................................................................................................... .... 2-92 2-102 setup measuring adjacent channel leakage power ........................................................ 2-93 2-103 phs trace ............................................................................................................... .......... 2-94 2-104 cs/bs setup dialog box .................................................................................................. .2-95 2-105 measurement result in acp separate screen mode ........................................................ 2-96 2-106 setup for measuring a burst signal .................................................................................. 2-97 2-107 burst signal displayed in split screen mode .................................................................. 2-98 2-108 trigger setup ........................................................................................................... ......... 2-98 2-109 burst signal by use of the gated sweep (separate screen mode) .................................. 2-99 2-110 burst signal by use of the gated sweep (full screen mode) .......................................... 2-100 2-111 setup for measuring a burst wave signal ......................................................................... 2-101 2-112 burst signal in the frequency domain ............................................................................... 2-102 2-113 burst signal in the time domain ..................................................................................... 2-10 2 2-114 burst signal in synchronization with the trigger signal ................................................. 2-103 2-115 measuring burst signal leading edge ............................................................................. 2-104 2-116 measuring burst signal trailing edge ............................................................................. 2-104 2-117 setup for measuring the harmonic distortion ................................................................. 2-105 2-118 trace of harmonics ...................................................................................................... .... 2-106 2-119 secondary harmonics ..................................................................................................... .. 2-107 2-120 tertiary harmonics ...................................................................................................... ..... 2-107 2-121 setup for measuring the harmonic distortion ................................................................. 2-108 2-122 trace of harmonics ...................................................................................................... .... 2-109 2-123 peak list display ....................................................................................................... ....... 2-110 2-124 setup for measuring the harmonic distortion ................................................................. 2-111 2-125 trace of harmonics ...................................................................................................... .... 2-112 2-126 secondary harmonics ..................................................................................................... .. 2-113 2-127 tertiary harmonics ...................................................................................................... ..... 2-113 2-128 setup for measuring the third order intermodulation distortion ................................... 2-114 2-129 third order intermodulation distortion ........................................................................... 2-115
f-4 r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) list of illustrations no. title page 2-130 third order intermodulation distortion (peak ? ref) .................................................... 2-116 2-131 measurement result of the third order intermodulation distortion ............................... 2-116 2-132 setup for measuring am signal ....................................................................................... 2-11 7 2-133 am signal with low modulation factor ......................................................................... 2-118 2-134 relationship between dlevel (db) and modulation factor m(%) ................................... 2-119 2-135 setup for measuring fm signal ........................................................................................ 2-1 20 2-136 trace of an fm signal ................................................................................................... ... 2-121 2-137 measuring a frequency deviation ...................................................................................... 2-1 21 2-138 modulation frequency of the fm signal .......................................................................... 2-122 2-139 setup for measuring modulation index ............................................................................ 2-123 2-140 fm signal with low modulation index ........................................................................... 2-124 2-141 setup for measuring pulsed rf signal ............................................................................. 2-125 2-142 spectrum of a pulsed signal ............................................................................................. 2-127 2-143 measuring peak power .................................................................................................... . 2-127 2-144 measuring the pulse repetition frequency ......................................................................... 2-129 2-145 selecting destination device ............................................................................................ 2-131 2-146 save item setup dialog box .............................................................................................. 2-131 2-147 file saved .............................................................................................................. ........... 2-132 2-148 file protection enabled ................................................................................................. .... 2-133 2-149 selected file ........................................................................................................... ........... 2-135 2-150 read data ............................................................................................................... ........... 2-135 2-151 file to be deleted ...................................................................................................... ....... 2-136 2-152 file already deleted .................................................................................................... ..... 2-136 2-153 specifying .............................................................................................................. ........... 2-138 2-154 file dialog box ......................................................................................................... ........ 2-139 2-155 printer dialog box ...................................................................................................... ........ 2-141 2-156 floppy disk write protection ........................................................................................... 2 -142 2-157 media menu .............................................................................................................. ........ 2-143 2-158 slots in the memory card drive ....................................................................................... 2-1 44 2-159 date/time dialog box .................................................................................................... .. 2-146 2-160 dialog box used to enter labels ..................................................................................... 2-14 7 2-161 displaying the screen label ............................................................................................. 2-148 4-1 input section block diagram ........................................................................................... 4-1 4-2 relationship between the input and output of the mixer ................................................. 4-1 4-3 full screen mode .......................................................................................................... .... 4-3 4-4 separate screen mode ...................................................................................................... 4-4 4-5 characteristics of the root nyquist filter ........................................................................ 4-6 4-6 internal block diagram .................................................................................................... 4-8 4-7 generating the internal gate signal .................................................................................. 4-9 4-8 eye opening ratio calculation (using no measurement window) ................................ 4-10 4-9 eye opening calculation (using the measurement window) ......................................... 4-11 4-10 rms phase jitter measurement method .......................................................................... 4-12 5-1 arrangement of the three status registers ...................................................................... 5-15 5-2 details of the three status registers ................................................................................ 5-16 5-3 structure of the status byte register ................................................................................ 5-18 5-4 relationship between screen graticule and trace data ................................................... 5-52
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) list of illustrations f-5 no. title page 5-5 parameter setup ........................................................................................................... ..... 5-59 5-6 connection between the controller and the analyzer ...................................................... 5-60 5-7 cable wiring diagram ...................................................................................................... 5-61 5-8 data format ............................................................................................................... ....... 5-61 a-1 bandwidth selectivity ..................................................................................................... .. a-9 a-2 bandwidth switching uncertainty .................................................................................... a-10 a-3 if gain uncertainty ....................................................................................................... ... a-10 a-4 noise sidebands ........................................................................................................... ..... a-11 a-5 occupied bandwidth ........................................................................................................ .a-12 a-6 resolution bandwidth ...................................................................................................... .a-13 a-7 spurious response ......................................................................................................... ... a-14 a-8 v.s.w.r ................................................................................................................... ......... a-14
t-1 r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) list of tables no. title page 1-1 standard accessories list ................................................................................................ .1-2 1-2 power cable options ...................................................................................................... .. 1-3 1-3 power supply specifications ............................................................................................ 1- 5 2-1 correction .............................................................................................................. .......... 2-29 2-2 calibration items ........................................................................................................ ....... 2-61 2-3 setting limit line 1 ..................................................................................................... ..... 2-66 2-4 setting limit line 2 ..................................................................................................... ..... 2-66 2-5 recommended printers ..................................................................................................... 2-140 3-1 center frequency set resolution vs. frequency span ..................................................... 3-86 3-2 values for rbw, vbw and sweep-time (using auto) ................................................ 3-86 3-3 factory defaults ......................................................................................................... ....... 3-87 3-4 default settings (1 of 3) ................................................................................................ .... 3-87 3-5 parameters range ......................................................................................................... .... 3-90 5-1 a key/b key (trace a/trace b) (1 of 3) ......................................................................... 5-21 5-2 att key (attenuator) ..................................................................................................... .5-23 5-3 cal key (calibration) .................................................................................................... .5-24 5-4 config key (configuration) .......................................................................................... 5-25 5-5 couple key (couple function) ..................................................................................... 5-26 5-6 format key (display format) (1 of 2) ........................................................................ 5-27 5-7 freq key (frequency) .................................................................................................... 5 -29 5-8 level key ................................................................................................................ ...... 5-30 5-9 meas key ................................................................................................................. ....... 5-31 5-10 mkr key (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................ ...... 5-32 5-11 mkr key (maker ) .................................................................................................. 5-34 5-12 power key (power measurement) (1 of 2) .................................................................... 5-34 5-13 preset key (initialization) ............................................................................................ 5 -36 5-14 rcl key (reading data) ................................................................................................. 5 -36 5-15 save key (saving data) ................................................................................................. 5 -36 5-16 span key (frequency span) ........................................................................................... 5-36 5-17 srch key (peak search) ................................................................................................. 5 -37 5-18 swp/single key (sweep time) ................................................................................... 5-38 5-19 util key (utility) (1 of 3) ............................................................................................. .. 5-39 5-20 window key (window) ................................................................................................ 5-42 5-21 numeric keys/step keys/data knob/unit keys (entering data) ........................................ 5-43 5-22 miscellaneous ........................................................................................................... ........ 5-44 5-23 trace accuracy specification codes ................................................................................ 5-52 5-24 i/o formati ............................................................................................................. ........... 5-53
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.1 product description 1-1 1 introduction this chapter includes the accessories along with information on the analyzers? operating environment, and information on how to perform a system checkout for users who operate the analyzer for the first time. 1.1 product description the r3267 series spectrum analyzers are high-performance and multi-featured analyzers (with basic func- tions) that respond to customer demands for the future public land mobile telecommunication system and have a high ratio of c/n (carrier to noise). the key features of the analyzer are listed below: wide frequency ranges: r3264 9 khz to 3.5 ghz r3267 100 hz to 8 ghz r3273 100 hz to 26.5 ghz excellent signal purity: -110 dbc/hz 10 khz offset low noise level: r3264 -146 dbm/hz or less (at 2 ghz) r3267/73 -148 dbm/hz or less (at 2 ghz) high-speed zero span sweep: 1 sec precision level measurements high-speed measurements with 20 traces/sec various types of interface that permit an easy systematization: gpib, parallel and rs232 interfaces a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive equipped as standard (compatible with ms-dos)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.2 accessories 1-2 1.2 accessories table 1-1 lists the standard accessories shipped with the analyzer. if any of the accessories are damaged or missing, contact a sales representative. order new accessories by type name. table 1-1 standard accessories list name of accessory type name quantity remarks power cable a01413 1 *1 input cable a01036-0150 1 n-bnc through connector jug-201a/u 1 power fuse t6.3a/250v 1 front cover 1 *2 r3267 series operation manual er3267/73 1 english * 1: depends on the type specified when purchasing the r3267 series (see table 1-2). *2: the front cover does not come with the analyzer when opt 85 (jis rack mount set) or opt 86 (eia rack mount set) is specified in a purchase or- der.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.2 accessories 1-3 table 1-2 power cable options plug configuration standards rating, color and length model number (option number) jis: japan law on electrical appliances 125 v at 7 a black 2 m (6 ft) straight: a01402 angled: a01412 ul: united states of america csa: canada 125 v at 7 a black 2 m (6 ft) straight: a01403 (option 95) angled: a01413 cee: europe demko: denmark nemko: norway vde: germany kema: the netherlands cebec: belgium ove: austria fimko: finland semko: sweden 250 v at 6 a gray 2 m (6 ft) straight: a01404 (option 96) angled: a01414 sev: switzerland 250 v at 6 a gray 2 m (6 ft) straight: a01405 (option 97) angled: a01415 saa: australia, new zealand 250 v at 6 a gray 2 m (6 ft) straight: a01406 (option 98) angled: --------- bs: united kingdom 250 v at 6 a black 2 m (6 ft) straight: a01407 (option 99) angled: a01417
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.3 operating environment 1-4 1.3 operating environment this section describes the environmental conditions and power requirements necessary to use the r3267 se- ries. 1.3.1 environmental conditions the r3267 series should be only be used in an area which satisfies the following conditions: ambient temperature: 0c to +50c (operating temperature) relative humidity: 85% or less (without condensation) an area free from corrosive gas an area away from direct sunlight a dust-free area an area free from vibrations a low noise area although the r3267 series has been designed to withstand a certain amount of noise riding on the ac power line, it should be used in an area of low noise. use a noise cut filter when ambient noise is unavoidable. an area allowing unobstructed air flow there is an exhaust cooling fan on the rear panel and exhaust vents on both sides and the bottom (toward the front) of the r3267 series. never block the fan and these vents. keep the rear panel 10 centimeters away from the wall. in addition, do not use the r3267 series upright turned the rear panel side down. the resulting internal temperature rise will affect measure- ment accuracy. figure 1-1 operating environment line filter vibration direct sunlight corrosive gas avoid operation in the following areas. use a noise cut filter when there is a large amount of noise riding on the power line. keep the rear panel 10 centimeters away from the wall front dust do not use the r3267 series upright turned the rear panel side down. front
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.3.2 power supply specifications 1-5 the r3267 series can be used safely under the following conditions: altitude of up to 2000 m installation categories ii pollution degree 2 1.3.2 power supply specifications the power supply specifications of the r3267 series are listed in table 1-3. table 1-3 power supply specifications caution to prevent damage, operate the r3267 series within the specified input voltage and frequency ranges. 1.3.3 power fuse caution: 1. when a fuse blows, there may be some problem with the r3267 series. contact a sales representative before replacing the fuse. 2. for fire prevention, use only fuses with the same rating and same type. the power fuse is placed in the fuse holder which is mounted on the rear panel. a spare fuse is located in the fuse holder. to check or replace the power fuse, use the following procedure: 1. press the power switch (on the front panel) to the off position. 2. press the main power switch (on the rear panel) to the off position. 3. disconnect the power cable from the ac power outlet. 4. remove the fuse holder on the rear panel (see figure 1-2). 5. check (and replace if necessary) the power fuse and put it back in the fuse holder. 100 vac operation 220 vac operation remarks input voltage range 90 v to 132 v 198 v to 250 v automatically switches between input levels of 100 vac and 220 vac. frequency range 48hz to 66hz power consumption 300 va or below
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.3.3 power fuse 1-6 figure 1-2 replacing the power fuse power fuse fuse holder (removed) fuse holder (removed) use a flat blade screwdrive r
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.3.4 power cable 1-7 1.3.4 power cable caution: 1. use a power cable rated for the voltage in question. be sure however to use a power cable conforming to safety standards of your nation when using a product overseas (see table 1-2). 2. be sure to plug the power cable into an electrical outlet which has a safety ground terminal. grounding will be defeated if you use an extension cord which dose not include a safety ground terminal. 3. turn the main power switch (on the rear panel) and the power switch (on the front panel) off prior to connecting the power cable. figure 1-3 power cable to ac power outlet ground pin 3-pin power cable
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.4 precautions in use 1-8 1.4 precautions in use (1) before starting the measurement when turning on the power, don?t connect dut. before starting the measurement, check to see the output power level. (2) removing of case do not open the case to one except service man of our company. the r3267 series has a high temperature part and a high pressure part. (3) when abnormality occurs when smoke rises from the r3267 series , smell nastily, or rear unusual sound feel, turn off the power switch. pull out power cable from the outlet. and contact to our company. the address and the telephone number of our company are in the end of this manual. (4) electromagnetic interference. electromagnetic interference may be caused to the television or the radio. if the r3267 series power is turned off and the electromagnetic interference is reduced, then the r3267 series has caused the problem. prevent electromagnetic interference by the following procedure. change the direction of antenna of the television or the radio. place the r3267 series the other side of the television or the radio. place the r3267 series away from the television or the radio. use another line of power source for the television or the radio than the r3267 series . (5) prevention of electrostatic buildup to prevent damages to semiconductor parts from electrostatic discharge (esd), the precautions shown below should be taken. we recommend that two or more measures be combined to provide adequate protection from esd. (static electricity can easily be built up when a person moves or an insulator is rubbed.) countermeasure example human body: use of a wrist strap (see figure 1-4). floor in the work area: installation of a conductive mat, the use of conductive shoes, and grounding (see figure 1-5). benchboard: installation of a conductive mat and grounding (see figure 1-6).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.4 precautions in use 1-9 figure 1-4 human body figure 1-5 floor in the work area figure 1-6 benchboard wrist strap equivalent resistance approx.1m ? ground benchboard floor equivalent resistance 10 6 to 10 9 ? 1m ? ground conductive shoes conductive mat benchboard ground 1m ? conductive mat copper foil tape (method 1) benchboard ground 1m ? conductive mat (method 2) conductor benchboard ground 1m ? 1m ? conductive mat (method 3)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.5 system checkout 1-10 1.5 system checkout this section describes the selftest which must be performed when operating the r3267 series for the first time. follow the procedure below: 1. check to see that the power switch (on the front panel) and the main power switch (on the rear panel) are turned off. 2. connect the power cable provided to the ac power supply connector on the rear panel. caution: to prevent damage, operate the r3267 series within specified input voltage and frequency ranges. figure 1-7 connecting the power supply cable 3. connect the power cable to the outlet. 4. turn on the main power switch (on the rear panel). 5. turn on the power switch (on the front panel). the r3267 series performs the initial test (processing time: approximately 10 seconds). the start-up screen is displayed as shown in figure 1-8. note: 1. there is a possibility that the screen display is different from the one shown in fig- ure 1-8, depending on previously saved conditions. 2. an error message will be displayed when an abnormal condition is detected. refer to the list of error messages to solve the problem (refer to section a.2). ac power supply connector
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.5 system checkout 1-11 figure 1-8 start-up screen 6. attach the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel and con- nect the input cable from the cal out connector to the input connector. 7. press shift . the shift lamp lights. 8. press config(preset) . the default settings have now been reset. the start-up screen is displayed as shown in figure 1-8. 9. press config . the config menu is displayed. figure 1-9 config menu 10. press more 1/2 and selftest . the selftest menu is displayed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.5 system checkout 1-12 figure 1-10 selftest menu 11. press execute selftest . the selftest consisting of following items is executed in sequence and the result is displayed. figure 1-11 selftest result note: if the selftest detects any errors, do not attempt to use the r3267 series any further. contact a sales representative as soon as possible. if the selftest is executed without a calibration signal, it fails, so make sure to supply the cal- ibration signal. 12. press return . this completes the system checkout.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.6 cleaning, storing and transporting the r3267 series 1-13 1.6 cleaning, storing and transporting the r3267 series 1.6.1 cleaning remove dust from the outside of the r3267 series by wiping or brushing the surface with a soft cloth or small brush. use a brush to remove dust from around the panel keys. hardened dirt can be removed by using a cloth which has been dampened in water containing a mild detergent. caution: 1. do not allow water to get inside the r3267 series. 2. do not use organic cleaning solvents, such as benzene, toluene, xylene, acetone or similar compounds, since these solvents may damage the plastic parts. 3. do not use abrasive cleaners. removing the display filter normally cleaning the display filter from the front should be sufficient. however, if the inside of the filter or the lcd surface is dirty, you can detach the screen filter from the r3267 series by removing the two screws on the front and pulling the right-hand part of the filter forward. clean the filter with a piece of soft close. caution do not touch the lcd display with your finger when the filter has been removed. figure 1-12 removing the display filter display filter comes off by removing two screws
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.6.2 storing 1-14 1.6.2 storing store the r3267 series in an area which has a temperature from -20c to +60c. if you plan to store the r3267 series for a long period (more than 90 days), put the r3267 series in a vapor-barrier bag with a drying agent and store the r3267 series in a dust-free location out of direct sunlight. 1.6.3 transporting when you ship the r3267 series, use the original container and packing material. if the original packaging is not available, use the following repackaging guidelines: 1. to allow for cushioning, use a corrugated cardboard container that is at least 15 centimeters larger than those of the r3267 series. 2. surround the r3267 series with protective sheeting. 3. cushion the r3267 series on all sides with packing material. 4. seal the corrugated cardboard container with shipping tape or an industrial sta- pler. if you are shipping the r3267 series to a sales representative for service or repair, attach a tag to the r3267 series that shows the following information: owner and address name of a contact person at your location serial number of the r3267 series (located on the rear panel) description of the service requested
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 1.7 about calibration 1-15 1.7 about calibration when you want to calibrate the r3267 series, please contact a sales representative. 1.8 concerning limited-life parts the r3267 series uses the following parts with limited life that are not listed in safety summary. replace the parts listed below after their expected lifespan has expired. desirable period one year part name life description input attenuator r3264: 1 million times when the error message "input att cal failed" (under the message code "400") is displayed, run the user selftest. if the rf block error occurred during the user selftest, contact a sales representative. r3267: 2 million times r3273: 5 million times mechanical relays 100,000 times applicable to the relays used with opt01 only.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1 panel description 2-1 2 operation this chapter describes the following. description on the front and rear panels screen annotation basic operation measurement examples expanded functions 2.1 panel description this section describes the names, functions and screen annotations of the front and rear panels. 2.1.1 front panel the panel keys and connectors are described below for each section of the front panel. figure 2-1 front panel the front panel consists of 11 sections as shown below. 1. display section 2. power switch/connector section 3. floppy disk drive section 4. measurement section 5. marker section 6. save/recall section 7. display control section 8. entry section 9. remote section 10. control section 11. option section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 8
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-2 2.1.1.1 display section figure 2-2 display section 1. liquid crystal display (lcd) displays trace and measured data. 2. contrast control adjusts the display contrast. 3. active off key turns off the active area removing any displayed information. 4. soft keys seven keys corresponding to the soft-menu display on the left; pressing a soft key selects the corresponding menu item. 5. return key used to return the screen display to the previous level of the hierarchical soft-menu structure. 1 2 3 4 5
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-3 2.1.1.2 power switch/connector section figure 2-3 power switch/connector section 1. power switch turns the power on or off. caution: to turn the analyzer power on, turn on the main power switch (on the rear panel) and then turn this power switch on. 2. phone connector unused 3. probe pwr connector power supply for accessories such as the active probe. (not available when opt 22 or opt23 is installed.) 4. ext key connector unused 5. tg output connector outputs the tg signal. (option) 6. cal out connector outputs the calibration signal. 7. input connector inputs the signal to be measured. caution: do not apply signals whose rf level and dc voltage exceed the values prescribed by the specification. 8. unused 9. ext mixer connector used to connect an external mixer to widen measurable fre- quency range. caution: the external mixer can be used only for the r3273. 1 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 2 1 1: nc 2: gnd 3: -12.6v 4: +12.6v
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-4 2.1.1.3 floppy disk drive section figure 2-4 floppy disk drive section 1. eject button used to eject floppy disks from the drive. 2. floppy disk drive door insert floppy disks here. 3. access lamp turns on when the floppy disk in the drive is being accessed. 2.1.1.4 measurement section figure 2-5 measurement section 1. power key used to measure power. 2. util key used to measure the occupied bandwidth (obw), harmonics and so on. 3. transient key unused (option) 4. advance key unused (option) 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-5 2.1.1.5 marker section figure 2-6 marker section 1. mkr key used to obtain marker values so that they can be used as data for other functions. 2. meas key used to set the measurement mode. 3. mkr key used to display the marker. off key (shift, mkr) used to turn the marker off. 4. srch key used to search for the peak point on the trace. 2.1.1.6 save/recall section figure 2-7 save/recall section 1. rcl key used to recall set conditions and traces previously saved. save key (shift, rcl) used to save measurement conditions and traces. 2. copy key used to output the displayed data to the printer or save it to a floppy disk. cancel key (shift, copy) used to cancel the copy operation in progress. 2 3 4 1 1 2
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-6 2.1.1.7 display control section figure 2-8 display control section 1. step keys used to enter data in predefined steps. 2. data knob used to finely adjust input data by turning the data knob clock- wise or counterclockwise. in the dialog box, turn the data knob, select the items to be set and press the knob. 3. format key used to set up display lines and limit lines, and to enter labels. 4. window key used to set up measuring windows and separate windows. 5. a key used to set trace a. 6. b key used to set trace b. 1 2 3 56 4
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-7 2.1.1.8 entry section figure 2-9 entry section 1. freq key used to set center, start or stop frequency. 2. span key used to set the frequency span, full span or zero span. 3. level key used to set the reference level, vertical axis scale or unit. 4. couple key use to set the resolution bandwidth (rbw), video bandwidth (vbw) and sweep time. 5. numeric keys used to enter numeric values. there are ten number keys (0 through 9) and a decimal point- key (.). cal key (shift, 7) used to execute calibrations for the analyzer. 6. -(bs) key used to remove data you have entered or to enter a minus (-) sign. 7. units keys these are used to select a unit and enter a numeric value. ghz key sets ghz, +dbm or db. mhz key sets mhz, -dbm or sec. khz key sets khz, mv or msec. hz (entr) key sets hz or sec. this key is also used to confirm data. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-8 2.1.1.9 remote section figure 2-10 remote section 1. lcl key turns off the gpib remote control mode (this applies only when the remote lamp is lit). 2. remote lamp lit when in the remote state. 3. config key sets interface operation conditions, etc. preset key (shift, config) resets all analyzer settings to the factory defaults, or to the user-defined presets. 4. shift key shift is used to select the secondary functions that are labeled in blue above the panel keys. 5. shift lamp the led is lit when the shift key has been pressed. 1 2 4 5 3
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.1 front panel 2-9 2.1.1.10 control section figure 2-11 control section 1. tg key unused (tg option) 2. repeat (start/stop) key starts a continuous sweep or resets the sweep in progress. 3. sweep indicator lit while sweeping. 4. single key executes a single sweep or resets the sweep in progress. 5. swp key sets the sweep time. 6. att key sets the input attenuator. 7. auto lamp lit when the input attenuator is set to auto. 2.1.1.11 option section figure 2-12 option section 1. on key unused (option) 2. stop key unused (option) 3 7 1 2 4 56 1 2
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.2 screen annotation 2-10 2.1.2 screen annotation this section describes both the annotation and display areas of the screen. (1) screen annotation figure 2-13 screen annotation 1. level offset mark 2. reference level 3. trigger position mark (only for zero span) 4. trace active mark 5. display line set-up display 6. trace mode 7. detector mode 8. date 9. uncal message 10. frequency span/stop frequency 11. attenuator 12. sweep time 13. manual mark 14. video bandwidth (vbw) 15. resolution bandwidth (rbw) 16. center frequency/start frequency 17. frequency offset mark 18. external 10 mhz reference mark 19. trigger level mark 20. correction factor mark 21. error message 22. if/adc overrange message (only for digital filters) 3 7 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 6 20 19 16 18 17 21 15 14 13 12 11 9 10 over 22
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.2 screen annotation 2-11 (2) display area figure 2-14 display area names 1. title area 2. reference area 3. trace status area 4. marker area 5. active area 6. result area 7. frequency area 8. soft menu display area 2 1 4 3 8 7 5 6
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.3 rear panel 2-12 2.1.3 rear panel this subsection shows the rear panel and describes its terminals and connectors. figure 2-15 rear panel 1. printer connector connector for a printer 2. parallel connector unused 3. gpib connector connector for an external controller used when set to remote control through gpib interface. 4. serial i/o connector connector for an external controller used when set to remote control through rs232 interface. 5. rgb connector connector for an external monitor compatible with vga specifica- tions. 6. gate in terminal connector for inputting the gate signal of the gated sweep. 7. ext trig terminal connector for inputting not only the external trigger signal but the gate timing signal of the gated sweep. 8. trig out terminal connector for outputting a signal in synchronization with the trigger signal. 9. x-out terminal connector for outputting the ramp voltage proportional to sweep. 10. y-out terminal connector for outputting the signal proportional to power level. 11. exhaust vent cooling fan caution: do not block the vent. 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 18 18 7 8 11 10 9
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.1.3 rear panel 2-13 12. main power switch used to turn the main power on or off. 13. ac power connector connect the input power cable from the analyzer to the outlet of the ac power source. 14. fuse holder used to hold a power fuse to protect the analyzer from an overcurrent. 15. if out 21.4 mhz terminal connector for outputting the 3rd if (21.4 mhz) signal. if out 421 mhz terminal connector for outputting the 2nd if (421 mhz) signal. 16. 10 mhz ref in terminal connector for inputting the 10 mhz reference signal. 10 mhz ref out terminal connector for outputting the 10 mhz reference signal. 17. input i terminal unused (option) input q terminal unused (option) 18. rear feet this is to protect the projections such as the fan and connectors. caution: never use the analyzer upright with the rear panel to the bottom.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2 basic operation 2-14 2.2 basic operation this section describes the method of how to go through the menus and use the measurement functions. 2.2.1 operating menus and entering data this section explains how the panel keys and soft keys are used. (1) selecting the menu if you press a panel key, the soft menu associated with that key is displayed in the soft menu area on the screen. to make a soft menu selection, press the soft key next to the menu item. when a soft menu is selected and any item corresponding to this soft menu has previously been set, the titles and values which are currently set are displayed in the active area (refer to (2) entering data). in addition, if there is an associated menus are also displayed (refer to (3) soft menu config- uration). for example, the following soft menu will be displayed when you press span. figure 2-16 span menu when selecting an item from the soft menu, press the corresponding soft key on the right.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.1 operating menus and entering data 2-15 (2) entering data when a value is displayed in the active area, you can change it using the numeric keys, the step keys or the data knob. entering data using the numeric keys you use the following keys to enter data: the number keys (0 through 9), the decimal point key, the backspace (bs) or minus (-) key. if you make a mistake when using the numeric keys, you can use the backspace (bs) key to delete the last digit entered. if you have not entered any data, pressing the bs key enters a minus (-) sign. after entering the data, pressing the entr key or one of the other unit keys completes the operation. caution: data entered with the numeric keys that is not terminated with a units terminator is aborted when you press any panel key. example 1: the following example sets the reference level to -20 dbm using the numeric keys: press level, -, 2, 0 and ghz(+dbm) or level, 2, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . entering data using the step keys the step keys are used to enter data in a predefined step size. press the step key to decrease the value and the step key to increase the value. you can enter data while looking at the active area and the trace on the screen using the step keys. you can also define the step size manually. example 2: the following example sets the reference level to 0 dbm using the step keys: press the step key following example 1. this sets the reference level to -10.0 dbm. if you press the step key once more, the level is set to 0.0 dbm. entering data using the data knob the data knob is used to set data in increments smaller than the step size. this is convenient when making fine adjustments to data already entered. example 3: the following example sets the reference level to 0.5 dbm using the data knob. turning the data knob clockwise increases the reference level in increments of 0.1 db. continue to turn it until the active area shows a setting of 0.5 dbm. turning the data knob counter clockwise decreases the reference level by 0.1 db. (3) soft menu configuration menus consist of the main menu, associated submenus and dialog boxes. in addition, there are some soft keys with which you can switch the setting each time you press them. in this section, the menus associated with the config key are shown as an example of a typical menu configuration (see figure 2-17).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.1 operating menus and entering data 2-16 figure 2-17 soft menu configuration (config key) (4) main menu and sub menu displaying the main menu pressing a panel key displays the main menu. displaying the second screen of the main menu (the same level as the main menu) pressing more 1/2 in the main menu displays the rest of the main menu. pressing more 2/2 on the second page returns to the first page. displaying the submenu pressing a soft key in the soft menu with a mark in the right-hand corner will display the next or previous submenu. switching between settings on a toggle button. press the soft key under the soft menu with switching capability to toggle between settings for on/off, auto/mnl and similar switches each time you press the soft key. gpib&others rs232 copy config date/time trace point 1001/501 annotation display on/off more 1/2 selftest service revision more 2/2 baud rate data length stop bit parity bit flow control printer file copy device media format year month day hour minute format order panel key main menu main menu dialog box sub menu dialog box soft menu (can be omitted) config
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.1 operating menus and entering data 2-17 (5) displaying a dialog box some soft key menu items display a dialog box when pressed. how to select a setting to select a setting, use the step keys (to move the cursor upwards) and (to move the cur- sor downwards). choosing the contents from the selected setting turn the data knob to select the desired setting and press the data knob to set the data. entering numeric values use the numeric and unit keys to set the data. exiting from the dialog box press the return key or the same key that you pressed to display the dialog box again. (6) active off pressing active off removes all information from the active area. data cannot be entered if this is done. to turn the active area again, press the panel or soft key whose function you wish to use. (7) return key press the return key to return to the previous menu. (8) shift key shift is used to select the functions that are labeled in blue above the panel keys. there are five such functions: cal cancel off preset save to select one of these functions, press shift and the appropriate panel key. pressing shift lights the green led (on the left side above the key) to indicate that the shift func- tion is active. to cancel the shift function, press shift a second time before selecting other blue-labeled func- tions. the led goes off indicating that the shift function is no longer active.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers 2-18 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers the following example measures the frequency difference between the peak point and a point 3 db levels lower, and the frequency difference between the peak point and a point 60 db levels lower. use the cal signal of the analyzer as an input signal. power on note: to take accurate measurements, use the analyzer within the specified temperature range, and wait at least 60 minutes after turning on the power before performing the calibrations. in this exercise example, the warm-up and calibration are omit- ted. 1. check to see if the power switch (on the front panel) and main power switch (on the rear panel) are turned off. 2. connect the power cable provided to the ac power supply connector on the rear panel. caution: to avoid damage to the analyzer, operate the analyzer within the spec- ified input voltage and frequency ranges. 3. connect the power cable to the outlet. 4. turn on the main power switch (on the rear panel). 5. turn on the power switch (on the front panel). when the self-test has completed, the start-up screen is displayed. note: the screen displayed after the power is turned on may differ from the one shown here depending on the current settings. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 6. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers 2-19 figure 2-18 factory defaults connecting calibration signal connect the calibration signal used in the measurement. 7. attach the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 8. connect the input cable from the cal out connector to the input connector. figure 2-19 calibration output setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 9. press freq . the current center frequency is displayed in the active area, and the freq menu used to select the frequency type appears on the right.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers 2-20 figure 2-20 frequency menu 10. press 3, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 30 mhz is set. figure 2-21 setting the center frequency 11. press span . the current frequency span is displayed in the active area, and the span menu used for setting the frequency span appears on the right. 12. press 2, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 20 mhz is set. 13. press level . the current reference level is displayed in the active area, and the level menu used for setting the level appears on the right.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers 2-21 14. press 1, 0, mhz(-dbm) . a reference level of -10 dbm is set. figure 2-22 setting measurement conditions displaying the normal marker on the trace peak 15. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the trace peak, and the marker frequency (approximately 30 mhz) and level (approximately -10 dbm) are displayed in the marker area. figure 2-23 peak search displaying the delta marker this measures the frequency difference between a point 3 db levels down and a point 60 db levels down from the peak. 16. press mkr . the marker (1) menu used with the marker function is displayed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.2 displaying spectrums and operating the markers 2-22 17. press delta marker . the delta marker is displayed, and the differences (relative values) between the normal marker and delta marker frequency and level are displayed 18. move the marker to the -3 db point using the data knob while looking at the level indication in the marker area and set it as precisely as possible (an exact setting may not be possible due to resolution limitations). the frequency difference (relative value) between the peak point and a point 3 db levels lower is displayed in the marker area. figure 2-24 frequency difference between the peak point and a point 3 db levels down 19. next, move the marker to a point 60 db levels down from the peak using the data knob. the display in the marker area is the frequency difference between the peak point and a point 60 db levels down from the peak. figure 2-25 frequency difference between the peak point and a point 60 db levels down
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.3 measuring frequency using counter 2-23 2.2.3 measuring frequency using counter frequencies are measured using the counter function. use the cal signal of the analyzer as input signal. the counter function measures the signal frequency at the marker with high accuracy. the value of an amplitude indicates the amplitude at the marker point. the maximum resolution possible for the counter function display is 1 hz. as you increase the resolution, you will have to increase the gate time to compensate. caution: 1. the counter function may not work normally if the span is greater than 1 ghz or the difference between the marker and the noise level is 25 db or less. 2. the signal track mode cannot be used with this function. power on 1. turn the analyzer power on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 2. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. connecting calibration signal connect the calibration signal used in the measurement. 3. attach the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 4. connect the input cable from the cal out connector to the input connector. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 3, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 30 mhz is set. 6. press span, 5, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 50 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.3 measuring frequency using counter 2-24 figure 2-26 setting measurement conditions measuring frequency by counter this measures the frequency using the counter function. 7. press meas and counter . the counter menu used to set the frequency counter resolution is displayed and the frequency measurement by the frequency counter is started. figure 2-27 frequency counter measurement 8. press resolution 10 hz . the frequency counter resolution is set to 10 hz and is displayed in the result area.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.3 measuring frequency using counter 2-25 figure 2-28 frequency counter measurement (resolution: 10 hz) 9. press counter on/off (off). the counter function is turned off.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.4 display line and measuring window 2-26 2.2.4 display line and measuring window this section describes the display line used to compare the levels between traces and the measuring win- dow used to take measurements within a limited area. power on 1. turn the analyzer power on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 2. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. connecting the calibration signal connect the calibration signal used in the measurement. 3. attach the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 4. connect the input cable from the cal out connector to the input connector. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 3, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 30 mhz is set. 6. press span, 8, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 80 mhz is set. turning on the display line 7. press format and display line on/off (on). the display line is displayed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.4 display line and measuring window 2-27 figure 2-29 the display line 8. align the display line to a peak on the right. 9. press srch . a marker is displayed on the trace peak. 10. press mkr , reference object and display line . the values shown by the marker are the values relative to the display line. figure 2-30 measuring the values relative to the display line removing the display line 11. press format, display line on/off (on) and display line on/off (off). the display line and the values relative are removed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.4 display line and measuring window 2-28 using the measuring window 12. press window and measuring window . a measuring window is opened, and the measuring window menu is displayed. in the active area, the frequency in the center of the window is displayed. 13. press window position and move the measuring window by turning the data knob until the right-hand peak is in the center of the measuring window (see fig- ure 2-31). figure 2-31 the measuring window 14. press window widt h , 1, 0 and mhz . the width of the measuring window is set to 10 mhz. removing the measuring window 15. press window on/off (off). the measuring window is removed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.5 entering level correction data 2-29 2.2.5 entering level correction data measurement objects (such as input cables, antennas and adapters used with amplifiers), which have prop- er frequency characteristics, can be measured by using correction tables on a measurement object basis. the frequency characteristics of the instruments used are listed in table 2-1. this section describes how to enter data into the correction table and use it. table 2-1 correction table power on 1. turn the analyzer power on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 2. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the correction signal is reflected more clearly. 3. press freq, 7, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 700 mhz is set. 4. press span, 1, 0, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 100 mhz is set. 5. press level, 4, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level is set to -40 dbm. frequency correction value 1 660 mhz -20 db 2 670 mhz -10 db 3 690 mhz +10 db 4 730 mhz +20 db 5 740 mhz -30 db
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.5 entering level correction data 2-30 figure 2-32 setting measurement conditions entering the correction data the correction table is composed of frequency and level columns, and is used to set a maximum of 50 sets of data. the interpolation method is applicable between correc- tion data. 6. press level , correction factor and correction edit . the correction edit menu and the correction table are displayed and you are allowed to enter frequency data (see figure 2-33). figure 2-33 displaying the correction table 7. press 6, 6, 0 and mhz . a frequency of 660 mhz is displayed in the first frequency item, and the cursor moves to the level item (see figure 2-34).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.5 entering level correction data 2-31 figure 2-34 entering frequency data 8. press 2, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . a level of -20 dbm is displayed in the level item and the cursor moves to the fre- quency item on the second line. 9. enter the correction data one by one according to table 2-1. 10. press return . the correction table is removed. reflecting the level correction data 11. press correction on/off (on). the trace, whose noise level was corrected using the data previously entered, is displayed. figure 2-35 showing a trace whose level is corrected
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.5 entering level correction data 2-32 12. press correction on/off (off). the level correction function is turned off. correcting the entered data the data you entered can be corrected using the step keys or the data knob. in this example, the level data on the second line is changed from -10 dbm to 0 dbm. 1. move the cursor to the level data on the second line using the step keys or the data knob. 2. press 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the level data on the second line is changed to 0 dbm. figure 2-36 corrected compensation data 3. press return . the correction table is removed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.6 separating two signals 2-33 2.2.6 separating two signals this section describes how rbw should be set to properly observe adjacent signals using the analyzer. measurement conditions: the two signals used are as follows. signal 1: a frequency of 200.00 mhz and a level of -10 dbm signal 2: a frequency 200.25 mhz and a level of -40 dbm setup 1. connect the signal generators as shown in figure 2-37. figure 2-37 setup for measuring two signals separately power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generators power on. setting the signal generators this prepares the signal generators for output. 3. for signal generator 1, set the frequency to 200.00 mhz; the level to -10 dbm; and the output to the on position. 4. for signal generator 2, set the frequency to 200.25 mhz; level to -40 dbm; and the output to the on position. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 5. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 6. press freq, 2, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 200 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.6 separating two signals 2-34 7. press span, 2, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 20 mhz is set. 8. press level, 1, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level of -10 dbm is set. the spectrums are not fully separated because the rbw default setting is 300 khz. as a result, the display shows only one input signal even though there are actually two. figure 2-38 two superimposed peaks 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl), 3, 0 and khz . the rbw is set to 30 khz. two peaks are now discernible but they are still not clearly separated. figure 2-39 two discernible peaks 10. press 1, 0 and khz . the rbw is set to 10 khz. two peaks can now be distinctly seen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.6 separating two signals 2-35 figure 2-40 two distinct peaks can now be seen
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.7 dynamic range 2-36 2.2.7 dynamic range the dynamic range can be increased by reducing the noise level, which is accomplished by making the resolution bandwidth narrower. the noise level can be further reduced by setting the video bandwidth (vbw) to approximately 1/10 of the resolution bandwidth (rbw). in addition, noise level can be reduced in a short time using the average function. setup 1. connect the signal generator as shown in figure 2-41. figure 2-41 setup for verifying the dynamic range power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generators for output. 3. for signal generator, set the frequency to 200 mhz; the level to -50 dbm; and the output to the on position. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 2, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 200 mhz is set. 6. press span, 1, 0, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 100 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.7 dynamic range 2-37 7. press level, 4, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level is set to -40 dbm. figure 2-42 trace prior to changing the rbw changing the rbw the rbw is set to 1 mhz according to the current center frequency and frequency span. the noise can be reduced by making this value smaller. 8. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl), 1, 0, 0 and khz . an rbw of 100 khz is set. check that the noise level is reduced by 10 db and the dynamic range is widened. figure 2-43 trace after changing the rbw changing the vbw the noise width can be further reduced by setting the vbw to 1/10 of the rbw.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.7 dynamic range 2-38 9. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0 and khz . a vbw of 10 khz is set. check that the noise level is reduced more. figure 2-44 trace after changing the vbw performing the averaging function this function can improve the s/n ratio faster than the vbw method shown above. this function makes it possible to quantify random components and measure signals buried in the noise. 10. press a and average a . average a (with a default setting of 20) has reduced the noise level considerably. figure 2-45 the trace after averaging
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.8 uncal message 2-39 2.2.8 uncal message the settings of the resolution bandwidth (rbw), video bandwidth (vbw), frequency span (span) and sweep time (swp) are interrelated. the message uncal is displayed in the frequency area when any item is inappropriately set. if this happens, proceed as follows to remove the uncal message. make the resolution bandwidth (rbw) wider. make the video bandwidth (vbw) wider. make the sweep time (swp) longer. make the frequency span (span) narrower when the rbw or vbw cannot be changed. caution: measured data may be inaccurate if you take measurements while the uncal message is dis- played. in this section, the following example shows how to remove an uncal message, which was caused by making the sweep time shorter, by changing the rbw setting. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-46. figure 2-46 measuring am signal in separate screen mode power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 3. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 4. press freq, 1 and ghz . a center frequency of 1 ghz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.8 uncal message 2-40 5. press span, 5, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 50 khz is set. the following are automatically set: rbw = 1 khz, vbw = 1 khz, sweep time = 100 ms. 6. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl), 2, 0 and khz(ms) . sweep time is set to 20 ms and uncal is displayed in the lower right hand fre- quency area on the screen. a sweep time of 20 msec is too short. figure 2-47 screen with uncal message coping with the uncal message 7. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl), 1 , 0 and khz . once the rbw is set to 10 khz, the uncal message will disappear because a sweep time of 20 msec meets the required condition. figure 2-48 uncal message removed
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.9 zooming the frequency domain 2-41 2.2.9 zooming the frequency domain the analyzer has a function that allows you to display a part of magnified upper screen trace on the lower screen in the frequency domain. this section describes the zoom function in the frequency domain. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal whose characteristics consist of an output frequency of 100 mhz, a level of -10 dbm, a modulation frequen- cy of 10 khz and an am modulation factor of 3%. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the ex- ample shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-49. figure 2-49 measuring am signal in separate screen mode power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 100 mhz; the level to -10 dbm; the modulation frequency to 10 khz; am modulation factor to 3% and the output to the on position. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq,1, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 100 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.9 zooming the frequency domain 2-42 6. press span, 2, 5 and khz . a frequency span of 25 khz is set. figure 2-50 displaying the trace in full screen mode separate screen mode 7. press window and zoom . the screen display is in separate screen mode and the zoom menu is displayed. the cursor for the zoom position and the cursors for the zoom width are displayed on the upper screen. figure 2-51 displaying the trace in separate screen mode 8. press zoom width, 1 and khz . a frequency span of the lower screen is set to 1 khz. 9. press zoom position and move the cursor to the peak on the modulating signal using the data knob. the center frequency on the lower screen moves to the peak on the modulating signal.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.9 zooming the frequency domain 2-43 displaying a magnified lower screen in full screen mode 10. press zoom on window . the lower screen is magnified and displayed in full screen mode. the spectrum can be analyzed using this magnified display. figure 2-52 displaying the magnified lower screen turning off the magnified display 11. press zoom off . the screen display returns to separate screen mode from the magnified lower screen mode. turning off the separate screen mode 12. press screen reset . the screen display returns to full screen mode for displaying only the upper screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.10 zooming the time domain 2-44 2.2.10 zooming the time domain the analyzer has a function that allows you to display a part of magnified upper screen trace on the lower screen in the time domain. this section describes the zoom function in the time domain. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal whose characteristics consist of an output frequency of 1 ghz, a level of -10 dbm, a pulse width of 0.8 msec and a pulse period of 10 msec. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the ex- ample shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-53. figure 2-53 measuring burst signal in separate screen mode power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 1 ghz; the level to -10 dbm; the pulse width to 0.8 msec; pulse period to 10 msec and the output to the on position. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1 and ghz . a center frequency of 1 ghz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.10 zooming the time domain 2-45 6. press span, 5, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 50 mhz is set. 7. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0, 0 and khz(ms) . a sweep time of 100 msec is set. 8. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl), 3 and mhz . a resolution bandwidth of 3 mhz is set. the burst signal can be identified. figure 2-54 trace of a burst signal 9. press span and zero span . the frequency span is set to zero span. 10. press swp and trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed. 11. set source to video . the trigger source is set to video. the cursor moves to slope. the trigger level mark " " is displayed on the left-hand side of the scale. 12. press hz(enter) . the trigger slope is set to "+" and the cursor moves to trigger level. 13. adjust the trigger level. adjust the trigger level to the middle of the burst signal turning the data knob. a stably triggered display is obtained. 14. press return . the trigger setup dialog box is removed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.10 zooming the time domain 2-46 figure 2-55 burst signal in the zero span separate screen mode 15. press window and zoom . the screen display is in separate screen mode and the zoom menu is displayed. the cursor for the zoom position and the cursors for the zoom width are displayed on the upper screen. figure 2-56 displaying the trace in the separate screen mode observing the leading edge 16. press zoom position and move the cursor to the leading edge of the signal using the data knob. the leading edge of the signal is displayed on the lower screen. 17. press zoom width and move the zoom width to the leading edge of the signal. the leading edge is magnified on the lower screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.10 zooming the time domain 2-47 figure 2-57 observing the leading edge in the separate screen mode observing the trailing edge 18. press zoom position . move the cursor to the trailing edge of the signal using the data knob. the trailing edge of the signal is displayed on the lower screen. figure 2-58 observing the trailing edge in separate screen mode displaying the lower screen in full screen mode 19. press zoom on window . the leading edge is magnified on the lower screen. you can analyze the time axis using this magnified display.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.10 zooming the time domain 2-48 returning to separate screen mode from the magnified lower screen 20. press zoom off . the screen display returns to separate screen mode from the magnified lower screen. entering full screen mode 21. press screen reset . the screen display now returns to full screen mode (displaying the trace on the upper screen).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.11 measurement using the f/t function 2-49 2.2.11 measurement using the f/t function the analyzer provides the f/t function that allows you to measure using two screens (one is in the fre- quency domain; and the other is in the time domain) simultaneously. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal whose characteristics consist of an output frequency of 1 ghz, a level of -10 dbm, a pulse width of 4 msec and a pulse period of 10 msec. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the ex- ample shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-59. figure 2-59 setup to measure pulse signal using 2 screens power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 1 ghz; the level to -10 dbm; the pulse width to 4 msec; pulse period to 10 msec and the output to the on position. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1 and ghz . a center frequency of 1 ghz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.11 measurement using the f/t function 2-50 6. press span, 8, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 80 mhz is set. figure 2-60 trace of a burst signal separate screen mode 7. press window and f/t . the display is now in the separate screen mode. the frequency domain is dis- played on the upper screen, and the time domain is displayed on the lower screen. 8. press b . the lower screen is active. 9. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0 and khz(ms) . the sweep time for the lower screen is set to 10 msec. 10. press trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed. 11. set source to video . the trigger source is set to video. the cursor moves to slope. the trigger level mark " " is displayed on the left-hand side of the scale. 12. press hz(enter) . the trigger slope is set to "+" and the cursor moves to trigger level. 13. adjust the trigger level. adjust the trigger level to the middle of the burst signal turning the data knob. a stably triggered display is obtained. 14. press return . the trigger setup dialog box is removed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.11 measurement using the f/t function 2-51 15. press srch . the marker is displayed on the lower screen. figure 2-61 f/t function displayed in separate screen mode displaying the lower trace in full screen mode 16. press window and zoom on window . the leading edge is magnified on the lower screen. you can analyze the time axis using this magnified display. figure 2-62 f/t mode in zoom display entering separate screen mode 17. press zoom off . the screen display changes from the magnified mode (of the lower screen) to separate screen mode.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.11 measurement using the f/t function 2-52 entering full screen mode 18. press screen reset . the screen display now returns to full screen mode (displaying the trace on the upper screen).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-53 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters the analyzer is capable of displaying traces using two screens simultaneously with different measurement conditions to each other. 2.2.12.1 measuring dual parameters in the frequency domain this section describes how to set the center frequency for each screen and display them. measurement conditions: the two signals used are as follows. signal 1: a center frequency of 100 mhz and a level of -10 dbm. signal 2: a center frequency of 650 mhz and a level of -10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the example shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-63. figure 2-63 setup to measure dual parameters power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generators power on. setting the signal generators this prepares the signal generators for output. 3. for signal generator 1, set the frequency to 100 mhz; the level to -10 dbm and the output to the on position. 4. for signal generator 2, set the frequency to 650 mhz; the level to -10 dbm and the output to the on position. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-54 5. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 6. press window and zoom . the zoom menu is displayed and the screen display is changed to separate screen mode. figure 2-64 displaying in separate screen mode setting for the upper screen 7. press freq, 1, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 100 mhz is set for the upper screen. 8. press span, 1, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 10 mhz is set for the upper screen. trace 1 is displayed on the upper screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-55 figure 2-65 setting for the upper screen in separate screen mode setting for the lower screen 9. press b . the lower screen is active. 10. press freq, 6, 5, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 650 mhz is set for the lower screen. 11. press span, 5 and mhz . a frequency span of 5 mhz is set for the lower screen. figure 2-66 setting for the lower screen in separate screen mode
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-56 magnified display for the lower screen 12. press window and zoom on window . the trace for the lower screen is now displayed in full screen mode. figure 2-67 magnified trace for the lower screen changing the screen display to separate screen mode 13. press zoom off . the screen display is changed from the magnified mode (of the lower trace) to separate screen mode. changing the screen display to full screen mode (for displaying the upper screen) 14. press screen reset . the screen display is changed to full screen mode for displaying the upper screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-57 2.2.12.2 measuring dual parameters in the time domain this section describes how to set the center frequency for each screen and analyze them in the time domain. measurement conditions: the signal to be measured consists of the signal specified below. signal 1: a frequency of 900 mhz, a level of 0 dbm, a pulse width of 1 msec and a pulse period of 10 msec. signal 2: a frequency of 1800 mhz, a level of 0 dbm, a pulse width of 1 msec and a pulse period of 10 msec. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the example shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-68. figure 2-68 setup to measure pulse signals with different frequencies using 2 screens power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. couples signal 1 with signal 2 and outputs the total signal. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press window and t/t . both screens are set to zero span in the separate screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-58 setting for the upper screen 6. press freq, 9, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 900 mhz is set for the upper screen. 7. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl), 3 and mhz . a resolution bandwidth of 3 mhz is set for the upper screen. 8. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl), 1, 0 and khz(ms) . a sweep time of 10 msec is set for the upper screen. 9. press trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed. 10. set source to video . the trigger source is set to video. the cursor moves to slope. the trigger level mark " " is displayed on the left-hand side of the scale. 11. press hz(enter) . the trigger slope is set to "+" and the cursor moves to trigger level. 12. adjust the trigger level. adjust the trigger level to the middle of the burst signal turning the data knob. a stably triggered display is obtained. 13. press return . the trigger setup dialog box is removed. figure 2-69 upper screen in sync with the trigger signal setting for the lower screen 14. press b . the lower screen is active.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-59 15. press freq, 1, 8, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 1800 mhz is set for the lower screen. 16. press couple, vbw auto/mnl , 1, 0, 0 and khz . a vbw of 100 khz is set for the lower screen. 17. press swp and trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed. 18. set source to video . the trigger source is set to video. the cursor moves to slope. the trigger level mark " " is displayed on the left-hand side of the scale. 19. press hz(enter) . the trigger slope is set to "+" and the cursor moves to trigger level. 20. adjust the trigger level. adjust the trigger level to the middle of the burst signal turning the data knob. a stably triggered display is obtained. 21. press return . the trigger setup dialog box is removed. 22. press sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 5 and khz(ms) . a sweep time of 5 msec is set for the lower screen. figure 2-70 displaying the traces of 900 mhz and 1800 mhz in the separate screen mode 23. press srch . the level on the lower screen can be measured using the marker.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.12 measuring dual parameters 2-60 figure 2-71 displaying the trace of 1800 mhz for the lower screen changing the screen display to full screen mode for displaying only the upper screen. 24. press window and screen reset . the screen display returns to full screen mode for displaying only the upper screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.13 calibration 2-61 2.2.13 calibration calibrations are required to take measurements within the specifications of the analyzer. caution: 1. wait 60 minutes after turning the power on before performing the calibrations. 2. if a calibration is performed during the first 10 minutes after the power is turned on, spectrum analyzers with opt 23 installed may occasionally display error messages since the reference frequency source is not stable. there are three methods to calibrate the analyzer as shown below. cal all performs calibrations for all items to see if they meet the specifications. perform them before taking measurements. processing time: approximately 9 minutes. total gain performs calibrations with more accuracy than cal all, because user-defined measurement conditions are used. set the conditions first before the calibrations. processing time: approximately 1 minute. cal each item performs calibration on only one item. table 2-2 calibration items note: you may hear some clicking noises during calibration. this is normal. input att if step amp rbw switching log linearitry amplitude mag pbw
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.13 calibration 2-62 2.2.13.1 cal all setup connect the calibration signal. 1. connect the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 2. connect the input cable between the cal out and input connectors on the front panel. performing the calibration 3. press shift and 7(cal) . the menu used for calibration appears (see figure 2-72). figure 2-72 cal menu 4. press cal all . all calibration items are performed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.13 calibration 2-63 2.2.13.2 total gain prior to performing this calibration, be sure to set the rbw, db/div and reference level as the measure- ment conditions. setup connect the calibration signal. 1. connect the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 2. connect the input cable between the cal out and input connectors on the front panel. setting measurement conditions 3. set the rbw, db/div and the reference level to the values which are actually used in measurements. performing the calibration 4. press shift and 7(cal) . the menu used for calibration appears (see figure 2-72). 5. press total gain . calibration is performed using the current measurement conditions. caution: perform the total gain calibration again if you have changed the rbw, db/div and reference level after completing the total gain cali- bration.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.13 calibration 2-64 2.2.13.3 cal each item performs one cal each item though cal all performs all calibration item. this section describes the pbw calibration. setup connect the calibration signal. 1. connect the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 2. connect the input cable between cal out and input connectors on the front panel. performing the calibration 3. press shift and 7(cal) . the cal menu used for calibration appears (see figure 2-72). 4. press cal each item and pbw . pbw (noise power bandwidth) calibration is performed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function 2-65 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function pass/fail judgments for traces on the screen can easily be made by storing the upper and lower limit values using the limit line function. power on 1. turn the power on. connecting the input signal cable connect the calibration signal used in the measurement. 2. connect the n-bnc adapter to the input connector on the front panel. 3. connect the input cable between the cal out and input connectors on the front panel. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 3, 0 and mhz . the center frequency is set to 30 mhz. 6. press span, 2, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 20 mhz is set. 7. press level, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to 0 dbm.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function 2-66 setting the limit line each limit line uses the data in the table. table 2-3 setting limit line 1 table 2-4 setting limit line 2 8. press format, limit line and limit line edit . the edit menu and editor used for limit line 1 are displayed. figure 2-73 editing the limit line 1 9. press 2, 0 and mhz . 20 mhz is set in the first frequency entry, and the cursor moves to the level entry. 10. press 7, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . -70 dbm is set in the first level entry, and the cursor moves to the second row. frequency level 1 20 mhz -70 dbm 2 26 mhz -70 dbm 3 28 mhz -5 dbm 4 32 mhz -5 dbm 5 34 mhz -70 dbm 6 40 mhz -70 dbm frequency level 1 20 mhz -95 dbm 2 28 mhz -95 dbm 3 29 mhz -60 dbm 4 31 mhz -60 dbm 5 32 mhz -95 dbm 6 40 mhz -95 dbm
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function 2-67 11. continue entering data into table 2-3, repeating steps 9 and 10. figure 2-74 screen displayed after limit line 1 data has been entered 12. press limit line 1/2 . the editor is changed from the limit line 1 mode to the limit line 2 mode. 13. press 2, 0 and mhz . a frequency of 20 mhz is set in the frequency entry used for limit line 2. the cursor moves to the level entry. 14. press 9, 5 and mhz(-dbm) . a level of -95 dbm is set in the first level entry. 15. continue entering data into table 2-4, repeating steps 13 and 14. figure 2-75 screen displayed after limit line 2 data has been entered
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function 2-68 16. press return . the editor for limit line 2 is closed and the limit line menu is displayed. displaying the limit line 1 and setting the pass/fail criteria 17. press limit line setup . the limit line setup dialog box is used to set the limit line 1 conditions. figure 2-76 setting limit line pass/fail 18. select on used with limit line 1. 19. select ?below the line? in pass range for the limit line 1. this setting causes data in the area below limit line 1 to be considered a pass. 20. press limit line setup . the limit line setup dialog box is closed and message pass is displayed on the screen after the relationships between limit line 1 and the trace data have been judged as pass. figure 2-77 pass/fail result using limit line 1
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function 2-69 displaying the limit line 2 and setting the pass/fail criteria 21. press limit line setup . the limit line setup dialog box is used to set the limit line 2 conditions. 22. select on used with limit line 2. 23. select ?above the line? on the pass range for the limit line 2. this setting causes data in the area above limit line 2 to be considered a pass. 24. press limit line setup . the limit line setup dialog box is closed and the judgment result on the limit lines is displayed. figure 2-78 pass/fail result using limit lines 1 and 2 setting an offset for the limit line 25. press limit line setup . the limit line setup dialog box is displayed. 26. press the step key . the input cursor moves to offset of y data mode. 27. press 1, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the limit lines 1 and 2 that have previously been specified are moved down- wards by 10 db.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.2.14 pass/fail judgments using the limit line function 2-70 28. press return . the limit line setup dialog box is closed and the judgment result on the limit lines is displayed. figure 2-79 judgment result after the offset has been changed
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3 measurement examples 2-71 2.3 measurement examples this section describes how the analyzer through practical examples. 2.3.1 measuring average power of digital modulation signal this section describes the method for measuring the average power of digital modulation signal used in phs and so on. measurement conditions: the unit used in this measurement must comply with the phs system and out- put a frequency of 1917.950 mhz and a level of 10 dbm. the signal used must be continuous. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is 30 dbm (1 w). when measur- ing a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power can- not exceed 30 dbm. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-80. figure 2-80 setup for the average power measurement power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.1 measuring average power of digital modulation signal 2-72 setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1, 9, 1, 7, ., 9, 5 and mhz . a center frequency of 1917.95 mhz is set. 6. press span, 2, 0 and mhz . a span frequency of 20 mhz is set. 7. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1 and mhz . an rbw of 1 mhz is set. 8. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0 and mhz . a vbw of 10 mhz is set. note: to reduce measurement errors, make sure that vbw is greater than the rbw. vbw > rbw 9. press level, 1, 5 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +15 dbm. 10. press a, trace a detector and sample . the trace detector is set to sample detector mode. note: sample detector mode is used to keep measurement errors to a minimum. 11. press level and adjust the reference level using the data knob. when the signal peak is one or more divisions away from the reference level, adjust the signal peak using the data knob so they are as close as possible.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.1 measuring average power of digital modulation signal 2-73 figure 2-81 checking the input signal 12. press span and zero span . the frequency span is set to zero (see figure 2-82). figure 2-82 setting measurement conditions for average power measurement measuring average power 13. press power and average power . measures the power averaged over the object range and displays the result. allows you to set the averaging count. 14. press 1, 0 and hz(entr) . an averaging count of 10 is set. the average power and averaging count set are displayed in the result area (see figure 2-83).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.1 measuring average power of digital modulation signal 2-74 figure 2-83 result of an average power measurement when it is difficult for you to see the measurement result 15. press format and result area posi up/low (low). the measurement result is moved downwards. figure 2-84 moving the measurement result
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.2 measuring cdma wave?s total power 2-75 2.3.2 measuring cdma wave?s total power this section describes the method of measuring the total power of cdma signal. measurement conditions: the unit used in this measurement must be usable with cdma and output a frequency of 916.25 mhz and a level of +10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is 30 dbm (1 w). when measur- ing a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power can- not exceed 30 dbm. setup 1. connect the unit as shown in figure 2-85. figure 2-85 setup for measuring the total power power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 9, 1, 6, ., 2, 5 and mhz . a center frequency of 916.25 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.2 measuring cdma wave?s total power 2-76 6. press span, 1, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 10 mhz is set. note: when setting the frequency span, make sure it is wider than the span of the displayed spectrum being measured. 7. press level, 1, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +10 dbm. 8. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. note: set the attenuator to ?input level + 10 db? or more to avoid the saturation at the input mixer. 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and khz . an rbw of 30 khz is set. 10. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0, 0 and khz . a vbw of 300 khz is set. note: to reduce measurement errors, make sure that vbw is greater than the rbw. vbw > rbw 11. press a, trace a detector and sample . the trace detector is set to the sample detector mode. note: sample detector mode is used to keep measurement errors to a minimum. 12. press level and adjust the reference level using the data knob. when the signal peak is one or more divisions away from the reference level adjust the signal peak using the data knob so that they are close as much as pos- sible.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.2 measuring cdma wave?s total power 2-77 figure 2-86 setting conditions for the total power measurement measuring the total power 13. press power and total power . the total power within the displayed screen area is measured. allows you to set the averaging count. 14. press 1, 0 and hz(entr) . an averaging count of 10 is set. the total power and averaging count set are displayed in the result area (see fig- ure 2-87). figure 2-87 result of total power measurement
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.3 measuring the power density of wide band digital modulation signal 2-78 2.3.3 measuring the power density of wide band digital modulation signal this section describes how to measure the power density of a medium-speed radio frequency lan in a frequency band of 1 mhz. measurement conditions: the wide band digital modulation signal(16bps, bpsk) to be measured has a frequency of 2.45 ghz and a level of +10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is 30 dbm (1 w). when measur- ing a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power can- not exceed 30 dbm. setup 1. connect the unit as shown in figure 2-88. figure 2-88 setup for measuring the total power power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq , 2, ., 4, 5 and ghz . a center frequency of 2.45 ghz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.3 measuring the power density of wide band digital modulation signal 2-79 6. press span, 1, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 10 mhz is set. note: when setting the frequency span, make sure it is wider than the span of the displayed spectrum being measured. 7. press level , 1, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +10 dbm. 8. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. note: set the attenuator to ?input level + 10 db? or more to avoid the saturation at the input mixer. 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0, 0 and khz . an rbw of 300 khz is set. 10. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3 and mhz . a vbw of 3 mhz is set. note: to reduce measurement errors, make sure that vbw is greater than the rbw. vbw > rbw 11. press a, trace a detector and sample . the trace detector is set to the sample detector mode. note: sample detector mode is used to keep measurement errors to a minimum. 12. press level and adjust the reference level using the data knob. when the signal peak is one or more divisions away from the reference level adjust the signal peak using the data knob so that they are close as much as pos- sible. setting the window 13. press window and measuring window . the measuring window is displayed. 14. press window width , 1 and mhz . a window width of 1 mhz is set (see figure 2-89).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.3 measuring the power density of wide band digital modulation signal 2-80 figure 2-89 displaying the measuring window measuring the power density 15. press power, channel power , 1, 0 and hz(entr) . the power density of 1 mhz band is measured and displayed. an averaging count of 10 is set. the power density of 1 mhz band and the averaging count are displayed in the result area (see figure 2-90). figure 2-90 power density measurement
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.4 measuring cdma channel power 2-81 2.3.4 measuring cdma channel power this section describes how to measure the cdma channel power. measurement conditions: the unit used for the measurement must comply with cdma and must output a frequency of 916.25 mhz and a level of +10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is 30 dbm (1 w). when measur- ing a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power can- not exceed 30 dbm. setup 1. connect the unit as shown in figure 2-91. figure 2-91 setup for measuring the channel power power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq , 9, 1, 6, ., 2, 5 and mhz . a center frequency of 916.25 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.4 measuring cdma channel power 2-82 6. press span, 2 and mhz . a frequency span of 2 mhz is set. note: when setting the frequency span, make sure it is wider than the span of the displayed spectrum being measured. 7. press level, 1, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +10 dbm. 8. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 2, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 20 db. note: set the attenuator to ?input level + 10 db? or more to avoid the saturation at the input mixer. 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and khz . an rbw of 30 khz is set. 10. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0, 0 and khz . a vbw of 300 khz is set. note: to reduce measurement errors, make sure that vbw is greater than the rbw. vbw > rbw 11. press a, trace a detector and sample . the trace detector is set to the sample detector mode. note: sample detector mode is used to keep measurement errors to a minimum. 12. press level and adjust the reference level using the data knob. when the signal peak is one or more divisions away from the reference level adjust the signal peak using the data knob so that they are close as much as pos- sible. setting the channel space and bandwidth 13. press power and channel power . allows you to set the measuring window. the channel menu is displayed. 14. press channel position , 9, 1, 6, ., 2, 5 and mhz . the center of the measuring window is set to 916.25 mhz.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.4 measuring cdma channel power 2-83 15. press channel width , 1, ., 2, 2, 8 and mhz . the width of the measuring window is set to 1.228 mhz. 16. press average times , 1, 0 and hz . an averaging count of 10 is set. the channel power and the averaging count are displayed in the result area (see figure 2-92). figure 2-92 result of channel power measurement
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.5 measuring the occupied bandwidth (obw) 2-84 2.3.5 measuring the occupied bandwidth (obw) this section describes how the occupied bandwidth of the digital modulation signal used in pdc and so on is measured. this function allows you to set the ratio (of the occupied bandwidth to the total power) to a range between 10.0% and 99.9%. the factory default is 99%. measurement conditions: the unit used for the measurement must be usable with pdc and must output a frequency of 940.05 mhz, a level of +10 dbm and a specified bandwidth of 26 khz. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. caution: 1. the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is 30 dbm (1 w). when measuring a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power cannot exceed 30 dbm. 2. to reduce occupied bandwidth measurement error, use the instrument under the following conditions. set the reference level so that the modulation signal level is 50 db higher than the noise level of the spec- trum analyzer. the optimum span is approximately three times the occupied bandwidth. set the resolution bandwidth to less than 3% of the specified bandwidth. the trace detector must be set up according to the specifications of the measurement object. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-93. figure 2-93 setup for measuring the occupied bandwidth power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.5 measuring the occupied bandwidth (obw) 2-85 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 9, 4, 0, ., 0, 5 and mhz . a center frequency of 940.05 mhz is set. 6. press span, 1, 0, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 100 khz is set. note: the optimum span is approximately three times the occupied bandwidth. 7. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. note: set the attenuator to ?input level + 10 db? or more to avoid saturation at the input mixer. 8. press level, 5 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level is set to -5 dbm. 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0, 0 and hz . an rbw is set to 300 hz. 10. press a, trace a detector and positive . the trace detector is set to the positive detector mode. 11. press level and adjust the reference level using the data knob. when the signal peak is one or more divisions away from the reference level, adjust the signal peak using the data knob so that they are close as much as pos- sible. 12. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 2, 0 and mhz(sec) . a sweep time of 20 seconds is set. note: set the sweep time equal to or greater than the number of data points (1001) multiplied by the burst repetition time.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.5 measuring the occupied bandwidth (obw) 2-86 measuring the obw 13. press util and obw . an occupied bandwidth at an occupancy ratio of 99% is calculated on a sweep basis. when the measurement has been completed, width (occupied bandwidth) and center (carrier frequency (fc: the center of the occupied bandwidth)) are dis- played, and two markers are placed at either end of the occupied bandwidth. changing the ratio to the total power 14. press obw% , 9, 9, ., 5 and hz(entr) . the occupancy ratio is changed to 99.5%. after the sweep, the measurement results are displayed. figure 2-94 obw measurement results
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-87 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) one of the most important items to be measured of the digital modulating signal, which is used in the per- sonal handy phone and so on, is the adjacent channel leakage power (acp). in this section, the following two modes are explained: pdc digital modulating signal measurements in full screen mode using the root nyquist filter, the adjacent (or the second adjacent) channel leakage pow- er measurements for phs in separate screen mode. full screen mode: calculates the total power using the data on the entire screen, calculates the chan- nel leakage power of the upper and lower adjacent channels by integration to the specified bandwidth (bs), and calculates the ratio of the previously obtained val- ues. the time required for taking measurements using this mode is shorter than the other mode since all necessary data is collected in a single sweep. in addition, a graphic function, which permits you to display the power at a point by integrating the leakage power over the specified bandwidth with respect to this point, is avail- able. separate screen mode: automatically sets the frequency span to the specified bandwidth, measures car- rier wave power (on the upper screen), measures the adjacent channel leakage powers (on the lower screens) (or the second adjacent leakage powers on the lower screens), and calculates the ratios separately. using this mode, a higher accuracy is obtained when the channel spacing is large enough in relation to the specified bandwidth. caution: 1. set the values to meet the following unless otherwise specified. detection mode: sample trace average function: off 2. the vbw must meet the following. vbw rbw 2.3.6.1 full screen mode this section describes how to measure pdc digital modulating signal using the root nyquist filter in full screen mode. measurement conditions: the unit used in this measurement must output a pdc signal with a frequency of 917.950 mhz and a level of +10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. acp measurement setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-95. rbw 40 1 specified bandwidth
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-88 figure 2-95 setup measuring adjacent channel leakage power power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measuring conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 9, 1, 7, ., 9, 5, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 917.950 mhz is set. 6. press span, 2, 5, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 250 khz is set. caution: the frequency span must meet the conditions shown below. span 2 channel spacing + x when specifying a root nyquist filter: x = (1 + rolloff factor) symbol rate when not specifying a root nyquist filter: x = specified bandwidth 7. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1 and khz . the rbw is set to 1 khz. 8. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3 and khz . the vbw is set to 3 khz.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-89 9. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. 10. press level, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level of 0 dbm is set. 11. press a, trace a detector and positive . this sets the trace detector to the positive mode. 12. press level and adjust the trace using the data knob so that the trace peak can be within 1 graduation in relation to the reference level. note: measurement errors increase when the signal level is much lower than the reference level. 13. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 2, 1 and mhz(sec) . a sweep time of 21 seconds is set. note: the sweep time must meet the following. sweep time number of trace points period of the burst signal figure 2-96 pdc trace channel spacing and specified bandwidth channel spacing and channel bandwidth are specified in pdc mode. 14. press power, acp and cs/bs setup . the dialog box for setting the channel spacing and specified bandwidth is dis- played.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-90 15. press 5, 0 and khz . the channel spacing for channel 1 is set to 50 khz. the cursor moves to the spec- ified bandwidth. 16. press 2, 1 and khz . the specified bandwidth for channel 1 is set to 21 khz. the cursor moves to the channel spacing for channel 2. 17. press 1, 0, 0 and khz . the channel spacing for the channel 2 is set to 100 khz. the cursor moves to the specified bandwidth for channel 2. 18. press 2, 1 and khz . the specified bandwidth for channel 2 is set to 21 khz. figure 2-97 cs/bs setup dialog box 19. press return . this closes the cs/bs setup dialog box. note: an acp measurement cannot be carried out if the frequency span for the specified bandwidth and channel spacing is inappropriately set or not set. setting the root nyquist filter?s correction function 20. press nyquist filter setup . the dialog box used to set root nyquist filter parameters is displayed. 21. move the cursor to symbol rate 1/t using the step keys and press 2, 1 and khz . a symbol rate of 21 khz is set, and the cursor is moved to rolloff factor. 22. press 0, ., 5 and hz(entr) . a rolloff factor of 0.5 is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-91 23. set nyquist filter on/off (on). allows you to set parameters and displays the data enter. figure 2-98 root nyquist filter dialog box 24. press nyquist filter setup . this closes the dialog box used for setting root nyquist filter parameters. performing acp 25. one marker is displayed in each of the upper and lower adjacent channels each time a sweep is performed, and the lower adjacent channel leakage power as well as the upper adjacent channel leakage power is displayed. when you press single , only one measurement is taken. figure 2-99 acp measurement display in full screen mode
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-92 making observations using acp graph 26. press graph and graph on/off (on). the calculation result of the adjacent channel leakage power and the delta marker are displayed. (see figure 2-100). figure 2-100 measurement using acp graph specifying measurement points moving the marker to another channel. 27. press mkr and move the marker to 100 khz using the data knob. the adjacent channel leakage power at 100 khz is displayed in the result area. figure 2-101 acp at the 100 khz
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-93 2.3.6.2 separate display this section describes how to measure phs digital modulating signal in separate screen mode. measurement conditions: the unit used in this measurement must output a phs signal with a frequency of 1917.950 mhz and a level of +10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. acp measurement setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-102. figure 2-102 setup measuring adjacent channel leakage power power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measuring conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1, 9, 1, 7, ., 9, 5, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 1917.950 mhz is set. 6. press span, 3 and mhz . a frequency span of 3 mhz is set. 7. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. 8. press level, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level of 0 dbm is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-94 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3 and khz . the rbw is set to 3 khz. 10. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0 and khz . the vbw is set to 10 khz. 11. press a, trace a detector and positive . this sets the trace detector to the positive mode. 12. press level and adjust the trace using the data knob so that the trace peak can be within 1 graduation in relation to the reference level. note: measurement errors increase when the signal level is much lower than the reference level. 13. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 5 and mhz(sec) . a sweep time of 5 seconds is set. note: the sweep time must meet the following. sweep time number of trace points period of the burst signal figure 2-103 phs trace setting the channel spacing and specified bandwidth channel spacing and channel bandwidth are specified in phs. 14. press power, acp, screen full/sepa/carrier (sepa). the screen mode is set to the separate. 15. press cs/bs setup . the dialog box for setting the channel spacing and specified bandwidth is dis- played.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-95 16. press 1, 9, 2 and khz . the specified bandwidth of the carrier frequency is set to 192 khz. the cursor moves to the channel spacing for channel 1. 17. press 6, 0, 0 and khz . the channel spacing for channel 1 is set to 600 khz. the cursor moves to the specified bandwidth. 18. press 1, 9, 2 and khz . the specified bandwidth for channel 1 is set to 192 khz. the cursor moves to the channel spacing for channel 2. 19. press 9, 0, 0 and khz . the channel spacing for the channel 2 is set to 900 khz. the cursor moves to the specified bandwidth for channel 2. 20. press 1, 9, 2 and khz . the specified bandwidth for channel 2 is set to 192 khz. figure 2-104 cs/bs setup dialog box 21. press return . this closes the cs/bs setup dialog box. note: this operation will not function correctly when the specified bandwidth is inappropriate or not set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.6 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 2-96 performing acp using separate screen 22. each time a sweep is performed, the trace of a carrier signal is displayed on the upper screen, and the upper and lower adjacent channel traces are displayed on each of the two lower screens. the acp values for both adjacent channels are displayed once every 5 sweeps. when you press single , only five measurements are taken. figure 2-105 measurement result in acp separate screen mode
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.7 measuring burst signals using the gated sweep 2-97 2.3.7 measuring burst signals using the gated sweep this section describes how pulse modulation signals are measured using the gated sweep function. measurement conditions: the signal used in this measurement has an output frequency of 1 ghz, a level of 0 dbm, a pulse width of 1 msec and a period of 10 msec. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. setup 1. connect the unit as shown in figure 2-106. figure 2-106 setup for measuring a burst signal power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 1 ghz; the level to 0 dbm; the pulse width to 1 msec; the period to 10 msec; and output to on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1 and ghz . a center frequency of 1 ghz is set. 6. press span, 5, 0, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 500 khz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.7 measuring burst signals using the gated sweep 2-98 7. press level, 5 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +5 dbm. 8. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3 and khz . an rbw of 3 khz is set. setting the gated sweep this sets the conditions of the gated sweep to bring the gated sweep into sync with the input signal. 9. press swp and gated sweep . the gated sweep menu is displayed, and the gated sweep mode is set. the upper screen displays the spectrum and the lower screen displays the wave- form in the time domain in split screen mode (see figure 2-107). figure 2-107 burst signal displayed in split screen mode 10. press swp , 2 and khz ( ms ). a sweep time of 2 msec for the lower screen is set (see figure 2-108). figure 2-108 trigger setup
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.7 measuring burst signals using the gated sweep 2-99 11. press gated sweep . the gated sweep menu is displayed. 12. press trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed. 13. set source to if . starts to sweep in synchronization with if signal. 14. select trigger level and set it to the middle of the burst signal waveform. 15. press gate src trigger , gate position , 0, ., 6 and khz(ms) . the gate start position is set to 0.6 msec. 16. press gate width , 0, ., 3 and khz(ms) . a gate width of 0.3 msec is set. 17. press gate sweep on/off (on). a spectrum without the effect caused by a burst signal will be displayed on the upper part of the screen (see figure 2-109). figure 2-109 burst signal by use of the gated sweep (separate screen mode) 18. press return . the display shows the gated sweep trace in full screen mode. you can now change the frequency span and reference level if desired. note: check the gated sweep for its settings after you have changed the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth of the spectrum (displayed on the upper screen) when measuring a burst signal using the gated sweep.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.7 measuring burst signals using the gated sweep 2-100 figure 2-110 burst signal by use of the gated sweep (full screen mode)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.8 measuring burst signals in the time domain 2-101 2.3.8 measuring burst signals in the time domain this section describes how to measure the leading and trailing edges of the tdma signal used in phs and so on, using the time domain function. measurement conditions: the signal used in this measurement has an output frequency of 1917.950 mhz, a level of 0 dbm, a pulse width of 600 sec, a pulse period of 5 msec, a leading time of 13 sec, a trailing time of 13 sec of the burst signal. use appropriate parameter values to make the measurements shown below. setup 1. connect the unit as shown in figure 2-111. figure 2-111 setup for measuring a burst wave signal power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. this prepares the unit under test for signal output. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1, 9, 1, 7, ., 9, 5 and mhz . a center frequency of 1917.95 mhz is set. 6. press span , 5 , 0 and mhz . the frequency span of 50 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.8 measuring burst signals in the time domain 2-102 7. press level, 5 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +5 dbm. 8. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 3 and mhz . an rbw of 3 mhz is set. the burst signal used with tdma can be checked. figure 2-112 burst signal in the frequency domain 9. press span and zero span . the frequency span is set to zero span. 10. press swp , sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 5 and khz(ms) . a sweep time of 5 msec is set. figure 2-113 burst signal in the time domain setting the video trigger 11. press trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.8 measuring burst signals in the time domain 2-103 12. set source to video . video is selected and the cursor moves to slope. the trigger level mark ( ) is displayed on the left edge vertical axis. 13. press hz(enter) . the trigger slope is set to "+" and the cursor moves to trigger level. 14. adjust the trigger level. adjust the trigger level approximately to the midpoint of the burst signal, turning the data knob. a stable trace is displayed in synchronization with the signal. 15. press return . the trigger setup dialog box is closed. figure 2-114 burst signal in synchronization with the trigger signal setting the leading edge of a waveform 16. press swp, 5, 0 and hz( s) . a sweep time of 50 sec is set. 17. press trigger delay , -, 2, 5 and hz( s) . the waveform is displayed 25 sec before the triggering point so you can observe the leading edge of the burst signal.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.8 measuring burst signals in the time domain 2-104 figure 2-115 measuring burst signal leading edge setting the trailing edge of a waveform 18. press trigger delay , 5, 7, 5 and hz( s) . the waveform is displayed 575 sec after the triggering point so you can observe the trailing edge of the burst signal. figure 2-116 measuring burst signal trailing edge
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-105 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements this section describes how harmonic distortion is measured using either of the following three methods: the normal/delta marker, peak list or delta marker fixed function. 2.3.9.1 using the normal and delta markers this section describes the basic technique of how to measure harmonic distortion using the normal and delta markers. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal that has an output frequency of 100 mhz and a level of -10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the example shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-117. figure 2-117 setup for measuring the harmonic distortion power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 1 ghz; the level to -10 dbm; and output to on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, start , 5, 0 and mhz . the start frequency is set to 50 mhz.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-106 6. press stop , 3, 5, 0 and mhz . the stop frequency is set to 350 mhz. 7. press couple, vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0, 0 and khz . a vbw of 100 khz is set. the noise level is now low enough to observe the trace. 8. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the peak of the fundamental wave. 9. press mkr and marker ref . the reference level is set to the peak of the trace. to improve measurement accuracy, the level of the fundamental wave is set to the reference level (see figure 2-118). figure 2-118 trace of harmonics 10. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the peak of the trace. measuring the secondary harmonics 11. press mkr and delta marker . the delta marker is displayed. 12. press srch and next peak right . the delta marker is moved to the secondary harmonics. the difference in level between the fundamental wave and secondary harmonics is displayed in the marker area (see figure 2-119).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-107 figure 2-119 secondary harmonics measuring tertiary harmonics 13. press next peak right . the delta marker is moved to the tertiary harmonics. the difference in level between the fundamental wave and tertiary harmonics is displayed in the marker area (see figure 2-120). figure 2-120 tertiary harmonics
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-108 2.3.9.2 using the peak list this section describes a method on how to measure harmonic distortion using the peak list. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal that has an output frequency of 100 mhz and a level of -10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the example shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-121. figure 2-121 setup for measuring the harmonic distortion power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 100 mhz; the level to -10 dbm; and output to on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, start , 5, 0 and mhz . the start frequency is set to 50 mhz. 6. press stop , 3, 5, 0 and mhz . the stop frequency is set to 350 mhz.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-109 7. press couple, vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0, 0 and khz . a vbw of 100 khz is set. the noise level is now low enough to observe the trace. specifying the fundamental wave 8. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the peak of the fundamental wave. 9. press mkr and marker ref . the reference level is set to the peak of the trace. to improve measurement accuracy, set the level of the fundamental wave to the reference level (see figure 2-122). figure 2-122 trace of harmonics 10. press meas, peak list and peak list freq . changes to the split screen display. the peak list is displayed on the lower part of the screen and the spectrum is displayed on the upper part of the screen. 11. press mkr and delta marker . the list which shows frequency and level differences between the fundamental wave and the secondary/tertiary harmonics is shown (see figure 2-123).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-110 figure 2-123 peak list display
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-111 2.3.9.3 using the fixed marker function this section describes a method of how to measure harmonic distortion using the fixed marker function which enhances measurement sensitivity and accuracy. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal that has an output frequency of 100 mhz and a level of -10 dbm. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the example shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-124. figure 2-124 setup for measuring the harmonic distortion power on 2. turn the analyzer and the signal generator power on. setting the signal generator this prepares the signal generator for output. 3. set the frequency to 100 mhz; the level to -10 dbm; and output to on. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 100 mhz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-112 6. press span, 1, 0, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 100 khz is set. specifying the fundamental wave 7. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the peak of the trace. 8. press mkr and marker ref . the reference level is set to the peak of the trace. to improve measurement accuracy, set the level of the fundamental wave to the reference level (see figure 2-125). figure 2-125 trace of harmonics 9. press more 1/2 and marker cf step . set the step size of the marker to the center frequency. 10. press mkr, delta marker and fixed marker on/off (on). the delta marker is displayed and turns on the delta marker fixed function. measuring the secondary harmonics 11. press freq and the step key . the center frequency is moved to the secondary harmonics with the fixed marker still displayed. 12. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the peak of the trace. 13. press mkr , more 1/2 and marker ref . the reference level is set to the peak level of the secondary harmonics. to improve measurement accuracy, set the level of the secondary harmonics to the reference level. the secondary harmonic level relative to the fundamental wave is now displayed in the marker area (see figure 2-126).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.9 harmonic distortion measurements 2-113 figure 2-126 secondary harmonics measuring the tertiary harmonics 14. press freq and the step key . the center frequency moves to the tertiary harmonics. 15. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the peak of the trace. 16. press mkr and marker ref . the reference level is set to the peak level of the tertiary harmonics. to improve measurement accuracy, set the level of the tertiary harmonics to the reference level. the tertiary harmonic level (this, however, is the difference between the tertiary harmonic level and the fundamental wave level) is displayed in the marker area (see figure 2-127). figure 2-127 tertiary harmonics
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.10 third order intermodulation distortion 2-114 2.3.10 third order intermodulation distortion this section describes a basic technique on how to measure third order intermodulation distortion in two signals used with the narrow-band communication system. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is third order intermodulation distortion of an rf amplifier (gain: approx. 8 db) whose input signal characteristics are as follows: input signal 1: a frequency of 100 mhz and a level of 0 dbm input signal 2: a frequency of 101 mhz and a level of 0 dbm use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements shown be- low. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is 30 dbm (1 w). when measur- ing a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power can- not exceed 30 dbm. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-128. figure 2-128 setup for measuring the third order intermodulation distortion power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.10 third order intermodulation distortion 2-115 setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1, 0, 0, ., 5 and mhz . a center frequency of 100.5 mhz is set. 6. press span, 5 and mhz . a frequency span of 5 mhz is set. 7. press level, 1, 0 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +10 dbm. 8. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz(db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. note: set the attenuator to ?input level + 10 db? or more to avoid the saturation at the input mixer. 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0 and khz . an rbw of 10 khz is set. 10. press swp , sweep time auto/mnl (mnl), 1, 0, 0 and khz(ms) . sweep time is set to 100 msec (see figure 2-129). figure 2-129 third order intermodulation distortion adjusting the reference level 11. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the trace peak. 12. press mkr and marker ref . the reference level is set to the peak of the trace (see figure 2-130).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.10 third order intermodulation distortion 2-116 figure 2-130 third order intermodulation distortion (peak ref) measuring the third order intermodulation distortion 13. press meas and 3rd order measure . markers are set at the highest and third highest peaks. the level difference between the markers is displayed in the marker area (see figure 2-131). figure 2-131 measurement result of the third order intermodulation distortion
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.11 am modulation frequency and modulation factor of am signals 2-117 2.3.11 am modulation frequency and modulation factor of am signals this section describes how to measure the residual am of an am oscillator (for low amplitude modulation factors). measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal whose input signal character- istics consist of an output frequency of 400 mhz, a level of 0 dbm, a modula- tion frequency of 1 khz and a modulation factor of 5%. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the ex- ample shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-132. figure 2-132 setup for measuring am signal power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 4, 0, 0 and mhz . a center frequency of 400 mhz is set. 6. press span, 5 and khz . a frequency span of 5 khz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.11 am modulation frequency and modulation factor of am signals 2-118 7. press level, 5 and ghz(+dbm) . the reference level is set to +5 dbm. 8. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the trace peak. 9. press mkr and delta marker . the delta marker is displayed. 10. press srch and next peak . the normal marker moves to the next highest peak. figure 2-133 am signal with low modulation factor calculating modulation frequency 11. read the delta marker?s frequency. this value is the modulation frequency. calculating the modulation factor 12. read the delta marker?s level. modulation factor m is calculated from the following formula, using ? level as the delta marker?s level. approximate values are shown in figure 2-134. m = 10 ? level + 6 20
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.11 am modulation frequency and modulation factor of am signals 2-119 figure 2-134 relationship between ? ? ? ? level (db) and modulation factor m(%)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.12 measuring frequency deviation of fm signals 2-120 2.3.12 measuring frequency deviation of fm signals this section describes how to measure frequency deviation and modulation index used for fm transmitters and so on. measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal whose input signal character- istics consist of an output frequency of 2000 mhz, a level of -10 dbm, a mod- ulation frequency of 3 khz and a frequency deviation of 75 khz. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the ex- ample shown below. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is +30 dbm (1 w). when directly measuring an fm transmitter output, connect an external attenuator so the power cannot exceed +30 dbm (1w). setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-135. figure 2-135 setup for measuring fm signal power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 2 and ghz . a center frequency of 2 ghz is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.12 measuring frequency deviation of fm signals 2-121 6. press span, 4, 0, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 400 khz is set. 7. press level, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level is set to 0 dbm. 8. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 5 and mhz(sec) . a sweep time of 15 sec is set. 9. press a, trace a detector and positive . the trace detector is set to positive peak detector mode. figure 2-136 trace of an fm signal 10. press mkr and move the normal marker to the left-hand peak of the trace. 11. press delta marker . the delta marker is displayed. 12. move the normal marker to the peak on the right side using the data knob. figure 2-137 measuring a frequency deviation
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.12 measuring frequency deviation of fm signals 2-122 calculating the frequency deviation 13. read the frequency of the delta marker displayed on the screen. calculate the frequency deviation ? fpeak from the delta marker frequency ? freq using the formula shown below. calculating modulation index 14. press span, 1, 0 and khz . the frequency span is changed to 10 khz. 15. press srch . the normal marker is moved to the peak on the trace. 16. press next peak right . the normal marker moves to the right-hand peak on the trace. figure 2-138 modulation frequency of the fm signal 17. read the frequency of the delta marker. the modulation index fm is calculated from the delta marker frequency fm and frequency deviation dfpeak, using the following formula. ? fpeak = 2 1 ? freq m = fm ? f peak
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.13 measuring modulation index of fm signals 2-123 2.3.13 measuring modulation index of fm signals this section describes the residual fm (fm signals with small modulation index). the following formula holds if the fm signal modulation index m is less than approximately 0.8. e sb : level of the first sideband e c : carrier level for the logarithmic scale display, ? level: difference between the first sideband and the carrier levels [db] measurement conditions: the target of the measurement below is a signal whose input signal character- istics consist of an output frequency of 1 ghz, a level of -10 dbm, a modula- tion frequency of 3 khz and a modulation index of 0.2. use appropriate parameter values when making the measurements in the ex- ample shown below. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-139. figure 2-139 setup for measuring modulation index power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. m = e c 2e sb m = 10 ? level + 6 20
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.13 measuring modulation index of fm signals 2-124 setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly. 5. press freq, 1 and ghz . a center frequency of 1 ghz is set. 6. press span, 1, 0 and khz . a frequency span of 10 khz is set. 7. press level, 5 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level is set to -5 dbm. 8. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the trace peak. 9. press mkr and delta marker . the delta marker is displayed. 10. press srch and next peak . the normal marker moves to the next highest peak. figure 2-140 fm signal with low modulation index calculating modulation index 11. read the delta marker level. modulation index m is calculated from the following formula, using ? level as delta marker level. m = 10 ? level + 6 20
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals 2-125 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals this section describes how to measure carrier frequency, peak power and average power of pulse modu- lation signals which are used in the pulse radar and so on. measurement conditions: the signal to be measured has a frequency of 1.1 ghz, a pulse repetition rate of 0.333 khz, a pulse width of 0.8 sec and a peak power of 3 kw. the external attenuator with an attenuation of 50 db is used on this measure- ment. use appropriate parameter values when taking measurements in the example shown below. caution: the maximum amount of power that can be input to the analyzer is +30 dbm (1 w). when mea- suring a signal power whose value exceeds this limit, connect an external attenuator so the power cannot exceed +30 dbm. setup 1. connect the unit under test as shown in figure 2-141. figure 2-141 setup for measuring pulsed rf signal power on 2. turn the analyzer and the unit under test power on. setting the unit under test 3. activate the signal output for the unit under test. initialization this resets the current settings to the factory defaults or user-defined presets. 4. press shift and config(preset) . this sets the analyzer to its presets values. setting the measurement conditions this changes the analyzer settings so that the input signal is displayed more clearly.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals 2-126 5. press freq, 1, ., 1 and ghz . a center frequency of 1.1 ghz is set. 6. press span, 1, 0 and mhz . a frequency span of 10 mhz is set. 7. press level, 1, 0 and mhz(-dbm) . the reference level is set to -10 dbm. 8. press ref offset on/off (on) , 5, 0 and ghz ( db) . the level currently being displayed includes the value of the external attenuator. 9. press couple, rbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0 and khz . a rbw of 10 khz is set. note: set the rbw to the range shown below so the pulse height becomes large enough to be used. 1.7 pulse repetition rate rbw 0.1/ pulse width 10. press vbw auto/mnl (mnl) , 1, 0, 0 and khz . a vbw of 100 khz is set. note: set the vbw to 10 times higher than that of the rbw so the rbw is not affected. vbw 10 rbw 11. press a, trace a detector and positive . trace detector mode is set to the positive peak detector mode. 12. press att, att auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, 0 and ghz ( db) . the attenuator is set to 30 db. note: set the attenuator to ?input level + 10 db? or more to avoid the saturation at the input mixer. 13. press swp, sweep time auto/mnl (mnl) , 3, ., 1 and mhz ( sec) . a sweep time of 3.1 seconds is set. measuring carrier frequency 14. press srch . the normal marker is displayed on the trace peak. the frequency of the normal marker is the carrier frequency (see figure 2-142).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals 2-127 figure 2-142 spectrum of a pulsed signal measuring peak power 15. read the marker level. consider this value as apparent peak power p?. 16. press mkr and delta marker . the delta marker is displayed. 17. press 1/delta marker on/off (on). the delta marker is displayed in terms of time. 18. move the delta marker to the minimum position on the main lobe using the data knob. this value is pulse width . figure 2-143 measuring peak power
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals 2-128 calculating the peak power 19. peak power p is calculated using the formula shown below. p = p? -20 log (1.5 rbw) p?: apparent power with rbw set to 10 khz. rbw: set value of the resolution bandwidth :pulse width measuring the pulse repetition frequency 20. press span and zero span . zero span is set. 21. press swp, 1, 0 and khz(ms) . a sweep time of 10 ms is set. 22. press trigger setup . the trigger setup dialog box is displayed. 23. set source to video . the video trigger starts to sweep. 24. select trigger level and adjust the trigger level using the data knob. trace is frozen on the screen. 25. press return . the trigger setup dialog box is closed. 26. press mkr and mkr . move the normal marker to the peak on the left side turning the data knob. the normal marker is displayed on the trace peak. 27. press delta marker . move the delta marker to the peak on the right side turning the data knob. the value of the delta marker is the pulse repetition frequency (freq).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.3.14 carrier frequency and power measurements using pulsed rf signals 2-129 figure 2-144 measuring the pulse repetition frequency calculating the average power 28. the average power pave is calculated using the formula shown below. p ave = p peak frep p peak : peak power(w) frep: pulse repetition frequency :pulse width
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4 expanded functions 2-130 2.4 expanded functions 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2.4.1.1 saving/recalling basic measurement conditions (1) saving data data that can be saved to internal memory, floppy disk or the memory card (option) include the fol- lowing: basic measurement conditions 501/1001-point trace a or b, or trace data for both a and b trace data can be saved only when the trace mode is set to either the write or view mode. level correction data (correction factor data) normalize data normalized data is saved only when the normalize mode is turned on. user-definable limit line data loss: freq data this is available only for the r3273. spurious measurement table data selecting a device to be used for saving data 1. press shift and rcl(save) . the save menu (used to save data) and a file list are displayed. use the step keys to turn pages within the file list. 2. press device ram/fd (ed). the device is set (see figure 2-145). note: 1. when the analyzer is equipped with a floppy disk drive, device ram/fd is dis- played; when the analyzer is equipped with a memory card, device ram/a/b is displayed. 2. the fd drive cannot be selected when a floppy disk is not set in the floppy disk drive. the same is true when there is no memory card.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-131 figure 2-145 selecting destination device setting the data to be saved the data format and data for each item are selected when saving data. 3. press save file and save item setup . the save item setup dialog box is displayed. figure 2-146 save item setup dialog box 4. select data format and set this function to binary . the format that saves data is set. 5. select setup and turn this function on . the function that saves measurement conditions is set. 6. select trace and set this function to a/b . the function that stores data for both traces a and b is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-132 7. select normalize and set this function to a/b . the function that saves data for traces a and b is set. 8. select limit line and set this function to 1/2 . the function that saves data for limit lines 1 and 2 is set. 9. select loss: freq and turn this function on . the function that saves data in the loss:freq table is set. 10. select corr factor and turn this function on . the function that saves the level correction value is set. 11. press return . this closes the save item setup dialog box and returns to the save menu. setting a file to be saved 12. select the file to be saved from a file list. use the data knob to select the file. the file name is previously assigned. for ram, the file name starts with reg_01; for floppy disks, it starts with file_001. note: in the above example a file number is used instead of a file name, but you can use an arbitrary file name if desired. for information on how to set file names, refer to section 2.4.6. saving data 13. press save file and save . the data is saved in the file previously selected (see figure 2-147). figure 2-147 file saved
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-133 deleting the file list 1. perss shift , rcl(save) and list reg/file . the file list is deleted. (2) protecting data to prevent someone from accidentally deleting or overwriting data, you can use the file protection feature. selecting the device 1. press shift and rcl(save) . the save menu and the file list are displayed. 2. press device ram/fd (fd). the fd is selected. note: when the analyzer is equipped with a floppy disk drive, device ram/fd is displayed; when the analyzer is equipped with a memory card, device ram/ a/b is displayed. selecting the file 3. press save file . the save file (used to save data to file) is displayed. 4. select the file from the file list using the data knob. protecting the file 5. press write protect . the selected file display changes from rw (read or write) to ro (read only), indicating that data protection has been enabled. figure 2-148 file protection enabled
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-134 the write protection can be disabled using the following procedure. disabling data protection 1. press shift and rcl(save) . the save menu and the file list are displayed. 2. press clear file . the clear file menu is displayed. 3. select the file from the file list. use the data knob to select the file. 4. press release protect . the selected file display changes from ro (read only) to rw (read or write), indicating that data protection has been disabled. (3) loading data saved conditions and trace data can be used for measurements. use the following procedure to access this data. selecting the device 1. press rcl . the recall menu and file list are displayed. 2. press device ram/fd (fd). the device of fd is set. note: when the analyzer is equipped with a floppy disk drive, device ram/fd is displayed; when the analyzer is equipped with the memory card, device ram/a/b is displayed. selecting the file 3. press recall file . the recall file menu, which is used to read data from a file, is displayed. 4. select the file from the file list using the data knob (see figure 2-149).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-135 figure 2-149 selected file reading data 5. press recall . the data from the selected file is read (see figure 2-150). figure 2-150 read data (4) deleting the data data, which has been saved to internal memory or a floppy disk, can be deleted. selecting the device 1. press shift and recall(save) . the save menu and file list are displayed. 2. press device ram/fd (fd). the device of fd is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-136 note: when the analyzer is equipped with a floppy disk drive, device ram/fd is displayed; when the analyzer is equipped with a memory card, device ram/ a/b is displayed. selecting the file 3. press clear file . the clear file menu is displayed. 4. select a file to be deleted from the file list using the step keys or data knob. figure 2-151 file to be deleted deleting the data 5. press clear . the data of the selected file is deleted (see figure 2-152). figure 2-152 file already deleted
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.1 saving/recalling measurement conditions 2-137 2.4.1.2 saving/recalling obw measurement conditions obw measurement conditions, such as the obw% value, frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and trace detector mode, can be saved as user-defined presets. saving obw measurement conditions 1. press util and obw . the obw menu is displayed. 2. press parameter setup and define default . the current measurement condition is saved in the internal memory. when you wish to change the measurement condition that is already saved, press util, obw , parameter setup and default . 2.4.1.3 saving/recalling acp measurement conditions acp measurement conditions, such as the channel space, specified bandwidth, frequency span, resolu- tion bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and trace detector mode, can be saved as user-defined pre- sets. saving acp measurement conditions 1. press power and acp . the acp menu is displayed. 2. press parameter setup and define default . the current measurement conditions are saved in the internal memory. when you wish to change the measurement conditions that are already saved, press power, acp, parameter setup and default .
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.2 saving screen data 2-138 2.4.2 saving screen data screen data can be saved in either floppy disks or the memory card (option) in bmp (bit map file) the an- alyzer. caution: when using the memory card (option), the word "floppy disk" is referred to as "memory card." inserting a floppy disk 1. insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. setting the destination for screen data. 2. press config , copy config and copy device . the copy device dialog box used to set the destination of screen data is dis- played. 3. select floppy . the floppy disk is set as the save file destination and the copy device dialog box is closed (see figure 2-153). figure 2-153 specifying setting the type of screen data file 4. press file . the file dialog box is displayed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.2 saving screen data 2-139 figure 2-154 file dialog box 5. select copy mode and set the mode to color . the output mode is set to color. 6. select compression and turn this function off . the function that disables the image compression function is set. 7. select file no. and set the number to 001 . the screen file number is set to 001. 8. select auto increment and turn this function on . this function that automatically increments file numbers is set. 9. press return . the file dialog box is closed. saving screen data 10. display the data you wish to copy on the screen and press copy . the access lamp is lit and the screen data is saved on the floppy disk. caution: do not remove the floppy disk while the access indicator is lit, or the data on the floppy disk may be damaged.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.3 obtaining a hard copy of screen data 2-140 2.4.3 obtaining a hard copy of screen data you can make printouts from the screen data using the parallel interface (compliant with centronix). the printers compatible with the analyzer use esc/p, esc/p raster or hp pcl as the control codes (some of these printers may present functional restrictions). esc/p: epson standard cord for printer esc/p raster: epson standard cord for printer raster mode hp pcl: hewlett packard printer command language recommended printers are listed in table 2-5. table 2-5 recommended printers note: only esc/p raster and hp pcl are available for color printing. *1 indicates that esc/p raster is used for color printing. *2 indicates that hp pcl is used for color printing. connecting the printer caution: be sure to turn the power off on the analyzer before connecting a printer. 1. connect the printer to the printer connector on the rear panel using the ibm- pc compatible cable provided. setting up output destination 2. press config , copy config and copy device . the copy device dialog box used to select the screen data destination is dis- played. 3. select printer . the copy device dialog box is closed. the copy config menu is displayed. manufacturer model epson pm-900c *1 , pm-880c *1 , pm-800c *1 , pm-770c *1 , pm-750c *1 , pm-2000c, em-900c *1 , mj-930c, mj-830j, mj-700v2c hewlett packard deskjet 880c *2 , deskjet 694c *2 , deskjet 505j, laserjet 5l canon bj-m70, bjc-430j, bjc-420j, bjc-410j, bjc-600j, bjc-50v
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.3 obtaining a hard copy of screen data 2-141 setting up control codes and printer mode. 4. press printer . the printer dialog box is displayed (see figure 2-155). figure 2-155 printer dialog box 5. select copy mode and set this function to gray . the output mode is set. 6. select printer command and set this function to hp pcl . the type of printer is set. note: "printer command" is set according to the printer used. 7. select menu print and turn this function on . the print menu is displayed. 8. press return . the printer dialog box is closed. printing 9. display the screen you wish to print and press copy . the screen data is sent to the printer. the time required for the data to print depends on the mode and printer used. note: 1. when you wish to cancel a printout after pressing copy, press shift and copy (cancel). 2. when paper feed is set to off and you print continuously, some printers may print one screen on two separate sheets of paper. if this happens, remove the papers from the printer using paper feed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.4 formatting media 2-142 2.4.4 formatting media the screen data of the analyzer can be saved to either a floppy disk or the memory card (option). this section describes how to format a floppy disk and the memory card. 2.4.4.1 formatting a floppy disk the analyzer is equipped with a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive. you can save text data (settings, trace data and correction data) and bmp data (display data) to floppy disks using this drive. data saved on a floppy disk can be processed on a computer. the following floppy disk formats can be used: 3.5-inch dd 720kb, hd 1.2 mb and 1.44mb (ms-dos format compatible). the analyzer can initialize only the hd floppy disks. write-protecting the floppy disk this prevents you from accidentally initializing or overwriting a floppy containing previously saved data. the write protect tab is located in the lower right hand corner of the floppy disk. to write-protect a disk, slide the tab downwards to the other end (a hole appears). to disable write protection, slide the tab upwards to the original position (until the hole is no longer visi- ble) (see figure 2-156). figure 2-156 floppy disk write protection initializing floppy disks to prepare a floppy disk for use with the analyzer, use the following procedure. caution: formatting a floppy disk causes all data to be erased. 1. make sure the floppy disk is not write protected. 2. insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. 3. press config, copy config and media format . the media menu used for initializing floppy disks appears (see figure 2-157). write-protect writable
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.4 formatting media 2-143 figure 2-157 media menu 4. press format floppy . the dialog box is displayed to prompt you to confirm whether or not to continue formatting. to continue formatting, select confirm . the floppy disk is formatted with the ms-dos 1.44mb format. the access lamp is lit while initializing (this takes approx. 1 minute). caution: do not remove the floppy disk while the access indicator is lit, or the data on the floppy disk may be damaged. 2.4.4.2 formatting the memory card (option) the analyzer can be equipped with the memory card drive as option if desired. you can save data to mem- ory card as well as the floppy disk drive. the memory card drive has two slots, permitting up to two mem- ory cards to be plugged in (the slots in the memory card drive are located at the upper right of the front panel). memory cards compatible with the analyzer are as follows. memory cards compliant with the pc card guidelines ver.4 (of the japanese electronic industry development association (jeida)), or memory card pcmcia at release 2.0 or later under the us standards. types: sram, flash ata or pc card ata (using flash rom) format: ms-dos format caution: flash rom cards which use the 8- or 16-bit bus system cannot be used in the analyzer. neither flash ata nor pc card ata card can be used in the analyzer. use a memory card after verifying that it complies with the standards shown above. for more information on the memory card, refer to ?cautions on using the r3267 series? in chapter caution.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.4 formatting media 2-144 figure 2-158 slots in the memory card drive plugging in the memory card 1. plug in the memory card with the label face up. the drive indicator is dimly lit when the memory card is inserted. caution: never push the eject button and the memory card simultaneously to prevent damage to the connector. removing the memory card 2. make sure the drive indicator is dimly lit. caution: do not remove the memory card when the drive indicator is brightly lit, or the data in the card can be corrupt. 3. press the corresponding eject button to eject the card. 4. remove the memory card from the drive. drive indicator for drive a eject button for drive a drive a drive b eject button for drive b drive indicator for drive b
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.4 formatting media 2-145 initializing the memory card be sure to initialize the memory card before saving data in a new sram-type memory card. caution: 1. flash ata or pc card ata memory card cannot be initialized in the analyzer. the memory cards cited above do not require initialization because they are for- matted before shipment. 2. when initializing a memory card that has previously been written, all data is deleted. prior to initializing the memory card that contains data, be sure to save necessary files to other memory cards and so on. 5. disable write protection prior to using sram memory card. 6. plug the memory card into drive a. 7. press config, copy config and media format . the media menu used to initialize the memory card is displayed. 8. press format card a . the dialog box is displayed to prompt you to confirm whether or not to continue formatting. to continue formatting, select confirm . the drive starts to format the media. note that the drive indicator will brightly be lit while formatting.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.5 setting date and time 2-146 2.4.5 setting date and time this section describes how to set the date and time. in the following example, a time and date of 1:35 pm jan.18 1999 is set. setting the date and time 1. press config and date/time . the date/time dialog box is displayed (see figure 2-159). figure 2-159 date/time dialog box 2. select ye ar , and press 1, 9, 9, 9 and hz (entr) . the year is set to 1999. 3. select month , and press 1 and hz (entr) . the month is set to january. 4. select day , and press 1, 8 and hz (entr) . the date is set to the 18th. setting the time 5. select hour , and press 1, 3 and hz (entr) . the time is set to 1pm. 6. select minute , and press 3, 5 and hz (entr) . the minute is set to 35. setting the date display format 7. select format , and set this function to long . the format used to set the date is selected. 8. select order and set this function to year/month/day . a date display mode is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.6 setting the screen label 2-147 9. press return . the date/time dialog box is closed. 2.4.6 setting the screen label this section describes how to enter your remarks for the screen data. a maximum of 30 characters, which consist of alphanumeric and a few special characters, can be entered. setting labels 1. press format, label and label entry . the label entry dialog box, which is used to enter alphanumeric characters and special characters, is displayed. this dialog box consists of the two areas: one is the area in which characters entered are displayed, and the other is the area in which the alphanumeric characters to be entered are displayed as buttons.(see figure 2-160). figure 2-160 dialog box used to enter labels 2. select the characters you wish to enter using the data knob and step keys. the data knob is used to move the cursor horizontally in the button area; the step keys are used to move the cursor vertically between the rows in the button area. in this example, enter advantest1 using upper case alphabetic characters. 3. move the cursor to character a, which is found on the first line, and press the data knob. character a will be displayed in the input area within the dialog box. note that the cursor in this area has been shifted one place to the right. 4. select character b and press hz . then press -(bs) . character b appears tempo- rarily in the upper part and disappears when it is corrected by pressing -(bs) . note that the cursor is next to character a on the right hand side. 5. then enter the rest of the characters: d, v, a, n, t, e, s and t.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 2.4.6 setting the screen label 2-148 6. press the numeric key 1 . check to see if numeric character 1 has been entered after the characters advantest (the final display is advantest1). only numeric characters can be entered directly from the numeric keys. 7. press hz(entr) . this closes the label entry dialog box, and the characters you entered are dis- played in the upper left-hand corner of the screen. figure 2-161 displaying the screen label caution: 1. the dialog box will close, cancelling the data you entered when you press any keys other than numeric keys, the -(bs) key and hz key. 2. a new label is always overwrites the old one. as a result, the old alphanumeric character(s) will be left undeleted if the number of characters of the new label is less than that of the old label. when you wish to delete the entire old label, press the label delete key first to delete it, press the label edit key and then enter the new label. deleting a label previously set 8. press format, label and label delete . a previously set label is deleted from the screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.1 menu index 3-1 operation key pages operation key pages 3 reference this chapter describes the functions of all panel and soft keys. menu index: use this index as a key index to chapter 3. menu map: shows a list of hierarchical menus on a panel key basis. functional descriptions: explains the functions of the panel and soft keys. the panel keys are arranged in alphabetical order. 3.1 menu index this menu index is used to easily find the keys described in chapter 3. nyquist filter ......................................... 3-15, 3-61 nyquist filter on/off.......................... 3-15, 3-59 nyquist filter setup............................... 3-15, 3-60 % am measure ........................................ 3-13, 3-52 0.5 db/div................................................. 3-12 1 db/div.................................................... 3-12 1/delta marker on/off.......................... 3-14, 3-53 10 db/div.................................................. 3-12 10, 5, 2, 1 or 0.5db/div ............................ 3-49 2 db/div.................................................... 3-12 3rd order.................................................. 3-18, 3-82 3rd order measure ................................... 3-13, 3-52 3rd order peak ......................................... 3-19, 3-85 5 db/div.................................................... 3-12 5th order .................................................. 3-18, 3-82 7th order .................................................. 3-18, 3-82 9th order .................................................. 3-18, 3-82 a............................................................... 3-7, 3-9, 3-20, 3-33 a b .................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-21, 3-26 abc ......................................................... 3-10 acp.......................................................... 3-15, 3-59 acp off ................................................. 3-15, 3-62 active marker .......................................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 active trace a/b ..................................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-62, 3-83 all auto ................................................... 3-10, 3-37 amplitude mag ...................................... 3-8, 3-28 anchor ..................................................... 3-14, 3-54 artificial analog a .................................. 3-7, 3-21 artificial analog on/off....................... 3-18, 3-21, 3-80 att.......................................................... 3-7, 3-24 att auto/mnl.................................... 3-7, 3-24 att switch count ................................... 3-9, 3-35 auto ...................................................... 3-10 auto adjust.............................................. 3-10, 3-43 auto increment ........................................ 3-9, 3-33 auto tune ................................................ 3-11, 3-45 average a ................................................ 3-7, 3-20 average b ................................................ 3-8, 3-25 average loss on/off ............................ 3-11, 3-47 average power......................................... 3-15, 3-58 average times......................................... 3-15, 3-58 average times on/off.......................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-61, 3-78, 3-81, 3-82, 3-83 b............................................................... 3-8, 3-9, 3-25, 3-33 band lock on/off................................. 3-11, 3-47 band select .............................................. 3-11, 3-46 baud rate................................................. 3-9, 3-30 bias posi/nega .................................... 3-11, 3-46 blank a .................................................... 3-7, 3-20 blank b .................................................... 3-8, 3-25 bs window on/off............................... 3-15, 3-60 c/n meas ................................................. 3-18, 3-81 c/n meas off......................................... 3-18, 3-81 cal ......................................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal 10 mhz ref....................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal all...................................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal corr on/off .................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal each item........................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal sig level ........................................... 3-8, 3-28 center....................................................... 3-11, 3-45
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.1 menu index 3-2 cf step size auto/mnl ...................... 3-11, 3-45 channel position ...................................... 3-15, 3-58 channel power......................................... 3-15, 3-58 channel width ......................................... 3-15, 3-58 clear......................................................... 3-16, 3-68 clear file.................................................. 3-16, 3-68 clear register .......................................... 3-16, 3-66 coarse ...................................................... 3-8, 3-28 color ........................................................ 3-10, 3-44 compression ............................................ 3-9, 3-33 config................................................... 3-9, 3-30 cont down on/off................................ 3-13, 3-52 cont peak on/off .................................. 3-17, 3-74 copy....................................................... 3-9, 3-36 copy all................................................... 3-16, 3-69 copy config............................................. 3-9, 3-30 copy device ............................................ 3-9, 3-33 copy mode .............................................. 3-9, 3-31, 3-32 copy table 1 to 2..................................... 3-10, 3-43 copy table 2 to 1..................................... 3-10, 3-43 corr factor............................................... 3-16, 3-68 correction edit......................................... 3-12, 3-49 correction factor ..................................... 3-12, 3-49 correction on/off ................................. 3-12, 3-49 counter..................................................... 3-13, 3-51 counter on/off ..................................... 3-13, 3-51 couple .................................................. 3-10, 3-37 couple to f(t) ......................................... 3-17, 3-73 cs/bs setup ............................................ 3-15, 3-59 data format ............................................. 3-16, 3-67 data length.............................................. 3-9, 3-30 date/time ................................................ 3-9, 3-34 day........................................................... 3-9, 3-34 db v/ hz............................................. 3-13 db/div....................................................... 3-12, 3-49 dbc/hz ..................................................... 3-13, 3-51 dbm.......................................................... 3-12, 3-49 dbm/hz .................................................... 3-13, 3-51 dbmv....................................................... 3-12, 3-49 db v........................................................ 3-12, 3-49 db v/ hz................................................ 3-51 db vemf ................................................. 3-12, 3-49 dbpw ....................................................... 3-12, 3-49 default ..................................................... 3-8, 3-15, 3-29, 3-61, 3-78 default ip ................................................. 3-16, 3-66 define default..................................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-61, 3-78 delete ....................................................... 3-18, 3-79, 3-81 delete line............................................... 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 delta cf .............................................. 3-14, 3-56 delta cf step...................................... 3-14, 3-56 delta marker step............................... 3-14, 3-56 delta span........................................... 3-14, 3-56 delta marker ............................................ 3-14, 3-53, 3-54 delta marker on/off............................. 3-14, 3-53 delta y disp mode cusr/data................. 3-7, 3-22 det select auto/mnl......................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-20, 3-23, 3-25, 3-27 device ram/a/b .................................... 3-15, 3-16, 3-64, 3-68 device ram/fd...................................... 3-15, 3-16, 3-64, 3-68 disp mode rel/abs.l/abs.r .............. 3-13, 3-52 display control........................................ 3-10, 3-44 display line............................................. 3-14, 3-17, 3-54, 3-73 display line on/off ............................. 3-10, 3-40 display line pos...................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-21, 3-26 display on/off...................................... 3-9, 3-35 edit table................................................. 3-18, 3-79, 3-81 enter title ................................................ 3-16, 3-66 execute selftest........................................ 3-9, 3-35 ext mixer config ..................................... 3-11, 3-46 eye opening ............................................ 3-18, 3-79 eye opening off .................................... 3-18, 3-81 f/t............................................................ 3-19, 3-85 file ........................................................... 3-9, 3-32 file format............................................... 3-9, 3-32 file no. .................................................... 3-9, 3-33 fine .......................................................... 3-8, 3-29 fixed marker on/off ............................ 3-14, 3-53 fixed mkr peak ..................................... 3-13, 3-51 floppy ...................................................... 3-9, 3-33 flow control ............................................ 3-9, 3-30 format................................................. 3-40 format...................................................... 3-9, 3-34 format card a ......................................... 3-9, 3-16, 3-34, 3-69 format card b ......................................... 3-9, 3-16, 3-34, 3-69 format floppy.......................................... 3-9, 3-16,
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.1 menu index 3-3 3-34, 3-69 freq ....................................................... 3-11, 3-45 freq corr on/off................................... 3-8, 3-29 freq offset on/off ................................ 3-11, 3-45 full span .................................................. 3-17, 3-71 fund frequency on/off ..................... 3-18, 3-78 gate position............................................ 3-17, 3-76 gate src ext gate .................................... 3-17, 3-76 gate src if trigger .................................. 3-17 gate src trigger....................................... 3-76 gate width............................................... 3-17, 3-76 gated sweep ............................................ 3-76 gated sweep on/off ............................. 3-17, 3-77 gpib address .......................................... 3-9, 3-30 graph ....................................................... 3-15, 3-61 graph on/off ........................................ 3-15, 3-61 gray#1 ..................................................... 3-10, 3-44 gray#2 ..................................................... 3-10, 3-44 harmonics ................................................ 3-18, 3-78 harmonics number.................................. 3-18, 3-78 harmonics off........................................ 3-18, 3-78 hi sens on/off...................................... 3-18, 3-83 hour ......................................................... 3-9, 3-34 if step amp ............................................ 3-8, 3-28 im meas ................................................... 3-18, 3-82 im meas off........................................... 3-18, 3-83 input att ................................................ 3-8, 3-28 insert ........................................................ 3-18, 3-79, 3-81 insert line ................................................ 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 label ........................................................ 3-10, 3-43 label delete ............................................. 3-10, 3-43 label entry .............................................. 3-10, 3-43 last span.................................................. 3-17, 3-71 lcl.......................................................... 3-11, 3-48 level..................................................... 3-12, 3-49 limit line ................................................ 3-10, 3-14, 3-16, 3-40, 3-54, 3-67 limit line 1 ............................................. 3-10, 3-17, 3-41, 3-73 limit line 1/2 .......................................... 3-10, 3-43 limit line 2 ............................................. 3-10, 3-17, 3-41, 3-73 limit line edit......................................... 3-10, 3-43 limit line setup ...................................... 3-10, 3-40 limit posi................................................. 3-17, 3-72 limit setup .............................................. 3-18, 3-82 limit width.............................................. 3-17, 3-72 linear ....................................................... 3-12, 3-49 list off................................................... 3-13, 3-51 list reg/file ............................................ 3-15, 3-16, 3-64, 3-68 load table ............................................... 3-18, 3-79 log linearity ........................................... 3-8, 3-28 loss:freq ............................................... 3-16, 3-68 loss:freq edit.......................................... 3-11, 3-47 loss:freq on/off .................................. 3-11, 3-47 manual ..................................................... 3-15, 3-61, 3-78 manual tune ............................................ 3-11, 3-45 marker cf........................................... 3-14, 3-56 marker cf step................................... 3-14, 3-56 marker marker step............................ 3-14, 3-56 marker ref.......................................... 3-14, 3-56 marker list on/off ............................... 3-14, 3-54 marker no................................................ 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 marker off ............................................. 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-54, 3-55, 3-62 marker on............................................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 marker step size auto/mnl................ 3-14, 3-55 max hold a ............................................. 3-7, 3-20 max hold b ............................................. 3-8, 3-25 max peak ................................................. 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 meas ...................................................... 3-13, 3-51 measuring window.................................. 3-19, 3-84 media format........................................... 3-9, 3-33 medium................................................. 3-10 menu print ............................................... 3-9, 3-32, 3-33 min att on/off................................... 3-7, 3-24 min hold a.............................................. 3-7, 3-21 min hold b .............................................. 3-8, 3-26 min peak .................................................. 3-17, 3-72 minute...................................................... 3-9, 3-34 mixer int/ext ....................................... 3-11, 3-46 mkr ........................................................ 3-14, 3-53 mkr ................................................... 3-14, 3-56 mono#1.................................................... 3-10, 3-44 mono#2.................................................... 3-10, 3-44 month....................................................... 3-9, 3-34 multi marker............................................ 3-14, 3-53 multi mkr off ...................................... 3-14, 3-54 multi mkr setup .................................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.1 menu index 3-4 narrow................................................ 3-10 negative ................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 next min peak ......................................... 3-17, 3-72 next peak ................................................. 3-14, 3-17, 3-19, 3-53, 3-72, 3-84, 3-85 next peak left ......................................... 3-17, 3-72 next peak right ....................................... 3-17, 3-72 next result .............................................. 3-18, 3-79 noise corr on/off................................. 3-15, 3-59 noise/hz .................................................. 3-13, 3-51 noise/hz off .......................................... 3-13, 3-51 normal ..................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 normal marker ........................................ 3-14, 3-53 normalize................................................. 3-16, 3-67 normalize a............................................. 3-7, 3-21 normalize a on/off ............................. 3-7, 3-21 normalize b ............................................. 3-8, 3-26 normalize b on/off.............................. 3-8, 3-26 normalize with store corr....................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-21, 3-26 obw ........................................................ 3-18, 3-78 obw off................................................ 3-18, 3-78 obw%..................................................... 3-18, 3-78 off .......................................................... 3-14, 3-57 offset ....................................................... 3-10, 3-42, 3-43 order ........................................................ 3-9, 3-18, 3-34, 3-82 paper feed................................................ 3-9, 3-32 parameter setup ....................................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-61, 3-78 parity bit .................................................. 3-9, 3-30 pass range ............................................... 3-10, 3-41 pass/fail judgement on/off ................. 3-10, 3-18, 3-43, 3-83 pbw......................................................... 3-8, 3-28 peak cf............................................... 3-14, 3-56 peak ref .............................................. 3-14, 3-56 peak delta y ............................................ 3-14, 3-17, 3-19, 3-54, 3-73, 3-85 peak list .................................................. 3-13, 3-51 peak list freq .......................................... 3-13, 3-14, 3-51, 3-54 peak list level ........................................ 3-13, 3-14, 3-51, 3-54 peak x db down ..................................... 3-13, 3-52 peak zooming .......................................... 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 phase jitter ............................................... 3-18, 3-81 phase jitter off....................................... 3-18, 3-82 phase noise.............................................. 3-18, 3-81 pll band width...................................... 3-10, 3-38 positive..................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 power ................................................... 3-15, 3-58 power average a..................................... 3-7, 3-22 power average b ..................................... 3-8, 3-26 power meas off ..................................... 3-15, 3-58 power on count...................................... 3-9, 3-35 presel tune .............................................. 3-11, 3-45 preselector 1.6 ghz/3.6 ghz .................. 3-11, 3-46 preset ................................................... 3-15, 3-63 prev result............................................... 3-18, 3-79 printer....................................................... 3-9, 3-30, 3-33 printer command..................................... 3-9, 3-31 rbw auto/mnl .................................. 3-10, 3-37 rbw switching ....................................... 3-8, 3-28 rbw:span on/off ................................ 3-10, 3-37 rbw 100hz anlg/dgtl.................... 3-10, 3-38 rcl.......................................................... 3-15, 3-64 recall ....................................................... 3-15, 3-64 recall file ................................................ 3-15, 3-64 recall on power ................................... 3-15, 3-64 recall register......................................... 3-15, 3-64 ref offset on/off ................................. 3-12, 3-49 reference ................................................. 3-10, 3-42 reference marker on/off ..................... 3-13, 3-52 reference object...................................... 3-14, 3-54 reg #ip................................................... 3-16 reg#1 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#1, #2, #3, #4, #5 ............................. 3-64, 3-66 reg#10 ................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#2 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#3 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#4 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#5 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#6 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#6, #7, #8, #9, #10 ........................... 3-64, 3-66 reg#7 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#8 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.1 menu index 3-5 reg#9 ..................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#ip .................................................... 3-66 release object ......................................... 3-14, 3-54 release protect......................................... 3-16, 3-68 remove anchor ....................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-22, 3-40 rename .................................................... 3-16, 3-68 repeat .................................................. 3-15, 3-65 reset marker............................................ 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 resolution 1 hz ....................................... 3-13 resolution 1 khz ..................................... 3-13 resolution 1 khz, 100 hz, 10 hz or 1 hz 3-51 resolution 10 hz ..................................... 3-13 resolution 100 hz ................................... 3-13 result area posi up/low ...................... 3-10, 3-44 revision ................................................... 3-9, 3-35 rolloff factor........................................... 3-15, 3-60 rs232....................................................... 3-9, 3-30 sample ..................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 sampling times ....................................... 3-7, 3-18, 3-21, 3-80 save ....................................................... 3-16, 3-66 save.......................................................... 3-16, 3-66 save file .................................................. 3-16, 3-66 save item setup ....................................... 3-16, 3-66 save register ........................................... 3-16, 3-66 save table................................................ 3-18, 3-79 screen full/sepa/carrier .............. 3-15, 3-61 screen reset............................................. 3-19, 3-85 search condition...................................... 3-17, 3-72 selftest ..................................................... 3-9, 3-35 set anchor ............................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-22, 3-40 setup ........................................................ 3-16, 3-67 setup media ............................................. 3-16, 3-69 show result ............................................. 3-18, 3-79 signal ident on/off............................... 3-11, 3-47 signal track on/off.............................. 3-14, 3-18, 3-54, 3-81, 3-82 single ................................................... 3-17, 3-70 slope ........................................................ 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 sort........................................................... 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 source ...................................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 span ....................................................... 3-17, 3-71 spurious ................................................... 3-18, 3-68, 3-79 spurious off........................................... 3-18, 3-79 srart offset............................................... 3-18 srch ....................................................... 3-17, 3-72 start.......................................................... 3-11, 3-45 start offset............................................... 3-82 stop .......................................................... 3-11, 3-45 stop bit .................................................... 3-9, 3-30 stop offset ............................................... 3-18, 3-82 store ......................................................... 3-8, 3-29 sweep time auto/mnl ....................... 3-10, 3-17, 3-37, 3-75 swp ......................................................... 3-17, 3-75 symbol rate 1/t ...................................... 3-15, 3-60 t/t ........................................................... 3-19, 3-85 table init.................................................. 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-18, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-60, 3-79, 3-81 table no.1/2/3 ......................................... 3-18, 3-79 test mode exit......................................... 3-9, 3-35 time ratio corr on/off........................ 3-18, 3-80 total gain ................................................ 3-8, 3-28 total power.............................................. 3-15, 3-58 trace ........................................................ 3-16, 3-67 trace a .................................................... 3-14, 3-54 trace a detector...................................... 3-7, 3-20, 3-22 trace b detector...................................... 3-8, 3-25, 3-26 trace detector.......................................... 3-10, 3-40 trace marker move ................................. 3-14, 3-54 trace point 1001/501............................... 3-9, 3-35 trc disp pause/cont.......................... 3-7, 3-21 trigger delay........................................... 3-17, 3-75 trigger level ........................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 trigger setup ........................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 units......................................................... 3-12, 3-49 user define .............................................. 3-10, 3-42, 3-43 util ........................................................ 3-18, 3-78 vbw auto/mnl .................................. 3-10, 3-37 vbw:rbw on/off............................... 3-10, 3-37
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.1 menu index 3-6 view a ..................................................... 3-7, 3-20 view b ..................................................... 3-8, 3-25 volts......................................................... 3-12, 3-49 watts ........................................................ 3-12, 3-49 wide ....................................................... 3-10 window ................................................ 3-19, 3-84 window on/off .................................... 3-19, 3-84 window position...................................... 3-19, 3-84 window sweep on/off......................... 3-17, 3-19, 3-77, 3-84 window width......................................... 3-19, 3-84 write a .................................................... 3-7, 3-20 write b..................................................... 3-8, 3-25 write protect ............................................ 3-16, 3-66 x cursor position..................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-22, 3-40, 3-80 x data mode............................................ 3-10, 3-42 x db down .............................................. 3-13, 3-51 x db left ................................................. 3-13, 3-52 x db right ............................................... 3-13, 3-52 x range ................................................... 3-17, 3-72 x1 ............................................................. 3-12 x1, x2, x5 or x10 ...................................... 3-49 x10 ........................................................... 3-12 x2 ............................................................. 3-12 x5 ............................................................. 3-12 xdb down ............................................... 3-13, 3-51 xy cursor................................................ 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-21, 3-40, 3-80 xy cursor on/off................................. 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-22, 3-40, 3-80 y cursor auto set.................................... 3-18, 3-80 y cursor position..................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-22, 3-40, 3-80 y data mode............................................ 3-10, 3-42 y range ................................................... 3-17, 3-73 year.......................................................... 3-9, 3-34 zero span ................................................. 3-17, 3-71 zoom ........................................................ 3-19, 3-84 zoom off .................................................. 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 zoom on window .................................... 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 zoom position.......................................... 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 zoom width ............................................. 3-19, 3-84, 3-85
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-7 3.2 menu map this section shows the hierarchical menu configuration on a panel key basis. note: represents a panel key. represents a dialog box. unless otherwise noted, the soft menus are shown. write a view a blank a average a max hold a trace a detector more 1/2 normal positive negative sample det select auto/mnl min hold a normalize a a b artificial analog a power average a trace a detector more 2/2 normalize a on/off normalize with store corr. display line pos. artificial analog on/off trc disp pause/cont sampling times xy cursor xy cursor on/off x cursor position y cursor position set anchor remove anchor delta y disp mode cusr/data att auto/mnl min att on/off normal positive negative sample det select auto/mnl a att
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-8 write b view b blank b average b max hold b trace b detector more 1/2 min hold b normalize b a b power average b trace b detector more 2/2 normalize b on/off normalize with store corr. display line pos. , shift cal all total gain cal each item cal corr on/off cal sig level more 1/2 input att if step amp rbw switching log linearity amplitude mag pbw normal positive negative sample det select auto/mnl normal positive negative sample det select auto/mnl cal 10 mhz ref freq corr on/off more 2/2 coarse fine store default b cal 7 cal
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-9 config gpib address rs232 copy config date/time trace point 1001/501 display on/off more 1/2 selftest revision more 2/2 baud rate data length stop bit parity bit flow control printer file copy device media format file format copy mode compression file no. auto increment menu print format floppy *1 format card a *2 format card b *2 year month day hour minute format order copy mode printer command menu print paper feed printer floppy *1 a *2 b *2 execute selftest power on count att switch count test mode exit copy *1: displayed when equipped with the floppy disk drive. *2: displayed when equipped with the memory card drive (option).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-10 couple rbw auto/mnl vbw auto/mnl sweep time auto/mnl all auto rbw:span on/off vbw:rbw on/off more 1/2 color gray#1 gray#2 mono#1 mono#2 trace detector display line on/off xy cursor limit line label result area posi up/low display control normal positive negative sample xy cursor on/off x cursor position y cursor position set anchor remove anchor pll band width rbw 100hz anlg/dgtl more 2/2 format limit line setup pass/fail judgement on/off auto adjust limit line edit limit line 1 pass range limit line 2 pass range x data mode reference user define offset y data mode reference user define offset label entry label delete auto wide medium narrow limit line 1/2 insert line delete line sort table init copy table 1 to 2 copy table 2 to 1 abc...
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-11 freq center start stop cf step size auto/mnl freq offset on/off more 1/2 *3 auto tune manual tune bias posi/nega band select band lock on/off average loss on/off loss:freq on/off loss:freq edit insert line delete line sort table init presel tune preselector 1.6 ghz/3.6 ghz *1 mixer int/ext *2 ext mixer config *2 signal ident on/off *2 more 2/2 lcl *1: displayed for the r3267 only. *2: displayed for the r3273 only. *3: displayed for the r3267/73.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-12 dbm dbmv db v db vemf dbpw watts volts level 10 db/div 5 db/div 2 db/div 1 db/div 0.5 db/div db/div linear units ref offset on/off correction factor x1 x2 x5 x10 correction on/off correction edit insert line delete line sort table init
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-13 x db down x db left x db right peak x db down disp mode rel/abs.l/abs.r cont down on/off reference marker on/off meas counter peak list noise/hz xdb down 3rd order measure % am measure resolution 1 khz resolution 100 hz resolution 10 hz resolution 1 hz counter on/off peak list level peak list freq list off dbm/hz db v/ hz dbc/hz fixed mkr peak noise/hz off
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-14 mkr mkr marker cf marker ref peak cf peak ref more 1/2 marker cf step delta span delta cf delta cf step marker marker step delta marker step more 2/2 normal marker delta marker multi marker reference object trace marker move marker off more 1/2 delta marker on/off fixed marker on/off 1/delta marker on/off next peak multi mkr setup marker list on/off peak list level peak list freq peak delta y multi mkr off marker no. marker on marker off active marker reset marker delta marker anchor limit line display line trace a release object signal track on/off marker step size auto/mnl marker off more 2/2 , shift off off mkr
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-15 power channel power total power average power acp active trace a/b channel position channel width average times power meas off cs/bs setup nyquist filter setup parameter setup screen full/sepa/carrier average times on/off graph acp off nyquist filter on/off insert line delete line sort noise corr on/off table init bs window on/off graph on/off multi mkr setup marker no. marker on marker off active marker reset marker , shift preset rcl recall register recall file list reg/file device ram/fd *1 device ram/a/b *2 reg#1 reg#2 reg#3 reg#4 reg#5 recall on power more 1/2 recall list reg/file reg#6 reg#7 reg#8 reg#9 reg#10 recall on power more 2/2 repeat symbol rate 1/t rolloff factor nyquist filter default manual define default *1: *2: displayed when equipped displayed when equipped with the floppy disk drive. with the memory card drive (option). config preset
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-16 save register clear register save file clear file list reg/file device ram/fd *1 device ram/a/b *2 setup media , save reg#1 reg#2 reg#3 reg#4 reg#5 reg #ip more 1/2 reg#6 reg#7 reg#8 reg#9 reg#10 reg #ip more 2/2 reg#1 reg#2 reg#3 reg#4 reg#5 default ip more 1/2 reg#6 reg#7 reg#8 reg#9 reg#10 default ip more 2/2 save enter title write protect save item setup list reg/file rename data format setup trace normalize limit line loss:freq corr factor clear release protect list reg/file format floppy *1 copy all *2 format card a *2 format card b *2 *1: *2: displayed when equipped displayed when equipped with the floppy disk drive. with the memory card drive (option). shift rcl save
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-17 full span zero span last span srch next peak next peak left next peak right min peak next min peak search condition cont peak on/off x range limit posi limit width couple to f(t) y range display line limit line 1 limit line 2 peak delta y trigger setup gate src if trigger gate src ext gate gate position gate width gated sweep on/off trigger level source slope sweep time auto/mnl trigger setup trigger delay gated sweep gated sweep on/off window sweep on/off trigger level source slope single span swp
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-18 obw harmonics spurious eye opening phase noise im meas active trace a/b obw% parameter setup average times on/off obw off default manual define default fund frequency on/off harmonics number harmonics off table no.1/2/3 load table edit table show result spurious off table no. 1/2/3 save table load table insert delete table init prev result next result sampling times xy cursor y cursor auto set time ratio corr on/off artificial analog on/off eye opening off xy cursor on/off x cursor position y cursor position c/n meas phase jitter edit table signal track on/off average times on/off c/n meas off insert delete table init srart offset stop offset signal track on/off average times on/off phase jitter off order limit setup pass/fail judgement on/off average times on/off hi sens on/off im meas off 3rd order 5th order 7th order 9th order util
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.2 menu map 3-19 window measuring window zoom f/t t/t screen reset window on/off window position window width window sweep on/off max peak next peak 3rd order peak peak delta y zoom position zoom width zoom on window zoom off peak zooming screen reset zoom position zoom width zoom on window zoom off peak zooming screen reset max peak next peak 3rd order peak peak delta y
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3 functional description 3-20 3.3 functional description this section describes the front panel keys and the soft menus associated with them. 3.3.1 a key (trace a) this section describes the trace a(1) menu used for the trace function displayed when the a key is pressed. write a this mode displays trace data from memory a, which is updated for each sweep. view a this mode displays trace data previously saved in memory a. blank a this mode erases the trace data currently stored in memory a. average a allows you to set the number of times the sweep is performed for averaging. once sweeping has begun, the result for each sweep (which is averaged with the previous sweeps) is displayed until the set count is reached. max hold a allows you to set the number of times max hold is performed. once sweeping has begun, the maximum result for each sweep is kept and displayed until the set count is reached. trace a detector displays the detector a menu. normal sets the normal detector mode which automatically detects posi- tive or negative peaks for each trace point. positive sets the positive peak detector mode. negative sets the negative peak detector mode. sample sets the sample detector mode. det select auto/mnl toggles the detector mode between auto (automatic) or mnl. (manual) settings. auto: automatically sets the most appropriate detector mode from the following modes. the detector mode will not change if the trace is set to write mode. trace mode detector mode average a sample max hold a positive min hold a negative power average a sample
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.1 a key (trace a) 3-21 mnl: sets the detector mode to manual mode. more 1/2 displays the trace a (2) menu. min hold a allows you to set the number of times the sweep min hold is per- formed. once sweeping has begun, the minimum result for each sweep is kept and displayed until the set count is reached. normalize a displays the normalize a menu. normalize a on/off toggles the normalize function on or off. on: corrects for the level using the normalization data. off: turns off the normalize function. normalize with store corr. this command obtains normalization data and turns the normal- ization function on. the waveform data that is displayed on the screen is used for obtaining the normalization data. display line pos. displays the display line and allows you to set the position of the display line. a b switches the data saved in memory a with the data saved in mem- ory b, and memory b data with memory a. artificial analog a displays the art analog menu. artificial analog on/off toggles the quasi analog trace function on or off. on: displays the trace in an intensity proportional to its sweep frequency. off: turns off the quasi analog trace function. trc disp pause/cont toggles the quasi analog trace function between pause and cont. pause: halts the quasi analog trace function temporarily. cont: continuously updates the quasi analog trace. sampling times allows you to set the number of sampling times used when mea- suring amplitude. xy cursor displays the xy cursor menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.1 a key (trace a) 3-22 xy cursor on/off toggles the xy cursor function on or off. on: displays the xy cursor. off: turns the xy cursor off. x cursor position allows you to set the x cursor position. y cursor position allows you to set the y cursor position. set anchor displays the anchor marker at the intersection of x- and y- cur- sors. the x- and y-values shown for the xy cursor are now relative to the position of the anchor marker. remove anchor removes the anchor marker from the screen. delta y disp mode cusr/data used to change the displayed contents of ? y (which is the dis- tance between a point of intersection of y and the x cursors and the other point of intersection of the other y cursor and the x cur- sor). cusr: level difference between two y cursors data: displays the difference between the maximum and minimum level values (the difference between the green dots) previously obtained. power average a displays the trace averaged in units of watt, using data in dbm. where pavg is the result of averaging the power; pin is nth measurement data for i point (1 to 1001); and n is the number of averaging (or number of sweeps) trace a detector displays the detector a menu. normal sets the normal detector mode which automatically detects posi- tive or negative peaks for each trace point. positive sets the positive peak detector mode. negative sets the negative peak detector mode. sample sets the sample detector mode. p avg = 10 log [ 10 ] n 1 n n= 1 ( ) 10 pin
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.1 a key (trace a) 3-23 det select auto/mnl toggles the detector mode between auto and mnl. auto: automatically sets the most appropriate detector mode from the following modes. the detector mode will not be changed if the trace mode is set to write mode. mnl: sets the detector mode to manual mode. more 2/2 returns the trace a (1) menu. trace mode detector mode average a sample max hold a positive min hold a negative power average a sample
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.2 att key (attenuator) 3-24 3.3.2 att key (attenuator) this section describes the att menu displayed when the att key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set the attenuator. att auto/mnl toggles the attenuator between auto and mnl modes. auto: the attenuator value is automatically based on the ref- erence level. mnl: allows you to set the attenuator value manually. min att on/off toggles the min att function on or off. on: sets the attenuator value to the minimum attenuation to limit the attenuation range. off: turns the min att mode off.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.3 b key (trace b) 3-25 3.3.3 b key (trace b) this section describes the trace b (1) menu used for the trace function displayed when the b key is pressed. write b this mode displays trace data from memory b, which is updated for each sweep. view b this mode displays trace data previously saved in memory b. blank b this mode erases the trace data currently stored in memory b. average b allows you to set the number of times the sweep is performed for averaging. once sweeping has begun, the result for each sweep (which averaged with the previous settings) is displayed until the set count is reached. max hold b allows you to set the number of times the sweep max hold is per- formed. once sweeping has begun, the maximum result for each sweep is kept and displayed until the set count is reached. trace b detector displays the detector b menu. normal sets the normal detector mode which automatically detects posi- tive or negative peaks for each trace point. positive sets the positive peak detector mode. negative sets the negative peak detector mode. sample sets the sample detector mode. det select auto/mnl toggles the detector mode between auto (automatic) or mnl (manual) settings. auto: automatically sets to one of the following detector modes under which the most appropriate detector is ob- tained. the detector mode will not change if the trace mode is in write mode. mnl: sets the detector mode to manual mode. more 1/2 displays the trace b (2) menu. trace mode detector mode average a sample max hold a positive min hold a negative power average a sample
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.3 b key (trace b) 3-26 min hold b allows you to set the number of times the sweep min hold is per- formed. once sweeping has begun, the minimum result for each sweep is kept and displayed until the set count is reached. normalize b displays the normalize b menu. normalize b on/off toggles the normalize function on or off. on: corrects for the level using the normalization data. off: turns the normalize function off. normalize with store corr. this command obtains normalization data and turns the normal- ization function on. the waveform data that is displayed on the screen is used for obtaining the normalization data. display line pos. displays the display line and allows you to set the position of the display line. a b switches the data saved in memory a with the data saved in mem- ory b, and memory b data with memory a. power average b displays the trace averaged in units of watt, using data in dbm. where pavg is the result of averaging the power; pin is nth measurement data for one point (1 to 1001); and n is the number of averaging (or number of sweeps) trace b detector displays the detector b menu. normal sets the normal detector mode which automatically detects posi- tive or negative peaks for each trace point. positive sets the positive peak detector mode. negative sets the negative peak detector mode. sample sets the sample detector mode. p avg = 10log [ 10 1001 pin i = 1 ( ) n 1 10
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.3 b key (trace b) 3-27 det select auto/mnl toggles the detector mode between auto and mnl. auto: automatically sets the most appropriate detector mode from the following modes. the detector mode will not be change if the trace mode is set to write mode. mnl: sets the detector mode to manual mode. more 2/2 returns the trace b (1) menu. trace mode detector mode average b sample max hold b positive min hold b negative power average b sample
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.4 cal key (calibration) 3-28 3.3.4 cal key (calibration) this section describes the menu displayed when the shift and 7 (cal) keys are pressed. cal all performs calibrations for all items to see if they meet the specifi- cations. perform them before taking measurements. total gain performs calibrations with more accuracy than cal all, because user-defined measurement conditions are used. set the conditions first before the calibrations. cal each item displays the cal item menu used for each calibration. input att measures the input attenuator switching error and calibrates it. if step amp measures the if step amp switching error and calibrates it rbw switching measures the switching error for the if filter resolution band- width and calibrates it. log linearity measures the linearity of the ordinate axis at a range of 10 db/ div to 0.5 db/div on the log scale and calibrates it. amplitude mag measures the switching error at a range of 10 db/div to 0.5 db/ div on the log scale and calibrates it. pbw measures pbw (noise power bandwidth) at a resolution band- width range of 10 hz to 10 mhz and calibrates it. cal corr on/off toggles the calibration factor function on or off. on: calibration is performed using the calibration factor ob- tained by cal all or cal each item. off: turns off the calibration factor function. cal sig level sets the calibration signal?s output level. more 1/2 displays the cal(2) menu. cal 10 mhz ref allows you to enter a correction value in relation to the 10 mhz reference frequency and displays the cal ref menu. note the above statement does not apply to spectrum analyzers with opt 23 installed. coarse allows you to enter a coarse correction data to the 10 mhz refer- ence frequency.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.4 cal key (calibration) 3-29 fine allows you to enter a fine correction data to the 10 mhz reference frequency. store saves the correction data corresponding to the 10 mhz reference frequency that have previously been modified. default resets the coarse and fine correction data that are previously en- tered to the factory defaults. freq corr on/off toggles the frequency correction function on or off. on: frequencies are corrected based on characteristics set at the factory. off: turns the frequency correction function off. more 2/2 displays the cal(1) menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.5 config key (configuration) 3-30 3.3.5 config key (configuration) this section describes the config(1) menu displayed when the config key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set a gpib interface. gpib address sets the gpib address for the analyzer. rs232 displays the rs232 dialog box. baud rate sets the transmission rate to 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps. data length sets the data bit length to 7 or 8 bits. stop bit sets the stop bit to either 1 or 2. parity bit sets the parity bit type. none: does not perform parity checking. odd: sets the parity bit type to odd. even: sets the parity bit type to even. flow control turns the flow control function on. none: no flow control is performed. xon/xoff: flow control is performed according to the xon or xoff code sent. copy config displays the copy config menu to select an output device where the screen data is printed. printer displays the printer dialog box.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.5 config key (configuration) 3-31 copy mode selects an output mode. color: prints the screen data in size l and the actual screen col- or. s-color s: changes the screen data into a simple color image and prints it in size s. s-color l: changes the screen data into a simple color image and prints it in size l. gray: prints the screen data in size l and in a four-level gray scale. mono s: prints the screen data in size s and in monochrome. mono l: prints the screen data in size l and in monochrome. note data printed using the entire size of the paper in portrait ori- entation is size l. data that almost fits the actual screen size and is printed in landscape orientation is size s. the background of the simple color image is not painted. printer command selects a type of printer. esc/p: an esc/p printer can be used. hp pcl: a hp pcl printer can be used. esc/p raster: an esc/p raster printer can be used.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.5 config key (configuration) 3-32 note color, s-color s and s-color l in the copy mode menu are available when hp pcl or esc/p raster is selected. menu print toggles the menu print setting on or off. on: the menu is printed. off: the menu is not printed. paper feed sets whether or not a sheet of paper is fed after a hard copy is out- put. this function can be set when copy mode is set to s-color s or mono s. on: feeds a sheet of paper after the hard copy is output. off: does not feed a sheet of paper after the hard copy is out- put. multiple screens? data can be printed on an a4-size sheet of paper. file displays the file dialog box. file format the file has been set to the bitmap format. copy mode selects an output mode. color: files are saved in the actual screen color. s-color: files are saved in a simple color image. gray: files are saved in gray scale (4 shades of gray). mono: files are saved in monochrome (black and white).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.5 config key (configuration) 3-33 compression toggles the file compression function on or off. a bitmap file can be compressed in the run-length encoding format. on: image compression is turned on. off: image compression is turned off. note the compression function is available when copy mode is set to color, s-color or gray. file no. sets the file number. auto increment toggles the auto-increment function on or off, which is used to in- crement the file number automatically. on: the file number is incremented when the image is filed. off: the file number specified in the file no. field is used. menu print toggles the menu print setting on or off. on: the menu is included when the image is printed. off: the menu is not included when the image is printed. copy device copy device dialog box is displayed. note *1:when equipped with the floppy disk drive *2:when equipped with the memory card drive (option). printer *1 *2 sets the destination to printer. floppy *1 selects floppy disk. a *2 selects memory card a. b *2 selects memory card b. media format displays the format menu. note *1:when equipped with the floppy disk drive *2:when equipped with the memory card drive (option).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.5 config key (configuration) 3-34 format floppy *1 format floppy disk. format card a *2 format memory card a. format card b *2 format memory card b. date/time displays the date/time dialog box. year allows you to set the year. month allows you to set the month. day allows you to set the day. hour allows you to set the hour. minute allows you to set the minutes. format selects the date indication mode. long: displays the date and time. short: displays the date only. off: does not display the date and time. order selects the format of the date indication. year/month/day: displays in the order of a day of the week, year, month and day. month/day/year: displays in the order of a day of the week, month, day and year.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.5 config key (configuration) 3-35 day/month/year: displays in the order of a day of the week, day, month and year. trace point 1001/501 toggles the trace point on the horizontal axis between 1001 and 501. 1001: sets the trace points to 1001. 501: sets the trace points to 501. display on/off toggles the annotation display function on or off. on: displays the annotation. off: removes the annotation. more 1/2 displays the config (2) menu. selftest displays the selftest menu. execute selftest executes the selftest. power on count displays the number of times the spectrum analyzer is turned on, accumulated total of powerup time. att switch count displays the total switching counts for each internal cells of the attenuator. test mode exit terminates the self-test mode. all settings are reset to their intial values and the spectrum analyzer stops sweeping. revision displays the software versions and the options implemented in the analyzer. more 2/2 returns the config (1) menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.6 copy key (copy) 3-36 3.3.6 copy key (copy) sends the screen data to the destination selected by copy config . (there is no menu associated with this panel key.) * to cancel the printing, press shift and copy (cancel) .
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.7 couple key (couple function) 3-37 3.3.7 couple key (couple function) this section describes the couple(1) menu displayed when the couple key is pressed. rbw auto/mnl toggles the resolution bandwidth between auto and mnl. auto: automatically sets an optimum resolution bandwidth based on the current span. mnl: allows you to set the resolution bandwidth manually. vbw auto/mnl toggles the video bandwidth between auto and mnl. auto: automatically sets an optimum video bandwidth based on the resolution bandwidth. mnl: allows you to set the video bandwidth manually. sweep time auto/mnl toggles the sweep time between auto and mnl. auto: automatically sets an optimum sweep time based on the span. mnl: allows you to set the sweep time manually. all auto automatically sets an optimum resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and sweep time based on the span. rbw:span on/off toggles the "span vs. resolution bandwidth" function on or off. this function can be used only when the rbw is set to auto. on: the ratio of "rbw vs. span" can be changed. off: the value represented by the ratio of "span vs. resolu- tion bandwidth" is 0.01:1. note if "trace point" is set to a value lower than the value calcu- lated by span/rbw, the level may not be displayed correctly. if this happens, set "trace detector" to "positive." vbw:rbw on/off toggles the "resolution bandwidth vs. video bandwidth" function on or off. this function can be used only when the vbw is set to auto. on: the ratio of "vbw vs. rbw" can be changed. off: the value represented by the ratio of the resolution bandwidth to the video bandwidth is 1/1.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.7 couple key (couple function) 3-38 more 1/2 displays the couple(2) menu. pll band width displays the pll band width dialog box. pll band width sets the bandwidth of the band-pass filter in the pll circuit. auto: automatically sets the filter bandwidth so that optimum phase noise characteristics (corresponding to the fre- quency span) can be obtained. narrow: sets a narrow bandwidth. phase noise of the carrier frequency is reduced within -100 khz and +100 khz. medium: sets a medium bandwidth. wide: sets a wide bandwidth. phase noise of the carrier frequency is reduced within -10 khz and +10 khz. caution the phase noise characteristics may be degraded if pll bandwidth is set to wide, medium or nar- row. if this happens, set the pll bandwidth to auto. rbw 100hz anlg/dgtl displays the mode of the filter to be used when an rbw equal to or lower than 100 hz is selected. anlg: an analog filter is used. the highest filter resolution is 10 hz. dgtl: a digital filter is used preferentially. the highest filter resolution is 1 hz.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.7 couple key (couple function) 3-39 note: the tracking generator cannot be used in combination with digi- tal filters. the sweep time is always set to auto. the vbw cannot be set with an indication of "* * * * *". at this time, an output of "-9.999999990000e+08" is obtained in response to the "vb?" gpib query command. the zero span cannot be set if the rbw is 1 hz or 3hz. an ana- log filter is automatically selected if the rbw is 10 hz, 30 hz or 100 hz. the maximum span frequency is 1000 times higher than the rbw. however, this value is limited to 700 hz if an rbw of 1 hz is used. if the rbw is 10 hz, 30 hz or 100 hz, and if the specified span frequency exceeds the limit shown above, an analog filter is automatically selected. the counter, sound, window sweep and gated sweep functions are not available. the video trigger in the trigger function cannot be used. sample mode is automatically set for the trace detector. other modes cannot be used. ? the tracking generator cannot be used with digital filters. more 2/2 return the couple(1) menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.8 format key (display format) 3-40 3.3.8 format key (display format) this section describes the format menu displayed when the format key is pressed. trace detector displays the trace detector (trace det) menu. normal sets the normal detector mode which automatically detects posi- tive or negative peaks for each trace point. positive sets the positive peak detector mode. negative sets the negative peak detector mode. sample sets the sample detector mode. note if "trace point" is set to a value lower than the value calcu- lated by span/rbw, the level may not be displayed correctly. if this happens, set "trace detector" to "positive." display line on/off toggles the display line indication on or off. this line is used as a base line when comparing trace levels. on: turns the display line on. the display line position can be changed as necessary. off: removes the display line. xy cursor displays the xy cursor menu. xy cursor on/off toggles the xy cursor on or off. on: displays the xy cursor. off: removes the xy cursor. x cursor position allows you to set the x cursor position. y cursor position allows you to set the y cursor position. set anchor displays an anchor marker at the intersection of the x- and y- cursors. the x- and y-values of the xy cursor are then expressed with values relative to the anchor marker remove anchor removes the anchor marker. limit line displays limit line menu. limit line setup displays limit line setup dialog box.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.8 format key (display format) 3-41 limit line 1 toggles limit line 1 on or off. on: displays the result obtained from limit line 1 and pass range (pass or fail). off: removes the result obtained from limit line 1 and pass range. pass range sets the pass/fail criteria based on limit line 1. above the line: values above the limit line are considered pass. below the line: values below the limit line are considered pass. limit line 2 toggles limit line 2 on or off. on: displays the result obtained from limit line 2 and pass range (pass or fail). off: removes the result obtained from limit line 2 and pass range. pass range sets the pass/fail criteria based on limit line 2. above the line: values above the limit line are considered pass. below the line: values below the limit line are considered pass.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.8 format key (display format) 3-42 x data mode sets the data property for the limit line on the x- axis (frequency or time). abs: sets limit line position (which is set at limit line ed- it) on the x-axis to absolute mode. the limit line position on the x-axis varies depending on the frequency span and center frequency. rel: sets limit line position (which is set at limit line ed- it) on the x-axis to relative mode. the limit line position on the x-axis varies depending on the frequency span and center frequency. the limit line position on the x-axis is fixed at a loca- tion specified by "reference" and "offset" and is not af- fected by changes to the frequency span or center frequency. reference sets the reference position. left: sets a reference position on the furthest point of the x- axis. center: sets the reference position to the center of the x-axis. user def: the reference position is set in "user define". user define sets the reference position on the x-axis. offset sets the width from the reference position. y data mode sets the data property for limit line on the y- axis (level). abs: sets limit line position (which is set at limit line ed- it) on the y-axis to absolute mode. the limit line position on the y-axis varies depending on the level. rel: sets limit line position (which is set at limit line ed- it) on the y-axis to relative mode. the limit line position on the y-axis varies depending on the level. the limit line position on the y-axis is fixed at a loca- tion specified by "reference" and "offset" and is not af- fected by changes to the level. reference sets the reference position. top: sets the reference position to the highest point on the y- axis.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.8 format key (display format) 3-43 bottom: sets the reference position to the lowest point on the y- axis. user def: the reference position is set in ?user define?. user define sets the reference position on the x-axis. offset sets the offset from the reference position. pass/fail judgement on/off toggles the pass/fail judgment function, which is based on the limit lines, on or off. on: performs the pass/fail judgement based on the speci- fied limit lines. off: turns the pass/fail judgment function off. auto adjust the position of limit line is automatically moved so that the dis- tance between the trace and limit line stays the same. this function is available only when "y data mode" is set to "rel." limit line edit displays edit menu. limit line 1/2 selects the limit line to be edited on the edit screen. insert line a line with the same values is inserted in the line where the cursor is located. delete line the line where the cursor is located is deleted. sort previously entered data is sorted by frequency. table init deletes all data from the limit line set table. copy table 1 to 2 the data obtained for limit line 1 is copied to the limit line 2 ta- ble. copy table 2 to 1 the data obtained for limit line 2 is copied to the limit line 1 ta- ble. label displays the label menu. label entry allows you to enter the label name which will appear on the label edit screen. label delete removes the currently displayed label.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.8 format key (display format) 3-44 result area posi up/low toggles the result area function display position between up and low. up: displays the result on the upper right side in the result area. low: displays the result on the lower right side in the result area. display control displays the display control (disp color) menu which is used to set the screen display. color sets the monitor display to 256 colors. gray#1 sets the monitor display to 16 shades of gray (the background is white). gray#2 sets the monitor display to 16 shades of gray (the background is black). mono#1 sets the monitor display to monochrome (black and white, and the background is white). mono#2 sets the monitor display to monochrome (black and white, and the background is black).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.9 freq key (frequency) 3-45 3.3.9 freq key (frequency) this section describes the frequency(1) menu displayed when the freq key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set a center frequency. center turns on the center frequency and allows you to set it as desired. the frequency range is specified by the start and stop frequencies. start turns on the start frequency and allows you to set it as desired. stop turns on the stop frequency and allows you to set it as desired. the frequency range is specified by the center frequency and fre- quency span. cf step size auto/mnl toggles the step size function between auto and mnl. this function allows you to change the center frequency using the step keys. auto: automatically sets the step size to 1/10 of the frequency span. mnl: allows you to set the step size manually. freq offset on/off toggles the frequency offset function on or off. on: turns on the frequency offset and allows you to set it as desired. the frequency can then be changed using the offset value only. displayed frequency value = set value + offset value. off: turns off the offset function. more 1/2 displays the frequency (2) menu. note this function is not displayed on the r3264 screen. presel tune displays the presel menu. note this function is not displayed on the r3264 screen. auto tune automatically tunes the preselector based on the frequency of the peak. manual tune manually tunes the preselector to an arbitrary frequency.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.9 freq key (frequency) 3-46 preselector 1.6 ghz/3.6 ghz toggles the preselector?s frequency band between the 1.6 ghz and 3.6 ghz bands. 1.6 ghz/3.6 ghz: sets the frequency band to either 1.6 ghz or 3.6 ghz. note displayed on the r3267 screen only. mixer int/ext switches between the internal and external mixers. int: uses the internal mixer. ext: uses the external mixer. note displayed on the r3273 screen only. ext mixer config displays the ext mixer menu. note displayed on the r3273 screen only. bias posi/nega toggles the external mixer between positive and negative bias. band select selects a frequency band for the external mixer. the frequency bands are listed in the table shown below. frequency band frequency range[ghz] mixing order [n] 1 12.4 to 18.0 3 2 17.0 to 26.5 4 3 22.0 to 33.0 5 4 26.5 to 40.0 6 5 33.0 to 50.0 8 6 40.0 to 60.0 8 7 50.0 to 75.0 10 8 60.0 to 90.0 12 9 75.0 to 110.0 14 10 90.0 to 140.0 18 11 110.0 to 170.0 22 12 140.0 to 220.0 28 13 170.0 to 260.0 34 14 220.0 to 325.0 42
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.9 freq key (frequency) 3-47 band lock on/off toggles the frequency band lock function on or off. on: locks the frequency band to the one selected for the ex- ternal mixer. off: automatically switches the frequency band according to the start and stop frequencies. average loss on/off toggles the correction function (used for the external mixer?s in- trinsic average conversion loss) on or off. on: corrects for the conversion loss using an average con- version loss value. off: turns the correction function off. loss:freq on/off toggles the correction function on or off. on: corrects for conversion loss using the frequency vs. loss table. off: turns the correction function off. loss:freq edit displays the loss:freq edit menu. insert line a line with the same values is inserted in the line where the cursor is located. delete line the line where the cursor is located is deleted. sort the data previously entered is sorted by frequency. table init deletes all data from the table. signal ident on/off toggles the signal identification function on or off. on: more than one spectrum is displayed for one input sig- nal when an external mixer is used. from among these spectrums, the true signal is identified. off: turns off the signal identification function. more 2/2 returns to the frequency (1) menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.10 lcl key (gpib remote control) 3-48 3.3.10 lcl key (gpib remote control) turns off gpib remote control. (there is no menu associated with this panel key.)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.11 level key (level) 3-49 3.3.11 level key (level) this section describes the level menu displayed when the level key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set a reference level. db/div displays the db/div menu and turns the logarithmic-scale display on. 10, 5, 2, 1 or 0.5db/div sets the vertical axis to 10 db/div, 5 db/div, 2 db/div, 1 db/div or 0.5 db/div. linear displays the linear menu and turns the linear-scale display on. x1, x2, x5 or x10 sets the vertical axis scale to x1, x2, x5, or x10. units displays the units menu. dbm sets the unit to dbm. dbmv sets the unit to dbm v. db v sets the unit to db v. db vemf sets the unit to db vemf dbpw sets the unit to dbpw. watts sets the unit to watts. volts sets the unit to volts. ref offset on/off toggles the reference level offset function on or off. on: allows you to set the offset value and displays the ref- erence level increased by the offset value. (reference level (displayed) = reference level (set) + offset value) off: turns off the offset function. correction factor displays the corr. fact menu. correction on/off toggles the level correction function on or off. on: corrects the level using the correction data. off: turns the level correction function off. correction edit displays the corr. edit menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.11 level key (level) 3-50 insert line a line with the same values is inserted in the line where the cursor is located. delete line the line where the cursor is located is deleted. sort the data previously entered is sorted by frequency. table init deletes all data from the table.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.12 meas key (measurement) 3-51 3.3.12 meas key (measurement) this section describes the measure menu displayed when the meas key is pressed. counter displays the counter menu. resolution 1 khz, 100 hz, 10 hz or 1 hz allows you to set the resolution to 1 khz, 100 hz, 10 hz or 1 hz. counter on/off toggles the frequency counter function on or off. on: measures the active marker frequency using the fre- quency counter. off: turns the frequency counter function off. peak list displays the peak list menu. peak list level lists the levels and frequencies in descending order of the peak levels. peak list freq lists the levels and frequencies in descending order of the peak level frequencies. list off turns off the peak list display function. noise/hz displays the noise/hz menu. dbm/hz sets the vertical axis unit to dbm, and sets the marker readout sig- nal level unit to dbm/hz. in addition, the detector is automatically set to sample mode. db v/ hz sets the vertical axis unit to db v, and sets the marker readout signal level unit to db v / hz. in addition, the detector is auto- matically set to sample mode. dbc/hz sets the unit of delta marker signal level to dbc/hz and turns the marker fixed function on. in addition, the detector is automati- cally set to sample mode. fixed mkr peak move the delta marker to the peak currently displayed (on the trace) in order to make it fixed in this position. noise/hz off turns off the noise measurement mode and returns to the measure menu. xdb down x db down menu is displayed to allow you to set the attenuation. x db down moves normal and delta markers to an intersection point on the trace x db down from the present location.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.12 meas key (measurement) 3-52 x db left moves normal marker leftwards to an intersection point on the trace x db down from the present location. x db right moves normal marker rightwards to an intersection point on the trace x db down from the present location. peak x db down searches for the highest peak within the target range and displays normal and delta markers on an intersection point on the trace x db down from the present location. the reference marker is displayed at the highest peak point. disp mode rel/abs.l/abs.r selects how the marker data is displayed. rel: the normal marker is displayed on the right; and the delta marker, on the left. abs.l: the marker on the left is displayed as an absolute value. abs.r: the marker on the right is displayed as an absolute val- ue. cont down on/off toggles the continuous x-db down function on or off. on: repeatedly executes the x-db down function from the highest peak on the trace for each sweep. off: turns off the continuous x-db down function. reference marker on/off toggles the reference marker function on or off. on: displays the reference marker on the x-db down refer- ence position off: removes the reference marker. 3rd order measure displays delta marker on the peak of the fundamental wave and normal marker on the peak of the third order intermodulation dis- tortion. % am measure calculates an am modulation factor using a peak search, and dis- plays the result in percentage (%).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.13 mkr key (marker) 3-53 3.3.13 mkr key (marker) this section describes the mkr(1) menu displayed when the mkr key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set the marker. normal marker displays normal marker. the frequency and level of the marker are displayed in the marker area. delta marker displays the delta mkr menu. delta marker on/off toggles delta marker display function on or off. on: displays delta marker at the same position as the nor- mal marker. the relative values to normal marker (frequency and level) are displayed in the marker area. off: removes delta marker. fixed marker on/off toggles fixed marker function on or off. on: holds the frequency and level of delta marker. off: turns off fixed marker function. 1/delta marker on/off toggles the time display function for delta marker on or off. on: displays a value in frequency on the time axis; and dis- plays a value in time on the frequency axis. off: turns off the inverse number display function. next peak moves the marker to the one whose value is next to the current peak within the search range. multi marker displays the multi mkr menu. multi mkr setup displays the mkr setup menu. marker no. allows you to set the multi-marker number and displays the value you entered. marker on displays the multi-marker specified by the number. the frequen- cy and level of the marker are displayed in the marker area. marker off removes the multi-marker specified by the number. active marker allows you to set the number of the multi-marker specified. reset marker removes all multi-markers except multi-marker no.1.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.13 mkr key (marker) 3-54 marker list on/off toggles the multi-marker list display function on or off. on: displays a list of the current multi-marker numbers, fre- quencies and levels in ascending order. off: removes the list of multi-markers. peak list level lists the levels and frequencies in descending order of the peak levels. peak list freq lists the levels and frequencies in descending order of the peak level frequencies. peak delta y allows you to set the level difference used for peak searches. multi mkr off removes all multi-markers from the display. reference object displays the ref object menu. delta marker displays the frequency (or time) and level of normal marker rel- ative to the delta marker. anchor displays the frequency (or time) and level of normal marker rel- ative to the anchor. limit line displays the level of normal marker relative to limit line 1 or 2. display line displays the level of normal marker relative to the display line. trace a displays the level of normal marker relative to trace a. release object turns off the relative value display mode. trace marker move moves the active marker between trace a and b every time the trace marker move soft key is pressed (if both traces are dis- played). marker off all currently displayed markers are removed. more 1/2 displays the mkr (2) menu. signal track on/off toggles the signal track function on or off. on: sets the marker frequency to the center frequency for each sweep, after performing a peak search for the same peak. off: turns off the signal track function.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.13 mkr key (marker) 3-55 marker step size auto/mnl toggles the step size used by the step keys between automatic and manual. auto: sets the step size to 1/10 of the frequency span. mnl: allows you to set the step size manually. mnl mode is set automatically when the step size is equivalent to the value set by either "marker marker step" or "delta marker step." marker off all currently displayed markers are removed. more 2/2 returns to the mkr (1) menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.14 mkr key (marker ) 3-56 3.3.14 mkr key (marker ) this section describes the marker(1) menu displayed when the mkr key is pressed. marker cf makes the currently active marker frequency the center frequen- cy. marker ref makes the currently active marker level the reference level. peak cf makes the frequency of the maximum peak level within the search range the center frequency, and moves the marker to the highest peak point. peak ref makes the maximum peak level within the search range the refer- ence level, and moves the marker to the highest peak point. more 1/2 displays the mkr (2) menu. marker cf step sets the marker to the frequency as the step size of the center fre- quency. delta span sets the difference in frequency between delta and normal mark- ers as the span. delta cf sets the difference in frequency between delta and normal mark- ers as the center frequency. delta cf step sets the difference in frequency between delta and normal mark- ers as the step size of the center frequency. marker marker step sets the marker frequency as the step size of the marker. the marker step size of the mkr key is set to mnl. delta marker step sets the difference in frequency between delta and normal mark- ers as the step size of the marker. the marker step size of the mkr key is set to mnl. more 2/2 returns to the mkr (1) menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.15 off key (marker off) 3-57 3.3.15 off key (marker off) pressing shift and mkr (off) removes all the markers currently being displayed. (there is no menu associated with this panel key.)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) 3-58 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) this section describes the power menu displayed when the power key is pressed. channel power activates the measuring window, and displays the channel menu. the channel power is calculated using the formula shown below. p ch : channel power p(n): data (dbm) for each trace point span: current span value pbw: noise power bandwidth x1: data position of start frequency on the x-axis. x2: data position of stop frequency on the x-axis. channel position allows you to set the center of the measuring window (channel bandwidth). channel width allows you to set the width of the measuring window (channel bandwidth). average times allows you to set the number of times the sweep is averaged. power meas off removes the window and cancels channel power measurements. total power measures the total power in the object range (the entire measure- ment span or window) and displays it. the total power is calculated using the formula shown below. the number of trace points on the horizontal axis is set to 1001. p t : total power to be calculated. p(n): data (dbm) for each trace point. span: current span value pbw: noise power bandwidth x1: 1 x2: 1001 average power measures the power averaged over the object range (the entire measurement span or window) and displays it. allows you to set the averaging count used to calculate the aver- age power. with average power measurements, the resolution bandwidth (rbw) is set to a bandwidth wider than the amplitude variation width (the resolution bandwidth must be at least three times wider than the occupied bandwidth). the average power is calculated using the formula shown below. the number of trace points on the horizontal axis is set to 1001. p ch = 10log [ ( 10 10 x2 p(n) n = x1 ] pbw 1 (x2 - x1) span ) p t = 10log [ ( 10 10 ) pbw 1 x2 p(n) n = x1 ] 1001 span
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) 3-59 p avg : denotes the average power to be calculated. p (n): denotes the data (dbm) for each trace point. x1: 1 x2: 1001 acp displays the acp menu. cs/bs setup displays the cs/bs setup menu, and the editor used to set the channel space and channel bandwidth together. nyquist filter on/off toggles the nyquist filter function on or off. on: turns the nyquist filter function on. off: turns the nyquist filter function off. insert line a line with the same values is inserted in the line where the cursor is located. delete line deletes the currently selected line. sort sort the cs/bs setting table by cs. noise corr on/off toggles the noise correction function on or off. on: turns the noise correction function on. the noise correction value measurement can be performed as the acp measurement whenever the setting values regarding the acp measurement (such as rbw, vbw, or the measurement off- set frequency) are changed. the noise power measurement frequency and bandwidth, both of which are used to correct noise, vary depending on the cal freq offset settings in the cs/bs setup dialog box. cal freq offset auto (default): the offset frequency set in the last line in the cs/bs setup dialog box and its measurement bandwidth can be used as the noise pow- er measurement frequency and bandwidth. p avg = 10log [ ( 10 10 ) 1001 1 x2 p(n) n =x1 ]
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) 3-60 cal freq offset manual: the noise power measurement frequency and bandwidth can be specified in the noise field in the cs/bs setup dialog box. in the same manner as the channel space (cs), the noise power measurement frequency can be specified by using the offset fre- quency, which deviates from the center frequency. any noise power measurement bandwidth value can be specified. however, setting the same value as the reference bandwidth (bs) is recommended. off: turns the noise correction function off. when the following two conditions are satisfied, the noise correc- tion function can be turned on or off. otherwise, the function is disabled. 1. the screen display is set to the separate screen mode (sepa). 2. the trace detector is set to the sample mode. note if any signal components other than the spectrum analyzer internal noise exist in the noise power measurement band, noise cannot be corrected successfully. set the noise power measurement frequency to avoid any non-internal noise signal components in the noise power measurement band. table init deletes all data in the table. bs window on/off toggles the acp bandpass window display on or off. on: displays the window within the bandpass which is tar- geted for calculating the acp. off: removes the window. nyquist filter setup displays the nyquist filter setup dialog box. symbol rate 1/t sets the symbol rate. rolloff factor sets the rolloff factor.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) 3-61 nyquist filter toggles the nyquist filter function on or off. on: turns the nyquist filter function on. off: turns the nyquist filter function off. parameter setup displays the acp setup menu. default reads the frequency span, rbw, vbw, the sweep time and the status of the detector which have previously been saved using "define default." manual sets the channel space and channel bandwidth. define default registers the frequency span, rbw, vbw, the sweep time and the status of the detector, which have previously been set manual- ly, as the preset values. screen full/sepa/carrier toggles the screen display between the full and separate screen modes. full: the entire screen is used. calculates the power in reference to the band of the en- tire screen. sepa: the separate screen is used. carrier: the entire screen mode is used. calculates the power in reference to the power of band specified by the carrier band. average times on/off toggles the average function on or off. on: sets the number of times averagings are performed, and the measures the average adjcent channel leakage pow- er. off: measures the acp on a sweep basis. graph displays the acp graph menu. graph on/off toggles the graph display on or off. on: displays the leakage power graph as trace b and puts delta marker in the center of the screen. the b memory is used to display the acp graph. off: turns off the graph display.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.16 power key (power measurement) 3-62 multi mkr setup displays the multi mkr setup menu. marker no. enter the multi marker number here. marker on displays the multi-marker specified at marker no. in the center of the trace and the frequency and level of the marker in the marker area. marker off removes the multi-marker specified by the number. active marker makes the multi-marker specified by the number the active mark- er. reset marker removes all multi-markers except for multi-marker 1. acp off turns off the acp measurement function, and returns to the pow- er menu. active trace a/b togles the trace data for the power measurement between traces. a: trace a is the target for the power measurement. b: trace b is the target for the power measurement.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.17 preset key (initialization) 3-63 3.3.17 preset key (initialization) pressing shift and config (preset) allows you to change the current settings of the analyzer to either case: (there is no softmenu associated with this panel key.)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.18 rcl key (data readout) 3-64 3.3.18 rcl key (data readout) this section describes the recall menu displayed when the rcl key is pressed. the analyzer changes to the split-screen mode, and a file list will be displayed on the lower screen. recall register displays the recall reg (1) menu. reg#1, #2, #3, #4, #5 reads data from register.1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and sets it. recall on power reads data immediately after turning the power on, and sets it. more 1/2 displays the recall reg (2) menu. reg#6, #7, #8, #9, #10 reads data from register 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 and sets it. recall on power reads data immediately after turning the power on, and sets it. more 2/2 returns to the recall reg (1) menu. recall file displays the recall file menu. recall reads data selected by list reg/file. list reg/file displays a list of registers or files. list reg/file displays a list of registers or files. device ram/fd sets the destination for saved files. ram: sets the destination to internal memory. fd: sets the destination to floppy disk. note displayed when equipped with the floppy disk drive. device ram/a/b sets the destination for saved files. ram: sets the destination to internal memory. a: sets the destination to memory card a. b: sets the destination to memory card b. note displayed when equipped with the memory card drive (option).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.19 repeat key (continuous sweep) 3-65 3.3.19 repeat key (continuous sweep) pressing this key activates the continuous sweep mode. if this key is pressed during a sweep, the sweep is paused and the sweep lamp is turned off. pressing the repeat key again causes the analyzer to wait for another sweep to start and then the sweep lamp turns back on. the sweep will start after a signal is received (which in turn depends on the current trigger mode setting). (there is no softmenu associated with this panel key.)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.20 save key (saving data) 3-66 3.3.20 save key (saving data) this section describes the save menu displayed when the shift and rcl(save) keys is pressed. the analyzer changes to split-screen mode, and the file list is displayed on the lower screen. save register displays the save reg (1) menu. reg#1, #2, #3, #4, #5 saves the current setting values set to register 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. reg#ip saves the current set values as the initial values. more 1/2 displays the save reg (2) menu. reg#6, #7, #8, #9, #10 saves the current setting values set to register 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. reg#ip saves the current set values as the initial values. more 2/2 returns to the save reg (1) menu. clear register displays the clear reg (1). reg#1, #2, #3, #4, #5 clears the data saved in register 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. default ip sets the initial values to the factory defaults. more 1/2 displays the clear reg(2) menu. reg#6, #7, #8, #9, #10 clears the data saved in register 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. default ip sets the initial values to the factory defaults. more 2/2 returns to the clear reg (1) menu. save file displays the save file menu. save saves the current data to the register or file currently selected in list reg/file. enter title allows you to enter a name for the file currently saved. write protect write-protects the register or file currently selected in list reg/ file. save item setup displays the setup save item setup dialog box.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.20 save key (saving data) 3-67 data format sets the data format for saving data. setup used to set whether or not the measurement conditions are saved. off: used when the measurement conditions are not saved. on: used when the measurement conditions are saved. trace used to control how the trace is saved. off: does not save the trace data. a: saves the trace data to memory a. b: saves the trace data to memory b. a/b: saves the trace data to memory a and memory b. normalize used to control how normalization data is saved. off: does not save the normalization data. a: saves the normalization data for trace a. b: saves the normalization data for trace b. a/b: saves the normalization data for trace a and trace b. limit line used to control how limit line conditions are saved. off: does not save the current values. 1: saves the current values for limit line 1. 2: saves the current values for limit line 2. 1/2: saves the current values for both limit line 1 and 2.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.20 save key (saving data) 3-68 loss:freq toggles the saving function of the frequency vs frequency loss ta- ble on or off. off: does not save the frequency vs frequency loss table. on: saves the frequency vs frequency loss table. corr factor sets whether or not the correction data for a level is saved. off: does not save the correction data. on: saves the correction data. spurious toggles the spurious table data saving function on or off. off: does not save the table data. on: saves the table data. list reg/file toggles the display function of the register and file on or off. rename changes the name of a file selected in list reg/file. clear file displays the clear file menu. clear deletes the currently selected file in list reg/file section. release protect cancels the write protection for the files selected in list reg/file. list reg/file toggles the display function of the register and file on or off. list reg/file displays a list of registers or files. device ram/fd sets the destination for saved files. ram: sets the destination to internal memory. fd: sets the destination to floppy disk. note displayed when equipped with the floppy disk drive. device ram/a/b sets the destination for saved files. ram: sets the destination to internal memory. a: sets the destination to memory card a. b: sets the destination to memory card b.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.20 save key (saving data) 3-69 note displayed when equipped with the memory card drive (option). setup media displays the setup media menu. format floppy *1 used to format floppy disks. note displayed when equipped with the floppy disk drive. copy all saves all the contents of memory card a in memory card b. note displayed when equipped with the memory card drive (option). format card a format memory card a. note displayed when equipped with the memory card drive (option). format card b format memory card b. note displayed when equipped with the memory card drive (option).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.21 single key (single sweep) 3-70 3.3.21 single key (single sweep) pressing the single key causes the analyzer to sweep once. if this key is pressed during a sweep, the sweep is paused and the sweep lamp is turned off. pressing the single key again causes the analyzer to wait until a sweep starts again (which in turn depends on when it receives a signal). this is controlled by the trigger mode setting. (there is no softmenu associated with this panel key.)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.22 span key (frequency span) 3-71 3.3.22 span key (frequency span) this section describes the span menu displayed when the span key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set a frequency span. in addition, the center frequency and frequency span are displayed in the annotation area below the bottom scale line. full span sets the frequency span to the full span of the analyzer. zero span set a zero span at the center frequency. last span resets the frequency span to the previous value.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.23 srch key (peak search) 3-72 3.3.23 srch key (peak search) this section describes the peak menu displayed when the srch key is pressed. next peak moves the present marker to the next highest peak within the search range. next peak left moves the present marker to the next higher frequency peak on the left side of the current marker. next peak right moves the present marker to the next higher frequency peak on the right side of the current marker. min peak moves the present marker to the minimum peak within the search range. next min peak moves the present marker to the next highest peak within the search range. search condition displays the search condition dialog box. x range sets the search range for the x-axis all: the entire x-axis is used. inner lmt: sets the search range to within the search limits. outer lmt: sets the search range outside the search limits. limit posi sets the position of the search limits. limit width sets the width of the search limits.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.23 srch key (peak search) 3-73 couple to f(t) toggles the fixed search range function on or off. on: the search range is fixed on the screen. the position of the search range does not change even if the center frequency and the frequency span are changed. off: only search range is fixed on the screen, and the search range is moved when changing the center frequency and the frequency span settings. the position of the search range varies according to changes in the center frequency and frequency span. y range sets the search range for the y-axis. all: the entire y-axis is used. display line: sets the display line to within the search range. limit line: sets limit line 1 and 2 to within the search range. display line bases the search range on the display line. above the line: sets the search range to the area above the display line. below the line: sets the search range to the area below the display line. limit line 1 bases the search range on limit line 1. above the line: sets the search range to the area above limit line 1. below the line: sets the search range to the area below limit line 1. limit line 2 bases the search range on limit line 2. above the line: sets the search range to the area above limit line 2. below the line: sets the search range to the area below limit line 2. peak delta y allows you to set a level difference used for peak searches.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.23 srch key (peak search) 3-74 cont peak on/off toggles the continuous peak search function on or off. on: peak searches are carried out continuously for a trace. off: turns off the continuous peak search function.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.24 swp key (sweep time) 3-75 3.3.24 swp key (sweep time) this section describes the menu displayed when the swp key is pressed. pressing this key allows you to set sweep conditions. sweep time auto/mnl toggles the sweep mode between auto and mnl. auto: automatically sets an optimum sweep time according to the span setting. mnl: allows you to set the sweep time manually. trigger setup displays the trigger setup dialog box. trigger level sets the trigger threshold level. this applies only to the video and external triggers. source allows you to enter the trigger condition. free run: performs sweeps automatically. line: sweeps are synchronized with the ac power supply. video: sweeps are synchronized with the video signal. ext: sweeps are synchronized with the external triggers sig- nal. if: sweeps are synchronized with the if signal. slope switches between positive (+) and negative (-) polarities. this applies to the video trigger, external trigger or if trigger only. +: triggers the sweep circuitry to start sweeping with a leading edge. -: triggers the sweep circuitry to start sweeping with a trailing edge. trigger delay sets the delay time from the trigger point. this is available only when the zero span is set.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.24 swp key (sweep time) 3-76 gated sweep displays the gated sweep menu and changes to the split-screen mode. on the upper screen, trace a with a gated sweep is displayed; on the lower screen, trace b is displayed to show the waveform, po- sition and width of the gate signal. trigger setup displays the trigger setup menu. use this menu to set the conditions for the gate signal trigger. trigger level sets the trigger threshold level. this applies only to the video and if triggers. source sets the sweep mode. free run: performs sweeps automatically. line: sweeps are synchronized with the ac power supply. video: sweeps are synchronized with the video signal. ext: sweeps are synchronized with the external triggers signal. if: sweeps are synchronized with the if signal. slope switches between positive (+) and negative (-) polarities. this applies to the video trigger, external trigger or if trigger only. +: triggers the sweep circuitry to start sweeping with a leading edge. -: triggers the sweep circuitry to start sweeping with a trailing edge. gate src trigger specifies the gate signal source. the ext or if signal is used as the gate signal in trigger setup. allows you to set gate src trigger only when the ext or if trig- ger is selected in trigger setup. gate src ext gate specifies the gate signal source. the signal, which is input to the gate in connector on the rear panel, is used as the gate signal. gate position sets the position of the gate signal. gate width sets the width of the gate signal.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.24 swp key (sweep time) 3-77 gated sweep on/off toggles the gated sweep mode on or off. on: sweeps according to the gate conditions such as the gate position and gate width. off: turns the gated sweep mode off. gated sweep on/off toggles the gated sweep mode on or off. on: performs sweeps according to the set gate conditions. off: turns the gated sweep mode off. window sweep on/off toggles the window sweep function on or off. on: performs sweeps within the range specified by the mea- suring window. off: performs sweeps within the entire span range.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.25 util key (utility) 3-78 3.3.25 util key (utility) this section describes the utility menu displayed when the util key is pressed. obw displays the obw menu. enters into split-screen mode. a trace is displayed on the upper screen and a list of harmonics measurement data is displayed on the lower screen. obw% sets the percentage of occupied power compared to the total pow- er when measuring the occupied bandwidth. parameter setup displays the obw setup menu. default resets the frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video band- width, sweep time, detector and obw% to the factory defaults. manual manually sets the frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time, detector and obw% to arbitrary values. define default resets the values currently being used to the factory defaults. average times on/off toggles the average function on or off. on: sets the averaging times and calculates the average of the occupied bandwidth off: turns the average function off. obw off terminates the occupied bandwidth measurement, and returns to the utility menu. harmonics displays the harmonics menu. enters into split-screen mode. a trace is displayed on the upper screen and a list of harmonics measurement data is displayed on the lower screen. fund frequency on/off toggles the fundamental frequency setup function on or off. on: allows you to set the fundamental frequency and dis- plays the values as entered. off: sets the center frequency currently being used to the fundamental frequency. harmonics number allows you to set the order of the harmonics to be measured. harmonics off turns the harmonics measurement function off. the screen is dis- played in the full-screen mode and returns to the utility menu.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.25 util key (utility) 3-79 spurious displays the spurious menu. enters into the split-screen mode. a trace is displayed on the up- per screen and a list of spurious table information is displayed on the lower screen. table no.1/2/3 allows you to select which of the three tables is used. load table reads data from the table selected. edit table displays the edit table menu. a list of data specified by a table number is displayed in full- screen mode. table no.1/2/3 allows you to select which of the three tables is used. save table saves data in the table selected. load table reads data from the table selected. insert inserts a row at the cursor. delete deletes the row where the cursor is currently on. table init removes all data from the table. show result displays the show result menu. the measurement result is displayed in full screen mode. prev result displays the previous result screen (page). next result displays the next screen of the current table. spurious off displays full screen mode and turns the spurious measurement function off. eye opening displays the eye opening menu. eye opening (or eye pattern) measurement sweeps the frequencies more than one time, saves them and calculates their eye opening ratios. this measurement can be performed when the vertical and hori- zontal axes are set to a linear scale and zero span, respectively. when the vertical and horizontal axes are set, the screen is split into two, the upper screen displays the artificial analog waveform and the lower screen displays the opening measurements. the x and y cursors are also displayed. the opening ratio is cal- culated from the waveform data located by the x and y cursors (which are used to retrieve amplitudes and time periods, respec- tively).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.25 util key (utility) 3-80 note: 1. display the opening ratio on the screen before per forming the eye opening measurement. 2. when the measurement window is displayed, the wave- form used for the opening ratio measure ment is enlarged vertically (in the amplitude direction) in the measurement window. sampling times specifies the number of times the waveform should be acquired to calculate eye opening ratios. xy cursor display the xy cursor menu. xy cursor on/off toggles the x and y cursor function on or off. while the eye opening measurement is being performed, this cannot be toggled off. on: displays the xy cursor. off: turns the xy cursor off. x cursor position moves the x cursor. the opening ratio is calculated from the am- plitudes located by the x cursor. if the measurement window is displayed, the selected waveform is zoomed in and displayed in the measurement window. y cursor position moves the y cursor. the opening ratio is calculated from the time periods located by the y cursor. y cursor auto set calculates the amplitude average from the waveform data ac- quired according to the sample time setting, and positions the y cursor at the amplitude average point. time ratio corr on/off toggles the internal jitter compensation function in this instru- ment on or off. on: compensates for the internal jitter of this instrument and calculates the opening ratio along the time domain. off: does not compensate for internal jitter. artificial analog on/off toggle the artificial analog display function on or off. on: up to 32 waveforms can be displayed in gray scale. this allows you to see all the eye openings at one time. off: the artificial analog display function is turned off.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.25 util key (utility) 3-81 eye opening off turns off the eye opening measurement function and artificial an- alog display function simultneously. the split screens are also turned off and the utility menu is displayed. phase noise displays the phase noise menu. a menu used to measure phase noises and phase jitters is dis- played. c/n meas displays the c/n meas menu. a variety of settings for the phase noise measurement can be performed. for this measurement, a phase noise is calculated using an offset frequency which is devi- ated from the carrier frequency or the current center frequency. a maximum offset frequency of 10 points can be measured. edit table displays the edit table menu, allowing you to set the desired off- set frequency. insert enters the same data in the current cursor position. delete deletes the data at the current cursor position. table init deletes all data from the table. signal track on/off toggles the signal track mode on or off. on: the signal track mode is turned on, and measurements are taken by keeping track of the carrier frequency, which results in changes to the center frequency. off: turns the signal track mode off. average times on/off toggles the trace averaging function on or off. on: sets the number of averaging times and traces and av- erages the phase noise waveform for each offset fre- quency. off: turns the trace average function off. c/n meas off the phase noise measurement function is turned off, and the screen returns to the phase noise menu. phase jitter displays the phase jitter menu. a variety of parameters used to measure phase jitter can be set. a jitter is calculated by specifying a phase noise integration range based on an offset frequency de- viated from the carrier frequency that is the same as the current center frequency.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.25 util key (utility) 3-82 start offset sets the lower limit of the phase noise integration range. stop offset sets the upper limit of the phase noise integration range. signal track on/off toggles the signal track mode on or off. on: the signal track mode is turned on, and measurements are taken by keeping track of the carrier frequency, which results in changes to the center frequency. off: turns the signal track mode off. average times on/off toggles the trace averaging function on or off. on: sets the number of averaging times, traces and then av- erages the phase noise waveform for each offset fre- quency. off: turns the trace average function off. phase jitter off the phase noise measurement function is turned off, and the phase noise menu is displayed. im meas displays the im meas menu in two-screen mode. traces are dis- played on the upper screen, and odd-harmonic measurement data is displayed on the lower screen. order sets the degrees used. the degrees available are 3, 5, 7 and 9. limit setup displays the limit setup dialog box. 3rd order sets the limit value for a third-order harmonic signal. 5th order sets the limit value for a fifth-order harmonic signal. 7th order sets the limit value for a seventh-order harmonic signal. 9th order sets the limit value for a ninth-order harmonic signal.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.25 util key (utility) 3-83 pass/fail judgement on/off toggles the pass/fail judgement function on or off. this function compares a measured value with the value set in the limit setup dialog box. on: performs a pass/fail judgement. the result is fail if the measurement value is greater than the limit value. off: does not perform a pass/fail judgement. average times on/off toggles the trace averaging function on or off. on: sets the number of averaging times. off: turns the trace average function off. hi sens on/off toggles the hi sense measurement mode on or off. this function is used to increase measurement sensibility. on: decreases the reference level by 20 db before a har- monic signal is measured. off: a harmonic signal is measured within a single screen. im meas off turns off the odd harmonic measurement function, and returns to the utility menu display. active trace a/b switches the traces used in the occupied bandwidth power, har- monics or spurious measurements between trace a and trace b. a: uses trace a. b: uses trace b.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.26 window key 3-84 3.3.26 window key this section describes the window menu displayed when the window key is pressed. measuring window displays the meas window menu. window on/off toggles the measuring window display function on or off. on: displays the measuring window on the screen. off: removes the measuring window. window position allows you to set the position of the measuring window. window width allows you to set the width of the measuring window. window sweep on/off toggles the window sweep function on or off. on: performs sweeps within the range specified by the mea- suring window. off: performs sweeps over the entire span range. zoom displays the zoom menu and enters into split-screen mode. on the upper screen, three cursors are displayed: one vertical line used to indicate the center position of the zoom and two vertical lines used to indicate the frequency span. on the lower screen, the magnified trace is displayed. the unit of the x-axis is either frequency or time for the upper and lower screens. zoom position allows you to set the center position of the zoom. zoom width allows you to set the zoom width (the span frequency on the low- er screen). zoom on window the magnified screen on the lower screen is displayed in full screen mode. zoom off returns full-screen mode to split-screen mode. peak zooming displays the peak zoom menu. max peak the cursor is displayed at the maximum peak on the trace on the upper screen, and is magnified in the center of the lower screen. next peak the cursor is displayed at the second highest peak with respect to the present peak on the upper screen, and is magnified in the cen- ter of the lower screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.3.26 window key 3-85 3rd order peak the cursor is displayed at the third order intermodulation distor- tion (from the highest peak), and is magnified in the center of the lower screen. peak delta y allows you to set the level difference used for a peak search and displays the value you entered. screen reset displays the upper screen in full-screen mode, and turns the zoom function off. f/t displays the zoom menu, and switches to split-screen display mode. a zoom center position cursor and a zero span cursor are dis- played on the upper screen. the unit of the upper screen x-axis is in frequency; the unit of the lower screen x-axis (which represents the zero span) is in time. zoom position allows you to set the center position of the zoom. zoom width (cannot be used in this mode.) zoom on window the magnified screen on the lower screen is displayed in full- screen mode. zoom off returns full-screen mode to the split-screen display mode. peak zooming displays the peak zoom menu. max peak the cursor is displayed at the maximum peak on the trace on the upper screen, and is magnified in the center of the lower screen. next peak the cursor is displayed at the second highest peak with respect to the present peak on the upper screen, and is magnified in the cen- ter of the lower screen. 3rd order peak the cursor is displayed at the third order intermodulation distor- tion (from the highest peak), and is magnified in the center of the lower screen. peak delta y allows you to set the level difference used for a peak search and displays the value you entered. screen reset displays the upper screen in full-screen mode, and returns to the window menu. t/t switches to split-screen mode to display the units of the upper and lower x-axes in time (zero span at the center frequency). you can set different frequencies using split-screens. screen reset displays the upper screen in full screen mode.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.4 list of settings 3-86 3.4 list of settings this section shows various settings that are used with the analyzer. 3.4.1 set resolution table 3-1 center frequency set resolution vs. frequency span 3.4.2 set values for rbw, vbw and sweep-time when set to auto, the values for rbw, vbw and sweep-time are displayed in the table below. the set- tings such as "rbw: span" and "rbw: vbw" are set to off. table 3-2 values for rbw, vbw and sweep-time (using auto) sweep time (sec) = span (rbw m k) where m is either rbw or vbw, whichever is smaller. k is determined as follows: k = 0.2 if rbw = 3 khz and span 220 khz k = 0.39 if rbw = 1 khz and span 60 khz k = 0.5 if none of the above is encountered. note: the above conditions do not apply to the digital filter mode. frequency span center frequency set resolution 10 ghz span 10 mhz 1 ghz span < 10 ghz 1 mhz 100 mhz span < 1 ghz 100 khz 10 mhz span < 100 mhz 10 khz 1 mhz span < 10 mhz 1 khz 100 khz span < 1 mhz 100 hz 10 khz span < 100 khz 10 hz span 10 khz 1 hz frequency span rbw vbw 200 mhz span 3 mhz 3 mhz 60 mhz span < 200 mhz 1 mhz 1 mhz 20 mhz span < 60 mhz 300 khz 300 khz 6 mhz span < 20 mhz 100 khz 100 khz 2 mhz span < 6 mhz 30 khz 30 khz 300 khz span < 2 mhz 10 khz 10 khz 100 khz span < 300 khz 3 khz 3 khz 30 khz span < 100 khz 1 khz 1 khz 10 khz span < 30 khz 300 hz 300 hz 5 khz span < 10 khz 100 hz 100 hz 1 khz span < 5 khz 30 hz 30 hz span < 1 khz 10 hz 10 hz
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.4.3 factory defaults 3-87 3.4.3 factory defaults the table below lists the factory defaults (for both analyzer parameters and individual settings). table 3-3 factory defaults 3.4.4 defaults configuration values these are the default settings used when the defaults config soft key is pressed. table 3-4 default settings (1 of 3) parameter r3267 r3273 r3264 center frequency 4 ghz 13.25 ghz 1.75 ghz frequency span 8 ghz 26.5 ghz 3.5 ghz reference level 0 dbm 0 dbm 0 dbm sweep time auto 120 ms auto 400 ms auto 60 ms resolution bandwidth (rbw) auto 3 mhz auto 3 mhz auto 3 mhz video bandwidth (vbw) auto 3 mhz auto 3 mhz auto 3 mhz input attenuator auto 10 db auto 10 db auto 10 db trigger mode free run free run free run trace mode a: write b: blank a: write b: blank a: write b: blank vertical gradation 10 db/div 10 db/div 10 db/div panel menu/dialog box default a trace detector det select auto normalize a off artifical analog off art analog trc disp cont xy cursor off delta y disp mode curs at t at t a u to min att on b trace detector det select auto normalize b off config trace point 1001 display on couple rbw auto vbw auto sweep time auto rbw:span off vbw:rbw off pll band width auto
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.4.4 defaults configuration values 3-88 table 3-4 default settings (2 of 3) panel menu/dialog box default format display line off xy cursor off limit line setup limit line 1 off pass range below the line limit line 2 off pass range above the line x data mode abs reference left y data mode abs reference top label entry un-title freq cf step size auto freq offset off level ref offset off correction factor corr factor off meas counter off sound sound am squelch off x db down disp mode rel meas x db down continuos down off ref. marker off mkr delta mkr off fixed mkr off 1/delta mkr off marker list off signal track off power acp nyquist filter off screen full average off graph off parameter setup manual save select item data format binary setup on trace off limit line off normalize corr off loss:freq off corr factor off suprious off
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.4.4 defaults configuration values 3-89 table 3-4 default settings (3 of 3) panel menu/dialog box default srch search condition x range all couple to f(t) off y range all display line above the line limit line 1 above the line limit line 2 above the line peak delta y 1.0 div continous peak off sweep trigger setup trigger free run slope + trigger level 50% delay time 0.00 s gated sweep off window sweep off util obw obw setup manual harmonics fund frequency off spurious tabel no 1 window window off window sweep off
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 3.4.5 parameters range 3-90 3.4.5 parameters range table 3-5 parameters range panel menu/dialog box min max a average a 2 999 max hold a 2 999 min hold a 2 999 power average a 2 999 att min att 0db r3264/67: 75db r3273: 70db b average a 2 999 max hold a 2 999 min hold b 2 999 power average b 2 999 config gpib&others gpib address 0 30 couple rbw:span 0.001:1 0.1:1 vbw:rbw 0.003:1 3:1 format display line limit line setup limit line 1, 2 x-axis -1ghz 400ghz limit line 1, 2 y-axis -100dbm +100dbm freq freq offset (on) -100ghz +100ghz level ref offset (on) -100db +100db meas sound volume 1 8 marker pause time 100ms 1000s mkr multi marker marker no. 1 10 power channel power average times 1 999 acp average times 2 999 symbol rate 1hz 1ghz role factor 0.01 0.99 srch search condition peak delta y 0.1div 10div sweep trigger setup delay time 0.00 s1s util obw average times 2 999 harmonics harmonics number 2 10 window zoom peak delta y 0.1div 10div f/t peak delta y 0.1div 10div
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.1 input saturation 4-1 4 principle of measurement this chapter describes the input saturation, internal operation and nyquist filter in acp measurements, and the gated sweep of the analyzer. 4.1 input saturation measurement error may increase depending on the setting of the attenuator when a relatively large input sig- nal is input. this problem can be caused by an input saturation. this section describes input saturation. cause of input saturation a block diagram of the analyzer input section is shown in figure 4-1. the input signal at the input con- nector passes through the attenuator and enters the mixer. figure 4-1 input section block diagram the output level of the mixer is usually proportional to the input level. the mixer output becomes satu- rated as the input reaches a certain level, and the error increases (see figure 4-2). figure 4-2 relationship between the input and output of the mixer measures against input saturation mixer input level must be lowered by adjusting the attenuator to an optimum level once input saturation appears. caution if the output from the attenuator is too low, you cannot analyze the weak signal. however, internal circuitry of the mixer, may be damaged if the output from the attenuator is too large. attenuator mixer 1st local oscillator ifout rfin loin input level rfin output level ifout
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.1 input saturation 4-2 to measure a continuous wave (cw), the attenuator is automatically set to an optimum value only when the input peak value is set to a level below the reference level. when measuring a signal with a wide modulation bandwidth (whose resolution bandwidth (rbw) is nar- rower than the modulation bandwidth), the displayed input level becomes a value smaller than the mini- mum level required for the measurement. if this happens, the input level must be set to an optimum value manually. how to check an optimum value 1. to calculate a rough attenuator set value, use the formula shown below. input attenuator set value (db) input level (dbm) + 10 db 2. there is no input saturation if the peak value stays unchanged on the screen if the attenuation value is decreased by 1. you can take measurements under these conditions. otherwise, increase the at- tenuation value until no changes in the peak value are observed on the screen.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.2 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) 4-3 4.2 measuring adjacent channel leakage power (acp) this section describes the difference between the operation processes (used for each measurement mode) and correction operation using the root nyquist filter. 4.2.1 differences between full screen and separate screen operation processes there are two modes of measuring the adjacent channel leakage power for the analyzer: the full screen and separate screen modes. the features and internal processes of both modes are as follows. full screen mode in this mode, the upper adjacent channel leakage power is calculated as a ratio of the upper adjacent channel power p u (calculated by integrating the trace data over the specified bandwidth) to the total power p c (calculated by integrating the trace data over the entire frequency range on the measurement screen). in the same manner, the lower adjacent channel leakage power is calculated using the lower adjacent channel power p l instead of p u . figure 4-3 full screen mode the total power p c is calculated by using the formula shown below by adding up the power level at each point over the entire frequency axis on the screen. the lower adjacent channel power (p l ) and the upper adjacent channel power (p u ) are calculated by using the formula shown below. the upper adjacent channel leakage power (q u ) and the lower adjacent channel leakage power (ql) cs: channel space bs: specified bandwidth
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.2.1 differences between full screen and separate screen operation processes 4-4 are calculated by using the formula shown below. separate screen mode in this mode, the upper adjacent channel leakage power is calculated as a ratio of the upper adjacent channel power p u (calculated by integrating the trace data over the specified bandwidth) to the total power p c (calculated by integrating the trace data within the specified bandwidth of the reference chan- nel). in the same manner, the lower adjacent channel leakage power is calculated using the lower ad- jacent channel power p l instead of p u . when measuring each power, the frequency span is set to the specified bandwidth and the center fre- quency is set to the channel frequency of each channel. in addition, the reference level is decreased by 20 db to improve the dynamic range when measuring the adjacent channels. (the reference channel is displayed on the upper screen, and each of the adjacent channels is displayed on either side on the low- er screen.) this mode requires more time to take measurements, though measurement accuracy is higher than full screen mode. figure 4-4 separate screen mode the reference channel power (p c ), the upper and lower adjacent leakage power (p u and p l , respective- ly), the upper and lower adjacent channel leakage power (q u and q l , respectively) is calculated by using the formula shown below. cs: channel space bs: specified bandwidth
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.2.1 differences between full screen and separate screen operation processes 4-5 l u
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.2.2 root nyquist filter 4-6 4.2.2 root nyquist filter the analyzer has the capability of correcting for the root nyquist filter when measuring the adjacent chan- nel leakage power. when calculating the power of each channel by integrating the trace data, the corresponding root nyquist filter?s coefficient at the frequency (h (n) ) is multiplied. root nyquist filter?s coefficient (h(n)) is calculated by substituting symbol rate (t) and rolloff factor (a) into the formula shown below. the characteristics of the root nyquist filter is shown in figure 4-5. figure 4-5characteristics of the root nyquist filter p?? u = b n = a 10 ( 10 p(n) ) h (n) a = f uch - 2t (1 + ) , b = f uch + 2t (1 + ) p?? l = b n = a 10 ( 10 p(n) ) h (n) a = f lch - 2t (1 + ) , b = f lch + 2t (1 + )
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.2.3 noise correction function 4-7 4.2.3 noise correction function the measurement limit value of the adjacent channel leakage power (acp) is determined based on the spectrum analyzer internal noise level and the third order distortion efficiency. the power equivalent to the internal noise power of the spectrum analyzer can be corrected by using the noise correction function. accordingly, the acp measurement dynamic range is expandable. the upper and lower adjacent channel leakage power (q u and q l , respectively) in the separate screen mode can be expressed by the following formulas: p u , p l : adjacent channel power p c : reference channel power if the adjacent channel power is as similar to the spectrum analyzer internal noise power, the adjacent channel power measurement value can be affected by the internal noise power. the adjacent channel leak- age power after the noise correction can be obtained by using the noise correction function to subtract noise power from the adjacent channel power measurement value as shown below. the upper and lower adjacent channel power (p u ? and p l ?, respectively), after the noise correction, can be obtained by using the following formulas: p u , p l : the upper and lower adjacent channel power before the noise correction. p nu , p nl : the noise power in the upper and lower internal noise power measurement band. nbs: the internal noise power measurement bandwidth bs: the reference bandwidth the upper and lower adjacent channel leakage power (q u ? and q l ?, respectively) after the noise correction can be obtained by the following formulas:
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.3 operation of the gated sweep 4-8 4.3 operation of the gated sweep this section describes the gated sweep operation of the analyzer. the spectrum of a burst signal comprises rf signal spectrums and spectrums caused by on/off operations. the gated sweep function is especially effective when measuring rf signal spectrum that only depends on applications. the gated sweep function measures rf signal spectrum using the signals in steady state (either the burst on or off period) excluding the signals in transient state (such as leading and trailing edges of the burst signals to be measured). in addition, during transient periods, the local oscillator stops sweeping to indicate the spectrum as a contin- uous spectrum. figure 4-6 internal block diagram two types of gate signals are available in the analyzer. * external gate signal: input signal connected to the ext gate connector * internal gate signal: signal that is generated from the following settings trigger source if trigger envelope of the if signal (bandwidth: approx. 10 mhz) external trigger input signal applied to the ext trig connector trigger slope leading edge trailing edge gate position gate width the gate position and the gate width of the gate signal are generated in reference to the leading and trailing attenuator mixer rbw filter if log amp vbw filter display section detector local oscillator sweep voltage d/a converter counter gate signal clock signal
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.3 operation of the gated sweep 4-9 edges of the trigger signal. figure 4-7 generating the internal gate signal rf signal ernal gate signal sweeps within this range and displays the signal. this signal is internally generated based on the gate position and gate width.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.4 eye opening calculation 4-10 4.4 eye opening calculation the instrument calculates eye opening ratios as described below. when the maximum and minimum amplitudes retrieved by the x cursor in the measurement window are rep- resented as a and b, respectively, the following expression is used: eye opening ratio (for amplitude) = 2b / (a + b) 100 (%) when the maximum and minimum time intervals retrieved by the y cursor are represented as a? and b?, re- spectively, the following expression is used: eye opening ratio (for time) = 2b? / (a? + b?) 100 % 4.4.1 calculation using no measurement window when performing the eye opening measurement without displaying the measurement window, the maxi- mum and minimum amplitudes a and b are calculated from the waveform data located by the x cursor as shown in figure 4-8 and the opening ratio is calculated from a and b. the maximum and minimum time periods a? and b? are calculated from the waveform data located by the y cursor on the screen. figure 4-8 eye opening ratio calculation (using no measurement window) x cursor a and b are calculated from the waveform data located by the x cursor. y cursor a? and b? are calculated from the waveform data located by the y cursor.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.4.2 calculation using the measurement window 4-11 4.4.2 calculation using the measurement window when displaying the measurement window and performing the eye opening measurement, the maximum and minimum amplitudes a and b are calculated from the waveform data included in the measurement window shown in figure 4-9. the maximum and minimum time periods a? and b? are calculated from the waveform data located by the y cursor on the screen. figure 4-9 eye opening calculation (using the measurement window) y cursor x cursor a? and b? are calculated from the waveform data located by the y cursor. a and b are retrieved from the measurement window.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 4.5 phase jitter measurement 4-12 4.5 phase jitter measurement this section describes the phase jitter measurement function that is built in this instrument. the phase jitter measurement function used in this instrument measures rms (root mean squared) phase jit- ters using the equation shown below. where rms phase jitter is ? rms [rad], the carrier power is pc [w] and the sideband (ssb) power is pn [w]. in this instrument, carrier power pc is measured first, power spectrum pn is measured by summation between the start offset and stop offset frequencies and then ? rms is calculated from the expression (1). if the range between the start offset and stop offset frequencies must be divided due to a data acquisition problem, pn is the sum of the powers within these ranges. figure 4-10 rms phase jitter measurement method 4.5.1 additional functions the following two functions are available for improving measurement accuracy. if measurements are taken with these functions enabled, however, the amount of time required to perform measurements increases, but the variations between the measurement results are smaller compared to measurements taken when these functions are disabled. signal track function: the center frequency can always be tracked and then set when the carrier frequency drifts. average function: performs averaging a specified number of times after dbm data has been converted into watts when sideband power is measured. to obtain stable measurement results, increase the number of times averaging is performed. c n rms p p 2 = ? (1) stop offset frequency start offset fre quency
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.1 gpib command index 5-1 gpib command pages gpib command pages 5 remote programming 5.1 gpib command index this gpib command index can be used as the index for chapter 5. *cls ........................................................ 5-44 *ese ........................................................ 5-44 *esr ........................................................ 5-44 *idn ........................................................ 5-44 *rst ........................................................ 5-44 *sre ........................................................ 5-44 *stb ........................................................ 5-44 *tst ........................................................ 5-44 . ................................................................ 5-43 0 to 9 ........................................................ 5-43 aa............................................................ 5-23 aavg off.............................................. 5-21 aavg on ............................................... 5-21 ab ............................................................ 5-21 achb ...................................................... 5-22 acp.......................................................... 5-35 acp off ................................................. 5-35 acp on ................................................... 5-35 acpavg ................................................. 5-35 acpbsw off......................................... 5-35 acpbsw on .......................................... 5-35 acpncof auto ................................... 5-35 acpncof mnl ..................................... 5-35 acpncor off ...................................... 5-35 acpncor on........................................ 5-35 acpncsbs ............................................. 5-35 acpref .................................................. 5-35 acpscr carr ...................................... 5-35 acpscr full ....................................... 5-35 acpscr sepa ....................................... 5-35 acpst def ............................................ 5-35 acpst mnl ........................................... 5-35 acpst usr ............................................ 5-35 actrc tra ........................................... 5-21 actrc trb ........................................... 5-21 ad............................................................ 5-44 adg off ................................................ 5-35 adg on .................................................. 5-35 ag............................................................ 5-22 agl ......................................................... 5-29 agl off................................................. 5-29 agl on .................................................. 5-29 agr ......................................................... 5-21 ags ......................................................... 5-21 al ............................................................ 5-26 allcopy a: b: ..................................... 5-36 am ........................................................... 5-21 amax off............................................. 5-21 amax on .............................................. 5-21 amin off .............................................. 5-21 amin on ................................................ 5-21 ammod.................................................. 5-31 ammod off ......................................... 5-31 ammod on........................................... 5-31 anlg off .............................................. 5-23 anlg on................................................ 5-23 anlgdlt cusr ................................... 5-23 anlgdlt data .................................. 5-23 anlgdsp cont ................................... 5-23 anlgdsp paus.................................... 5-23 anlgtm ................................................ 5-23 annot off ........................................... 5-25 annot on............................................. 5-25 anorm off .......................................... 5-21 anorm on............................................ 5-21 apavg off ........................................... 5-21 apavg on............................................. 5-21 ar............................................................ 5-21 as ............................................................ 5-26, 5-38 at ............................................................ 5-23 atmin .................................................... 5-23 atmin off ............................................ 5-23 atmin on.............................................. 5-23 aunits dbemf .................................... 5-30 aunits dbm......................................... 5-30 aunits dbmv...................................... 5-30
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.1 gpib command index 5-2 aunits dbpw ...................................... 5-30 aunits dbuv ...................................... 5-30 aunits v ............................................... 5-30 aunits w .............................................. 5-30 av............................................................ 5-21 avgobw ............................................... 5-39 aw........................................................... 5-21 ba............................................................ 5-26 bavg off.............................................. 5-22 bavg on ............................................... 5-22 bb ............................................................ 5-22 bg............................................................ 5-22 bgr ......................................................... 5-22 bgs.......................................................... 5-22 bm ........................................................... 5-22 bmax off ............................................. 5-22 bmax on............................................... 5-22 bmin off............................................... 5-22 bmin on ................................................ 5-22 bnd ......................................................... 5-29 bndlc off............................................ 5-29 bndlc on ............................................. 5-29 bnorm off .......................................... 5-22 bnorm on ............................................ 5-22 bpavg off............................................ 5-22 bpavg on ............................................. 5-22 br ............................................................ 5-22 bv............................................................ 5-22 bw ........................................................... 5-22 ca............................................................ 5-29 carrbs.................................................. 5-35 cc off.................................................... 5-24 cc on ..................................................... 5-24 cdb off ................................................. 5-31 cdb on .................................................. 5-31 cf............................................................. 5-29 clall..................................................... 5-24 clatt..................................................... 5-24 clcref .................................................. 5-24 cldref .................................................. 5-24 clfref................................................... 5-24 cllog .................................................... 5-24 clmag ................................................... 5-24 cln ......................................................... 5-24 clpbw.................................................... 5-24 clrbw ................................................... 5-24 clsref................................................... 5-24 clstep ................................................... 5-24 cltotal ............................................... 5-24 cn0.......................................................... 5-31 cn1.......................................................... 5-31 cn2.......................................................... 5-31 cn3.......................................................... 5-31 cnavg ................................................... 5-40 cnis ........................................................ 5-40 cnis off ................................................ 5-40 cnis on.................................................. 5-40 cnofsdel............................................. 5-40 cnofsin ................................................ 5-40 cnres..................................................... 5-31 cnsig off ............................................. 5-40 cnsig on............................................... 5-40 conts .................................................... 5-38 cors ....................................................... 5-26 cors off............................................... 5-26 cors on ................................................ 5-26 count off ........................................... 5-31 count on............................................. 5-31 covr ...................................................... 5-26 covr off .............................................. 5-26 covr on................................................ 5-26 cp off .................................................... 5-37 cp on...................................................... 5-37 cplmk anc .......................................... 5-32 cplmk dlin ......................................... 5-32 cplmk dlt........................................... 5-32 cplmk llin.......................................... 5-32 cplmk off ........................................... 5-32 cplmk tra........................................... 5-32 cr off.................................................... 5-30 cr on ..................................................... 5-30 crdel .................................................... 5-30 crin........................................................ 5-30 cs............................................................. 5-29 csbsdel................................................ 5-35 csbsin ................................................... 5-35 csrdx .................................................... 5-23 csrdy .................................................... 5-23 csrx ....................................................... 5-23 csry ....................................................... 5-23 cwa ........................................................ 5-21 cwb ........................................................ 5-22 db............................................................ 5-43 dc0.......................................................... 5-31 dc1.......................................................... 5-31 dc2.......................................................... 5-31 dd............................................................ 5-30 del.......................................................... 5-36 del reg................................................. 5-36 det neg ................................................ 5-22 det nrm................................................ 5-22 det pos ................................................. 5-22
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.1 gpib command index 5-3 det smp................................................. 5-22 detb neg.............................................. 5-22 detb nrm ............................................. 5-22 detb pos............................................... 5-22 detb smp .............................................. 5-22 detsel auto ...................................... 5-22 detsel mnl......................................... 5-22 dev a: .................................................... 5-36 dev b: .................................................... 5-36 dev ed:.................................................. 5-36 dev ram: .............................................. 5-36 dl ............................................................ 5-28 dl off.................................................... 5-28 dl on ..................................................... 5-28 dl0 .......................................................... 5-44 dl1 .......................................................... 5-44 dl2 .......................................................... 5-44 dl3 .......................................................... 5-44 dl4 .......................................................... 5-44 dn............................................................ 5-43 drbw off ............................................. 5-26 drbw on............................................... 5-26 drbwov................................................ 5-26 ds ............................................................ 5-34 dy............................................................ 5-37 ent.......................................................... 5-43 errno .................................................... 5-44 eyeampm ............................................. 5-40 eyecor off ......................................... 5-40 eyecor on........................................... 5-40 eyeopn.................................................. 5-40 eyeopn off ......................................... 5-40 eyeopn on........................................... 5-40 eyesmp.................................................. 5-40 fa ............................................................ 5-29 fb............................................................. 5-29 fc off .................................................... 5-24 fc on...................................................... 5-24 fo ............................................................ 5-29 fo off .................................................... 5-29 fo on...................................................... 5-29 fpl........................................................... 5-27 fpu .......................................................... 5-27 fs ............................................................. 5-36 fx off .................................................... 5-32 fx on...................................................... 5-32 fxpk ....................................................... 5-31 gtpos..................................................... 5-38 gtsrc egt............................................ 5-38 gtsrc ext............................................ 5-38 gtsrc if ................................................ 5-38 gtsrc rf............................................... 5-38 gtswp off............................................ 5-38 gtswp on ............................................. 5-38 gtwid .................................................... 5-38 gz ............................................................ 5-43 harm ..................................................... 5-39 harm off ............................................. 5-39 harm on............................................... 5-39 hccmprs off ...................................... 5-25 hccmprs on........................................ 5-25 hcdev fdd........................................... 5-25 hcdev ma ............................................ 5-25 hcdev mb ............................................ 5-25 hcdev prt ........................................... 5-25 hcfile ................................................... 5-25 hcimag col ........................................ 5-25 hcimag gry........................................ 5-25 hcimag mon....................................... 5-25 hcimag scol ...................................... 5-25 hcopy.................................................... 5-25 hrmfnd ................................................ 5-39 hrmfnd off ........................................ 5-39 hrmfnd on.......................................... 5-39 hrmnum ............................................... 5-39 hz ............................................................ 5-43 imavg.................................................... 5-41 imhs off ............................................... 5-41 imhs on................................................. 5-41 imls3...................................................... 5-41 imls5...................................................... 5-41 imls7...................................................... 5-41 imls9...................................................... 5-41 imm off................................................. 5-41 imm on .................................................. 5-41 immdf.................................................... 5-41 immref.................................................. 5-41 immres.................................................. 5-41 imodr .................................................... 5-41 impfc off ............................................. 5-41 impfc on............................................... 5-41 ip.............................................................. 5-36 kz ............................................................ 5-43 larng above..................................... 5-27 larng below .................................... 5-27 lbrng above ..................................... 5-27 lbrng below..................................... 5-27 lc ............................................................ 5-44 limapos abs ....................................... 5-28 limapos rel ....................................... 5-28 limasft ................................................ 5-28 limpos abs .......................................... 5-27
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.1 gpib command index 5-4 limpos rel .......................................... 5-27 limsft ................................................... 5-28 limtyp freq ....................................... 5-27 limtyp time........................................ 5-27 limxref ................................................ 5-27 limxref cent .................................... 5-27 limxref left ..................................... 5-27 limxref udef .................................... 5-27 limyref ................................................ 5-28 limyref botm ................................... 5-28 limyref top ....................................... 5-28 limyref udef .................................... 5-28 ll1........................................................... 5-30 ll10......................................................... 5-30 ll2........................................................... 5-30 ll5........................................................... 5-30 lmsfat.................................................. 5-28 lmta off.............................................. 5-27 lmta on ............................................... 5-27 lmtadel .............................................. 5-27 lmtain .................................................. 5-27 lmtb off .............................................. 5-27 lmtb on................................................ 5-27 lmtbdel............................................... 5-27 lmtbin .................................................. 5-27 lof .......................................................... 5-28 lon label name ..................................... 5-28 ls............................................................. 5-36 ltsp ........................................................ 5-36 lvf off.................................................. 5-29 lvf on ................................................... 5-29 lvfdel .................................................. 5-29 lvfin...................................................... 5-29 m0............................................................ 5-34 m1............................................................ 5-34 m2............................................................ 5-34 m3............................................................ 5-34 ma ........................................................... 5-43 mc ........................................................... 5-34 mdf1....................................................... 5-32 mdf2....................................................... 5-32 mdl1....................................................... 5-32 mdl2....................................................... 5-32 mf............................................................ 5-32 mfl ......................................................... 5-32 mis .......................................................... 5-37 mk ........................................................... 5-32, 5-33 mkbw..................................................... 5-31 mkcf ...................................................... 5-34 mkcs ...................................................... 5-34 mkd ........................................................ 5-32 mkmks .................................................. 5-34 mkn ........................................................ 5-32, 5-33 mkoff.................................................... 5-32 mkrl...................................................... 5-34 mkscpl off ......................................... 5-37 mkscpl on........................................... 5-37 mkspos ................................................. 5-37 mkswid................................................. 5-37 mksx all ............................................. 5-37 mksx in................................................. 5-37 mksx out............................................. 5-37 mksy all ............................................. 5-37 mksy dlin ........................................... 5-37 mksy llin............................................ 5-37 mksydl above.................................. 5-37 mksydl below ................................. 5-37 mksyla above.................................. 5-37 mksyla below ................................. 5-37 mksylb above .................................. 5-37 mksylb below.................................. 5-37 mktrace tra..................................... 5-32 mktrace trb ..................................... 5-32 ml ........................................................... 5-32 mlf1 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf10 ..................................................... 5-33 mlf2 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf3 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf4 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf5 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf6 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf7 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf8 ....................................................... 5-33 mlf9 ....................................................... 5-33 mln1....................................................... 5-33 mln10..................................................... 5-33 mln2....................................................... 5-33 mln3....................................................... 5-33 mln4....................................................... 5-33 mln5....................................................... 5-33 mln6....................................................... 5-33 mln7....................................................... 5-33 mln8....................................................... 5-33 mln9....................................................... 5-33 mlsf ....................................................... 5-33 mlsl....................................................... 5-33 mlt off................................................. 5-33 mlt on .................................................. 5-33 mltscr ft............................................ 5-42 mltscr off ......................................... 5-42 mltscr tt............................................ 5-42 mltscr zm .......................................... 5-42
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.1 gpib command index 5-5 mmi a: .................................................... 5-36 mmi b: .................................................... 5-36 mmi fd:.................................................. 5-36 mn ........................................................... 5-32, 5-33 mnprt.................................................... 5-25 mnprt off ........................................... 5-25 mnprt on ............................................. 5-25 mo ........................................................... 5-32 mpa......................................................... 5-32 mpm ........................................................ 5-32 mr ........................................................... 5-34 ms............................................................ 5-43 mtcf....................................................... 5-34 mtcs....................................................... 5-34 mtmks................................................... 5-34 mtsp ....................................................... 5-34 mv ........................................................... 5-43 mw .......................................................... 5-43 mxe......................................................... 5-29 mxi.......................................................... 5-29 mxn ........................................................ 5-29 mxon ..................................................... 5-29 mxp......................................................... 5-29 mz ........................................................... 5-43 ni ............................................................. 5-31 nic........................................................... 5-31 nif ........................................................... 5-31 nim.......................................................... 5-31 nires ...................................................... 5-31 niu .......................................................... 5-31 nqst off............................................... 5-35 nqst on ................................................ 5-35 nxl ......................................................... 5-37 nxm ........................................................ 5-37 nxp ......................................................... 5-37 nxr ......................................................... 5-37 obw ........................................................ 5-39 obw off................................................ 5-39 obw on ................................................. 5-39 obwper................................................. 5-39 obwst def ........................................... 5-39 obwst mnl.......................................... 5-39 obwst usr........................................... 5-39 opf .......................................................... 5-27 opr.......................................................... 5-44 oprevt .................................................. 5-44 pfc off .................................................. 5-27 pfc on.................................................... 5-27 pfeed off ............................................. 5-25 pfeed on .............................................. 5-25 pfj ........................................................... 5-27 pioout................................................... 5-44 pjavg ..................................................... 5-40 pjit.......................................................... 5-40 pjit off.................................................. 5-40 pjit on ................................................... 5-40 pjsig off............................................... 5-40 pjsig on ................................................ 5-40 pjsrto ................................................... 5-40 pjstpo.................................................... 5-40 pkcf ....................................................... 5-34 pklst ..................................................... 5-33 pkrl ....................................................... 5-34 pkthird ................................................ 5-31 pkzm3 .................................................... 5-42 pkzmn ................................................... 5-42 pkzmx ................................................... 5-42 pllbw.................................................... 5-26 pllbw auto........................................ 5-26 pllbw mid ........................................... 5-26 pllbw narw....................................... 5-26 pllbw wide ........................................ 5-26 pls freq ............................................... 5-33 pls level............................................. 5-33 pls off .................................................. 5-33 ppa .......................................................... 5-29 ppm ......................................................... 5-29 presl extd.......................................... 5-29 presl std............................................. 5-29 prt col ................................................. 5-25 prt gry................................................. 5-25 prt mol ................................................ 5-25 prt mos ................................................ 5-25 prt scoll ............................................ 5-25 prt scols............................................. 5-25 prtcmd esc......................................... 5-25 prtcmd pcl......................................... 5-25 prtcmdescr ....................................... 5-25 ps ............................................................. 5-37 pwavg................................................... 5-34 pwch...................................................... 5-34 pwm........................................................ 5-34 pwtm ..................................................... 5-34 pwtotal .............................................. 5-34 rb ............................................................ 5-26 rc ............................................................ 5-36 rc reg ................................................... 5-36 redlt off ............................................ 5-32 redlt on.............................................. 5-32 respos low......................................... 5-28 respos up............................................. 5-28 rev ......................................................... 5-25
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.1 gpib command index 5-6 rfact..................................................... 5-35 rl ............................................................ 5-30 rlsanc.................................................. 5-23 ro............................................................ 5-30 ro off.................................................... 5-30 ro on ..................................................... 5-30 rqs.......................................................... 5-44 s0 ............................................................. 5-44 s1 ............................................................. 5-44 s2 ............................................................. 5-44 sc............................................................. 5-43 scrsel tra.......................................... 5-42 scrsel trb .......................................... 5-42 setanc .................................................. 5-23 sg off .................................................... 5-32 sg on...................................................... 5-32 si .............................................................. 5-38 sigid off .............................................. 5-29 sigid on ................................................ 5-29 sn ............................................................ 5-38 sngls..................................................... 5-38 sp ............................................................. 5-36 sprdel................................................... 5-39 sprin ...................................................... 5-39 sprld ..................................................... 5-39 sprsv ..................................................... 5-39 sprtbl................................................... 5-39 spuri ...................................................... 5-39 spuri off.............................................. 5-39 spuri on ............................................... 5-39 sr............................................................. 5-38 st............................................................. 5-26, 5-38 sv ............................................................ 5-36 sv reg ................................................... 5-36 sw ........................................................... 5-26, 5-38 swm ........................................................ 5-38 swpcnt ................................................. 5-22 symrt.................................................... 5-35 ta ............................................................ 5-21 taa ......................................................... 5-23 tab ......................................................... 5-23 tb ............................................................ 5-22 tba ......................................................... 5-23 tbb.......................................................... 5-23 tpl .......................................................... 5-25 tps........................................................... 5-25 trgdt .................................................... 5-38 trglvl.................................................. 5-38 trgslp fall........................................ 5-38 trgslp rise......................................... 5-38 trgsrc ext ......................................... 5-38 trgsrc free ....................................... 5-38 trgsrc if ............................................. 5-38 trgsrc line........................................ 5-38 trgsrc rf ............................................ 5-38 trgsrc video .................................... 5-38 ts............................................................. 5-38 typ.......................................................... 5-25 up ............................................................ 5-43 us ............................................................ 5-43 va............................................................ 5-26 vb............................................................ 5-26 ver ......................................................... 5-25 wdo off................................................ 5-42 wdo on ................................................. 5-42 wdoswp off ....................................... 5-38 wdoswp on......................................... 5-38 wdx........................................................ 5-34, 5-42 wlx ........................................................ 5-34, 5-42 xdb ......................................................... 5-31 xdl ......................................................... 5-31 xdr ......................................................... 5-31 xycsr off............................................ 5-23 xycsr on ............................................. 5-23 zmoff .................................................... 5-42 zmon...................................................... 5-42 zmpos .................................................... 5-42 zmwid ................................................... 5-42 zs............................................................. 5-36
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2 gpib remote programming 5-7 5.2 gpib remote programming the analyzer is equipped with a gpib (general purpose interface bus) that complies with ieee standard 488.1-1978. this bus allows you to attach and use an external device to remotely control the analyzer. 5.2.1 gpib the gpib is a high-performance interface bus used to connect measuring instruments to a computer. ieee standard 488.1-1978 defines the operations of the gpib. since the gpib has a bus-configured in- terface, connected devices are designated by assigning them a specific address. you can connect up to 15 devices in parallel using a single bus. gpib devices perform one or more of the following functions: talker sends data to the bus. only one active talker can exist on the gpib bus. listener receives data from the bus. multiple active listeners can exist on the gpib bus. controller specifies which devices are designated as ?talkers? or ?listeners?. only one active control- ler can operate on the gpib bus. controllers used to control ifc and ren messages are referred to as system controllers. when there are multiple controllers attached to the bus, the system controller becomes the active controller by default. other devices that can act as controllers operate as addressable devices when the system is ac- tivated. the tct (take control) interface message is used to set a controller other than the system controller as the active controller. after this setting is made, the system controller becomes inactive. the controller controls the entire system by sending interface messages or device messages to each mea- suring instrument. the functions of the messages are: interface message:messages used to control the gpib bus device message: messages used to control specific devices
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.2 gpib setup 5-8 5.2.2 gpib setup (1) connecting the gpib the following figure shows the standard gpib connector and how it can be connected in parallel, or ?stacked? with other connectors. attach the gpib connectors and secure them by tightening the screws to prevent them from coming apart during use. the following conditions should be observed when using a gpib interface: the total gpib cable length in a single bus system must not be more than 20m (you can calculate the current cable length using the formula total length = n 2m, where, n is the number of devices to be connected, including the gpib controller). no more than 15 devices can be connected to a single bus system. there are no restrictions concerning the method of connection between cables. however, no more than three gpib connectors should be connected to a single device, since more than this may damage the connector mounting due to excessive strain. (example) the total cable length in a system with five devices should be 10m or less (2m 5 devices = 10m). there is no restriction on the length of the cables between the individual devices as long as the total length does not exceed 10m. however, if you connect 10 devices or more, make sure that at least some of the cables attaching the devices are less than 2m so that the total is less than 20m. gpib connector
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.3 gpib interface functions 5-9 (2) setting the gpib address use the following procedure to set the gpib address for the analyzer: 1. press config and gpib address . the gpib address dialog box is displayed. 2. use the data knob, the step keys, or the numeric keys to set the gpib address as required. 3. press entr (hz) to set the address. (3) measurements without displaying characters when in the remote control mode, measurement speed becomes higher if you turn off "display on/off." 1. press config and display on/off (off). off is selected, and all indications except for the trace are removed. 5.2.3 gpib interface functions code description sh1 source handshake ah1 acceptor handshake t6 basic talker, serial polling, listener-specified talker cancel te0 extended talker (not available) l4 basic listener function, talker-specified listener cancel le0 extended listener (not available) sr1 service request function rl1 remote, local, local lockout pp0 parallel polling (not available) dc1 device clear dt0 device trigger (not available) c0 system controller (not available) (standard) c1 system controller (option) c2 ifc transmission, controller charging functions (option) c3 ren transmission function (option) c4 srq response function (option) c12 interface message transmission function and control privilege exchanging function (option) e1 using open-collector bus driver
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.4 responses to interface messages 5-10 5.2.4 responses to interface messages the ieee standard 488.1-1978 defines how the analyzer responds to interface messages. the responses are described in this section. for information on how to send interface messages to the analyzer, refer to the instruction manual of the controller you are using. (1) interface clear (ifc) the ifc message is transmitted directly to the analyzer through a signal line. the message allows the analyzer to stop the operation of the gpib bus. although all input/output operation is stopped, the input/output buffer is not cleared. note that the dcl is used to clear the buffer. (2) remote enable (ren) the ren message is transmitted directly to the analyzer through a signal line. if the analyzer is spec- ified as a listener when the message is true, the analyzer is in remote mode. the analyzer remains in remote mode until the gtl message is received, ren becomes false, or you press the local key. when the analyzer is in local mode, it ignores all received data, and key inputs (except for local key input) and when the analyzer is in local lockout mode, it ignores all key input. (3) serial polling enable (spe) when the analyzer is receiving a message from an external device, it is in serial polling mode. if the analyzer is specified as a talker in this mode, it sends status bytes instead of normal messages. the analyzer remains in the serial polling mode until the spd (serial polling disable) message or the ifc message is received. when the analyzer sends an srq (service request) message to the controller, bit 6 (rqs bit) of the response data is set to 1 (true). when the analyzer has finished sending this message, the rqs bit reverts to 0 (false). the srq message is sent directly through a signal line. (4) device clear (dcl) when the analyzer receives a dcl message, it performs the following actions: clears the input and output buffers. resets syntax analysis, execution control, and response data generation. cancels all commands that prevent the remote command from being executed next. cancels commands that are paused to wait for other parameters. when the analyzer receives the dcl message, it does not do the following: changes data set or stored in the analyzer. interrupt front panel operation. modifie or interrupt any the analyzer operations being executed. change any status bytes other than mav (mav becomes 0 when the output buffer is cleared).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.5 message exchange protocol 5-11 (5) selected device clear (sdc) the sdc message operates in the same manner as the dcl message. however, it is executed only when the analyzer is a listener. in other cases, the sdc message is ignored. (6) go to local (gtl) the gtl message puts the analyzer into local mode. in local mode, all the operations normally accessible from the front panel are available. (7) local lockout (llo) the llo message puts the analyzer in the local lockout mode. if the analyzer is set to the remote mode when this is done, all operations normally available from the front panel are disabled (note that in the normal remote mode, you can perform front panel operations using the local key). you can use one of the following three methods to set the analyzer to local mode from the local lock- out mode: send a gtl message to the analyzer set the ren message to false (the local lockout mode will be canceled) turn the analyzer power off and on again 5.2.5 message exchange protocol the analyzer receives program messages from controllers or other devices through the gpib bus and gen- erates response data. program messages include commands, queries (commands used to query response data) and data. the procedure used to exchange these commands, queries and data is explained in this sec- tion. (1) gpib buffers the analyzer is equipped with the following two buffers: (a) input buffer the input buffer is used to store data temporarily for command analysis (it has a length of 1024 bytes so an input larger than this is ignored.) use either of the following two methods to clear this buffer: turn the analyzer power on. execute dcl or sdc. (b) output buffer the output buffer is used to store data which is going to be read from the controller (1024 bytes). use either of the following two methods to clear this buffer: turn the analyzer power on. execute dcl or sdc.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.6 command syntax 5-12 (2) message exchange gpib control between a controller and a device consists of two main elements: query and response data generation. these are explained below. (a) parser the parser receives command messages in the order of reception from the input buffer, analyzes the syntax, and determines what the received command is. (b) response data generation when the parser determines what the query is, the analyzer generates data in the output buffer in response (that is, to output data a query must be sent immediately before the data). 5.2.6 command syntax command programs for the analyzer are defined using the following format: (1) header two types of header are available: the common command header and the simple header. the com- mon command header has an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the mnemonic. the simple header is a functionally independent command that has no hierarchical structure. you can form a query command by attaching a ??? in the rear of a header. (2) space (space character) you should separate the header from the data by one or more spaces. (3) data when the command requires multiple data, data is separated by commas. a space may be inserted before or after each comma. for more information on data types, see section 5.2.7 data formats. (4) writing multiple commands you can write multiple commands by separating them with semicolons in one line. header data
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.7 data formats 5-13 5.2.7 data formats the analyzer uses the following data formats for the input and output data. (1) numeric data there are three numeric data formats, any of which can be used for input. some commands add units to the data when the data is input. the following shows the three numeric data formats. integer type: nr1 format fixed-point type: nr2 format floating-point type: nr3 format (2) units the table below lists the units that you can use. unit exponential description gz 10 9 frequency mz 10 6 frequency kz 10 3 frequency hz 10 0 frequency volt 10 0 vo l t a g e mv 10 -3 vo l t a g e uv 10 -6 vo l t a g e nv 10 -9 vo l t a g e mw 10 -3 power db 10 0 db correspondence ma 10 -3 electric current sc 10 0 second ms 10 -3 second us 10 -6 second per 10 0 percentage % 10 0 percentage [sign] number [sign] number number . [sign] number number number e/e [sign] .
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-14 5.2.8 status bytes the analyzer has a hierarchical status register structure which complies with ieee standard 488.2-1987. this is used to send information on the status of various aspects of a device to the controller. this section explains the status byte and event assignments operation models. (1) status register the analyzer uses the status register model defined by ieee standard 488.2-1987. this consists of a condition register, an event register and an enable register. (a) condition register the condition register continuously monitors the status of devices, showing their latest status. however, this register is used internally, so no data can be written into or read out from this register. (b) event register the event register latches and retains the status information from the condition register (in some cases, it retains status changes). once the register is set, the condition is maintained until a query command reads out the information or the register is reset by means of the *cls command. no data can be written into the event register. (c) enable register the enable register specifies which bit in the event register is to be used as the valid status to generate a summary. the enable register is anded with the event register. the or of the result of the and operation is generated as a summary. the summary is written into the following status byte registers. any data can be written into the enable register. 0 1 n-1 n 0 1 n-1 n 0 1 n-1 n & & & & or condition register event register enable register
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-15 the following three types of status registers are used in the analyzer: status byte register standard event register standard operation status register the arrangement of the status registers of the analyzer are shown in figure 5-1. the status registers are shown in detail in figure 5-2. figure 5-1 arrangement of the three status registers opr esb mav 3 2 1 ucal status byte register service request standard operation status register standard event register output buffer . . . . . . . . . . mss rqs
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-16 figure 5-2 details of the three status registers standard event register status byte register standard operation status register standard event register
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-17 (2) event enable register each event register has an enable register to determine which bit is available. the enable register sets the corresponding bit in decimal value. set of service request enable register: *sre set of standard even status enable register: *ese set of operation status enable register: opr example: only the measuring bit in the operation status register is available. the opr bit of the status byte register is set to 1 when the measuring bit of the oper- ation status register is set to one. print @8;?opr16? (an example of the program in n88basic) output 708;?*opr16? (an example of the program for the hp200 and 300 series example: the opr (the summary of operation status register) bit and esb (the summary of event status register) bit of the status byte register are available. the mss bit of the status byte register is set to 1 when the opr bit or the esb bit is set to one. print @8;?sre160? (an example of the program in n88basic) output 708;?*sre160? (an example of the program for the hp200 and 300 series (3) standard operation status register bit assignments for the event register (which represents the standard operation status) is listed below: bit functional definition description 15 to 10 this is always 0 9 printing this is set to 1 at the end of printing 8 averaging this is set to 1 when averaging is completed 7 to 5 this is always 0 4 measuring this is set to 1 at the end of sequence measurement 3 sweeping this is set to 1 when sweeping is completed 2 to 1 this is always 0 0 calibrating this is set to 1 when calibration data acquisition fin- ishes
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-18 (4) status byte register the status byte register summarizes the information from the status register. in addition, a summary of the status byte register is sent to the controller as a service request. as a result, this register oper- ates slightly differently from the status register. this section explains the status byte register. the structure of the status byte register is shown in figure 5-3. figure 5-3 structure of the status byte register this status byte register has the same functions as the status register, except for the following three points: the summary of the status byte register is written in bit 6 of the status byte register. bit 6 of the enable register is always valid and cannot be changed. bit 6 (mss) of the status byte register writes the rqs of the service request. the register responds to serial polling from the controller. on doing so, bits 0 to 5 and bit 7 of the status byte register and the rqs are read out, and then the rqs is reset to 0. other bits are not cleared until each factor has been reset to 0. when the *cls and s2 commands are executed, the status byte register, the rqs bit, and the mss bit can be cleared. consequently, the srq line is now false.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-19 the table below explains the meanings of the bits in the status byte register. bit function description 7 opr the opr bit is a summary of the standard operation status register 6 mss the rqs bit is true when the mss bit of the status byte register is set to 1. the mss bit is the summary bit for the entire status data structure. the serial poll cannot read out the mss bit. (how- ever, the mss bit is understood to be 1 when the rqs bit is 1.) to read the mss bit, use the common command *stb?. the *stb? command can read out bit 0 to 5 and bit 7 of the status byte register and the mss bit. in this case, neither the status byte register nor the mss bit can be cleared. the mss bit cannot become 0 until all the unmasked factors in the status register structure have been cleared 5 esb the esb bit is a summary of the standard event regis- ter 4 mav summary bit for the output buffer. the analyzer does not use this bit. 3 to 1 this is always 0 0 ucal this is set to 1 when an signal level error occurs because the sweep is too fast
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.8 status bytes 5-20 (5) standard event register the table below explains the meanings of the bits in the standard event register. bit functional definition description 7 power on this is set to 1 when the analyzer is switched on 6 this is always 0 5 command error this is set to 1 when the parser finds a syntax error 4 execution error this is set to 1 when the system fails to execute an instruction received as a gpib command for some reason (such as out-of-range parameter) 3 device dependent error this is set to 1 when errors other than command errors, execution errors, or query errors occur 2 query error this is set to 1 when no data exists or data has been deleted when the controller attempts to read out data from the analyzer 1 request control not supported in the analyzer 0 operation complete not supported in the analyzer
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-21 5.2.9 gpib command codes the following tables list the gpib commands by function. listener code column: an asterisk (*) in the listener code column indicates that the function re- quires numeric data together with the function code. the sign [*] in the listener code column indicates that the function can be omitted. string data such as file name, label and so on can receive characters, which are found after the command and prior to the delimiter, as input values. however, when data begins with a ?/?, the characters between ?/? and ?/? are received as input. output format column: a comma (,) in the output format column indicates that multiple items are output. on/off or auto/manual in the output format column indicates that the code outputs 1 or 0, respectively. all frequencies are in hertz (hz), and all times are in seconds. levels are out- put in the currently displayed unit. table 5-1 a key/b key (trace a/trace b) (1 of 3) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format trace active trace a actrc tra actrc? 0:activates trace a a active trace b actrc trb 1:activates trace b b trace a ??? ta? (low-order bytes) 0: write a 1: view 2: blank 3: normalize (high-order bytes) 0: nothing 1: +max hold 2: +averaging 3: +min hold 4: power average a write aw ??? ??? a a view av ??? ??? a a blank ab ??? ??? a a max hold on am ??? a amax on amax? 0: off a off amax off 1: on a a min hold on amin on amin? 0: off a off amin off 1: on a a averaging on aavg on aavg? 0: off a agr ??? 1: on a off aavg off aavg? a ags ??? a a normalize on anorm on anorm? 0: off a off anorm off 1: on a normalize with store corr. ar ??? ??? a power average on apavg on apavg? 0: off apavg off 1: on clearing trace a cwa ??? ??? a
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-22 table 5-1 a key/b key (trace a/trace b) (2 of 3) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format trace trace b ??? tb? (low-order bytes) 0: write b 1: view 2: blank 3: normalize (high-order bytes)0: nothing 1: +max hold 2: +averaging 3: +min hold 4: power average b write bw ??? ??? b b view bv ??? ??? b b blank bb ??? ??? b b max hold on bm ??? b bmax on bmax? 0: off b off bmax off 1: on b b min hold on bmin on bmin? 0: off b off bmin off 1: on b b averaging on bavg on bavg? 0: off b bgr ??? 1: on b off bavg off bavg? b bgs ??? b b normalize on bnorm on bnorm? 0: off b off bnorm off 1: on b normalize with store corr. br ??? ??? b power average on bpavg on bpavg? 0: off bpavg off 1: on clearing trace b cwb ??? ??? b a bachb?????? a&b number of sweep swpcnt * swpcnt? integer (2 to 999) a&b common for the fol- lowing functions: a max hold, a min hold, a average, b max hold, b min hold and b average. ag * ag? a&b bg * bg? a&b trace detector trace a normal det nrm det? 0: normal a positive det pos 1: positive a negative det neg 2: negative a sample det smp 3: sample a trace b normal detb nrm detb? 0: normal b positive detb pos 1: positive b negative detb neg 2: negative b sample detb smp 3: sample b detector selection auto detsel auto detsel? 0: mnl a&b common for the fol- lowing functions: a max hold, a min hold, a average, b max hold, b min hold and b average. manual detsel mnl 1: auto a&b
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-23 table 5-1 a key/b key (trace a/trace b) (3 of 3) table 5-2 att key (attenuator) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format artificial analog artificial analog on anlg on anlg? 0: off a off anlg off 1: on a display mode pause anlgdsp paus anlgdsp? 0: pause a cont anlgdsp cont 1: cont a sampling times anlgtm * anlgtm? integer (2 to 32) a y display mode available only when the xy cursor is set to on. cursor anlgdlt cusr anlgdlt? 0: cursor a data anlgdlt data 1: data xy cursor xy cursor on xycsr on xycsr? 0: off a&b off xycsr off 1: on a&b x cursor position csrx * csrx? frequency/hour a&b y cursor position csry * csry? level a&b reading of ? x value ??? csrdx? frequency/time a available only when the xy cursor is set to on. reading of ? y value ??? csrdy? level set anchor setanc ??? ??? a&b remove anchor rlsanc ??? ??? a&b trace data output from a memory ascii ??? taa? 5 bytes + delimiter for 1 point binary ??? tba? 2 bytes 1001 points (or 501 points) eoi signal output from b memory ascii ??? tab? 5 bytes + delimiter for 1 point binary ??? tbb? 2 bytes 1001 points (or 501 points) eoi signal input from a memory ascii taa ??? ??? for 1 point binary tba ??? ??? eoi signal input from b memory ascii tab ??? ??? for 1 point binary tbb ??? ??? eoi signal function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format attenuator att at * at? level att att auto aa aa? 0: mnl att 1: auto min.att atmin * atmin? level att min.att on atmin on[*] atminon? 0: off att off atmin off 1: on att
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-24 table 5-3 cal key (calibration) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format calibration cal all clall ??? ??? cal total gain cal. clgain ??? ??? cal input att cal. clatt ??? ??? cal if step amp cal. clstep ??? ??? cal rbw switching cal. clrbw ??? ??? cal log linearity cal. cllog ??? ??? cal amplitude mag cal. clmag ??? ??? cal pbw cal. clpbw ??? ??? cal calibration level cln * cln? level cal cal 10 m reference coarse clcref * clcref? integer (0 to 255) cal cal 10 m reference fine clfref * clfref? integer (0 to 255) cal cal 10 m reference default cldref ??? ??? cal saves the cor- rection value. cal 10 m reference store clsref ??? ??? cal initializes the correction value. freq corr on fc on fc? 0: off cal off fc off 1: on cal cal corr on cc on cc? 0: off cal off cc off 1: on cal
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-25 table 5-4 config key (configuration ) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format trace point switching number of points 501 points tps tp? 0: 501 points config 1001 points tpl 1: 1001 points config printer output color mode prt col ??? ??? config simple color image standard size prt scoll ??? ??? config reduced size prt scols ??? ??? config gray mode prt gry ??? ??? config monochrome l size prt mol ??? ??? config s size prt mos ??? ??? config printer command esc/p prtcmd esc ??? ??? config pcl prtcmd pcl ??? ??? config esc/p raster prtcmd escr ??? ??? config menu print on mnprt on mnprt? 0: off config off mnprt off 1: on paper feed on pfeed on pfeed? 0: off config off pfeed off 1: on execution of the command hcopy ??? ??? copy bitmap file copy image color hcimag col ??? ??? config simple color image hcimag scol ??? ??? config gray hcimag gry ??? ??? config mono hcimag mon ??? ??? config compression on hccmprs on ??? ??? config off hccmprs off ??? ??? config file no. hcfile * ??? integer (000 to 999) config menu print on mnprt on mnprt? 0: off config off mnprt off 1: on execution of the command hcopy ??? ??? copy reading image data ??? bmp? binary data copy config copy device printer hcdev prt ??? ??? config area enclosed with thick lines is for optional func- tions. memory card a hcdev ma ??? ??? config memory card b hcdev mb ??? ??? config floppy disk hcdev fdd ??? ??? config execution of the command hcopy ??? ??? copy indication annotation on annot on annot? 0: off config off annot off 1: on others reading machine version ??? ver? 0: r3267 1: r3273 2: r3264 reading machine type (character string) ??? typ? character string + delimiter reading the revision ??? rev? character string + delimiter
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-26 table 5-5 couple key (couple function) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format couple function rbw rb * rb? frequency couple rbw auto ba ba? 0: mnl couple 1: auto vbw vb * vb? frequency couple vbw auto va va? 0: mnl couple 1: auto sweep time sw * sw? time couple st * st? time couple sweep time auto as as? 0: mnl couple 1: auto couple all auto al al? 0: mnl couple 1: all auto rbw: span cors * cors? ratio (0.001 to 0.1) couple rbw: span on cors on[*] corson? 0: off couple off cors off 1: on couple vbw: rbw covr * covr? ratio (0.003 to 3) couple vbw: rbw on covr on[*] covron? 0: off couple off covr off 1: on couple pll bandwidth auto pllbw auto pllbw? 0: auto couple wide pllbw wide 1: narrow couple medium pllbw mid 2: medium couple narrow pllbw narw 3: wide couple rbw 100hz digital drbw on drbw? 0: analog couple analog drbw off 1: digital couple if/adc over range status ??? drbwov? 0: normal couple 1: over range
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-27 table 5-6 format key (display format) (1 of 2) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format limit line selecting limit line types frequency domain limtyp freq limtyp? 0: frequency domain format time domain limtyp time 1: time domain format pass/fail judgment on pfc on pfc? 0: off format off pfc off 1: on format reading the judgment result ??? pfj? 0: pass format 1: fail reading the judgment result (in detail) ??? opf? 0: pass format 1: fail (upper) 2: fail (lower) 3: fail (upper & lower) 4: error upper side fail points reading ??? fpu? number of points n f1, l1... fn, ln format outputs 10 sets max. =delimiter lower side fail points reading ??? fpl? number of points n f1, l1... fn, ln format limit line 1 on lmta on lmta? 0:off format off lmta off 1: on format pass range above the line larng above larng? 0: above the line format below the line larng below 1: below the line format entering data in the table lmtain * ??? frequency (time), level format deleting the table lmtadel ??? ??? format deleting all data in the table limit line 2 on lmtb on lmtb? 0:off format off lmtb off 1: on format pass range above the line lbrng above lbrng? 0: above the line format below the line lbrng below 1: below the line format entering data in the table lmtbin * ??? frequency (time), level format deleting the table lmtbdel ??? ??? format deleting all data in the table x position mode absolute mode limpos abs limpos? 0: absolute mode format relative mode limpos rel 1: relative mode format x reference position on the left side limxref left limxrefsw? 0: on the left side format in the center of the screen limxref cent 1: in the center of the screen format at the user-defined position limxref udef [*] 2: at the user-defined position format reading of x reference position ??? limxref? frequency/time
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-28 table 5-6 format key (display format) (2 of 2) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format limit line x-axis display position offset limsft * limsft? frequency/time format y position mode absolute mode limapos abs limapos? 0: absolute mode format relative mode limapos rel 1: relative mode format y-axis reference position top limyref top limyrefsw? 0: top format bottom limyref botm 1: bottom format user def limyref udef[*] 2: user def format reading of y reference position ??? limyref? level format y-axis display position offset limasft * limasft? level format limit line automatic adjustment (auto adjust) lmsfat ??? ??? format display line display line dl * dl? level format display line on dl on[*] dlon? 0: off format off dl off 1: on format label writing label lon label name lb? character string format label name: maximum 30 charac- ters. deleting label lof ??? ??? format result display specification of the result display area position lower right respos low respos? 0: low format upper left respos up 1: up format
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-29 table 5-7 freq key (frequency) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format frequency center frequency cf * cf? frequency freq cf step size cs * cs? frequency freq cf step size auto ca ca? 0: mnl freq 1: auto freq offset size fo * fo? frequency freq freq offset size on fo on[*] foon? 0: off freq off fo off 1: on freq start frequency fa* fa? frequency freq stop frequency fb* fb? frequency freq presel tune valid for the r3267 and r3273 only auto tune ppa ??? ??? freq manual tune ppm * ppm? integer (-100 to 100) freq preselector 1.6 ghz presl std presl? 0: 1.6 ghz freq area enclosed with thick lines is valid only for the r3267 preselector 3.6 ghz presl extd 1: 3.6 ghz freq internal mixer mxi mxr? 0: int (internal) freq external mixer mxe 1: ext (external) freq area enclosed with dashed lines is valid only for the r3273 signal ident on sigid on sigid? 0: off freq off sigid off 1: on freq positive bias mxp * mxp? level freq negative bias mxn * mxn? level freq reading the bias mode ??? mxon? o: positive bias 1: negative bias freq band selection bnd * bnd? integer freq band lock on bndlc on bndlc? 0: off freq off bndlc off 1: on freq average loss agl * agl? level freq average loss on agl on[*] aglon? 0: off freq off agl off 1: on freq loss vs freq on lvf on lvf? 0: off freq off lvf off 1: on freq entering loss vs freq lvfin * ??? frequency, level, bias freq deleting loss vs freq lvfdel ??? ??? freq deleting all data in the table {
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-30 table 5-8 level key function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format reference level reference level rl * rl? level level x db/div dd * dd? 0: 10 db/ level 1: 5 db/ 2: 2 db/ 3: 1 db/ 4: 0.5 db/ linear scaling factor 1 ll1 ll? 0: 1 level 2 ll2 1: 2 level 5 ll5 2: 5 level 10 ll10 3: 10 level reference level units displayed dbm aunits dbm aunits? 0: dbm level dbmv aunits dbmv 1: dbmv level db v aunits dbuv 2: db v level db vemf aunits dbemf 3: db vemf level dbpw aunits dbpw 4: dbpw level w aunits w 5: w level v aunits v 6: v level level offset ro * ro? level level level offset on ro on[*] roon? 0: off level off ro off 1: on level level offset level offset on cr on cr? 0: off level off cr off 1: on level entering correction factor (in the table) crin * ??? frequency, level level deleting correction factor (from the table) crdel ??? ??? level deleting all data in the table.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-31 table 5-9 meas key function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format x db down value of x db down mkbw * mkbw? level meas x db down xdb ??? ??? meas x db down left xdl ??? ??? meas right xdr ??? ??? meas display mode rel. dc0 dc? 0: relative mode meas abs. l. dc1 1: absolute mode (left side) meas abs. r. dc2 2: absolute mode (right side) meas continuous db down on cdb on cdb? 0: off meas off cdb off 1: on meas frequency counter counter on count on count? 0: off meas off count off 1: on meas resolution 1 khz cn0 cn? 0: 1 khz meas 100 hz cn1 1: 100 hz meas 10 hz cn2 2: 10 hz meas 1 hz cn3 3: 1hz meas reading counter value ??? cnres? frequency meas unit noise/hz ni * ni? frequency meas dbm/hz on nim nion? 0: off meas db v/ hz on niu 1: dbm/hz meas dbc/hz nic 2: db v/ hz meas noise/hz off nif 3: dbc/hz meas reading the result ??? nires? level meas fixed marker peak fxpk ??? ??? meas intermodulation distortion 3rd order measure pkthird ??? ??? meas am measurement %am measurement on ammod on ammodon? 0: off meas off ammod off 1: on reading of the result ??? ammod? value (%)
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-32 table 5-10 mkr key (1 of 2) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format marker marker on mn[*] mn? 0: marker off mkr 1: normal marker 2: delta marker off mkoff ??? mkr mo ??? mkr delta marker on mkd[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr reading marker frequency (time) ??? mf? frequency (time) mkr when set to delta mode, frequency (time) is used. reading marker level ??? ml? level mkr when set to delta mode, level is used. reading marker frequency (time) and marker level ??? mfl? marker frequency (time) and marker level mkr when set to delta mode, frequency (time) difference and level difference is used. normal marker mk[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr mkn[*] ??? mkr reading delta marker absolute frequency ??? mdf1? normal marker frequency (time) mkr reading normal marker absolute level ??? mdl1? normal marker level mkr reading delta marker absolute frequency ??? mdf2? delta marker frequency (level) mkr reading delta marker absolute level ??? mdl2? delta marker level mkr fixed marker on fx on fx? 0: off mkr off fx off 1: on mkr 1/delta marker on redlt on redlt? 0: off mkr off redlt off 1: on mkr signal track on sg on sg? 0: off mkr off sg off 1: on mkr marker step size mpm * mpm? frequency (time) mkr marker step size auto mpa mpa? 0: mnl mkr 1: auto specifying the coupling with the marker mkr coupling off cplmk off cplmk? 0: without coupling mkr coupling with delta marker cplmk dlt 1: coupling with delta marker mkr coupling with anchor cplmk anc 2: coupling with anchor mkr coupling with the limit line cplmk llin 3: coupling with the limit line mkr coupling with the display line cplmk dlin 4: coupling with the display line mkr coupling with trace a cplmk tra 5: coupling with trace a mkr moving the marker between the traces trace a mktrace tra mktrace? 0: blank mkr trace b mktrace trb 1: trace a mkr 2: trace b
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-33 table 5-10 mkr key (2 of 2) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format marker multi-marker on mlt on mlt? 0: off mkr off mlt off 1: on mkr moving the active marker mk[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr mkn[*] ??? mkr mn[*] ??? mkr multi-marker no.1 on mln1[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf1 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.2 on mln2[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf2 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.3 on mln3[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf3 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.4 on mln4[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf4 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.5 on mln5[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf5 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.6 on mln6[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf6 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.7 on mln7[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf7 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.8 on mln8[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf8 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.9 on mln9[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf9 ??? ??? mkr multi-marker no.10 on mln10[*] ??? frequency (time) mkr off mlf10 ??? ??? mkr reading all frequencies of the multi-markers ??? mlsf? frequencies ( 10) and delta marker mkr a total of 11 outputs. reading all levels for the multi-markers ??? mlsl? levels ( 10) and delta marker mkr peak list frequency pls freq ??? ??? mkr level pls level ??? ??? mkr off pls off ??? ??? mkr reading the peak list ??? pklst? number of settings n frequency (time) 1, level 1 ... frequency (time) n, level n mkr =delimiter
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-34 tabl e 5-11 mkr key (maker ) table 5-12 power key (power measurement) (1 of 2) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format marker marker cf mkcf ??? ??? mkr mc ??? ??? mkr marker ref mkrl ??? ??? mkr mr ??? ??? mkr marker cf step mkcs ??? ??? mkr m0 ??? ??? mkr ? marker span mtsp ??? ??? mkr ds ??? ??? mkr ? marker cf mtcf ??? ??? mkr ? marker cf step mtcs ??? ??? mkr m1 ??? ??? mkr marker marker step mkmks ??? ??? mkr m2 ??? ??? mkr ? marker marker step mtmks ??? ??? mkr m3 ??? ??? mkr peak cf pkcf ??? ??? mkr peak ref pkrl ??? ??? mkr function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format power measurement number of averaging pwtm * pwtm? integer (1 to 999) power channel power pwch pwch? level, level power reading channel power status ??? pwchon? 0: power measurement off power 1: channel power on channel (window) position wlx * wlx? frequency in the center of the window (starting from the left edge in time) power channel (window) width wdx * wdx? frequency (time) power total power pwtotal pwtotal? level, level power reading the status of the total power ??? pwtotalon? 0: power measurement off power 2: total power on average power pwavg pwavg? level, level power reading the average power status ??? pwavgon? 0: power measurement off power 3: average power on power measurement off pwm ??? ??? power
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-35 table 5-12 power key (power measurement) (2 of 2) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format acp measurement acp measurement mode on acp on acpon? 0: off power off acp off 1: on reading the result ??? acp? number of sets n lower1 frequency, level .... lowern frequency, level power outputs 5 sets max. =delimiter ??? acpref? reference power (level) entering cs/bs table csbsin * ??? enter cs frequency first and then bs frequency. power carrier bandwidth carrbs* carrbs? bs frequency deleting cs/bs table csbsdel ??? ??? power deleting all data in the table. number of averaging acpavg * acpavg? integer (1 to 999) power set this field to off when "1" is specified. parameter setup default acpst usr acpst? 0: std (unused) power manual acpst mnl 1: default define default acpst def 2: manual screen full acpscr full acpscr? 0: full-screen power sepa acpscr sepa 1: separate screen carrier acpscr carr 2: full-screen(carrier) acp graph on adg on adg? 0: off power off adg off 1: on symbol rate 1/t symrt * symrt? frequency (1 hz to 1 ghz) power rolloff factor rfact * rfact? real number (0.01 to 0.99) power nyquist filter on nqst on nqst? 0: off power off nqst off 1: on bs window on acpbsw on acpbsw? 0: off power off acpbsw off 1: on noise correction on acpncor on acpncor? 0: off power off acpncor off 1: on noise power measurement frequency/bandwidth specification auto acpncof auto acpncof? 0: manual power manual acpncof mnl 1: automatic noise power measurement frequency/bandwidth acpncsbs* acp- ncsbs? ncs, nbs power ncs: noise power measurement fre- quency nbs: noise power measurement band- width the noise correction status of the measurement result ??? acpncst? 0:not applied 1: applied power
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-36 table 5-13 preset key (initialization) table 5-14 rcl key (reading data) table 5-15 save key (saving data) table 5-16 span key (frequency span) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format preset instrument preset ip ??? ??? preset function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format recall rc reg_nn ??? ??? rcl nn: 00 to 10 rc file name ??? ??? rcl file name: maximum 8 characters. function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format save save sv reg_nn ??? ??? save nn: 00 to 10 sv file name ??? ??? save file name: maximum 8 characters. deletion del reg_nn ??? ??? save del file name ??? ??? save memory card the area within the thick lines is for optional functions. initializing the card mmi a: ??? ??? save the drive can be specified as ma. mmi b: ??? ??? save the drive can be specified as mb. all copy allcopy a: b: ??? ??? save either "ma:" or "mb" can be specified. drive selection dev ram: ??? ??? save dev a: ??? ??? save dev b: ??? ??? save floppy disk initializing the disk mmi fd: ??? ??? save drive selection dev ram: ??? ??? save dev ed: ??? ??? save function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format frequency span frequency span sp * sp? frequency span full span fs ??? ??? span zero span zs ??? ??? span last span ls ??? ??? span ltsp ??? ??? span
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-37 table 5-17 srch key (peak search) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format peak search peak search ps ??? ??? srch next peak nxp ??? ??? srch next peak left nxl ??? ??? srch right nxr ??? ??? srch min. peak mis ??? ??? srch next min. peak nxm ??? ??? srch continuous peak on cp on cp? 0: off srch off cp off 1: on srch search condition x-axis range all mksx all mksx? 0: all srch inner limit mksx in 1: inner limit srch outer limit mksx out 2: outer limit srch limit position mkspos * mkspos? frequency in the center of the window (starting from the left edge in time) srch limit width mkswid * mkswid? frequency (time) srch couple to f (t) on mkscpl on mkscpl? 0: off srch off mkscpl off 1: on srch y-axis range all mksy all mksy? 0: all srch display line mksy dlin 1: display line srch limit line mksy llin 2: limit line srch display line above the line mksydl above mksydl? 0: above the line srch below the line mksydl below 1: below the line srch limit line 1 above the line mksyla above mksyla? 0: above the line srch below the line mksyla below 1: below the line srch limit line 2 above the line mksylb above mksylb? 0: above the line srch below the line mksylb below 1: below the line srch peak ? y div dy * dy? real number (0.1 to 10.0) srch
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-38 table 5-18 swp/single key (sweep time) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format sweep condition sweep mode ??? swm? 00: normal & full swp 01: normal & window 10: manual & full 11: manual & window 20: single & full 21: single & window normal conts ??? ??? swp sn ??? ??? swp single sngls ??? ??? single si ??? ??? single window sweep on wdoswp on wdoswp? 0: off swp off wdoswp off 1: on swp sweep reset & start sr ??? ??? swp take sweep ts ??? ??? swp gated sweep on gtswp on gtswp? 0: off swp off gtswp off 1: on swp gate position gtpos * gtpos? time swp gate width gtwid * gtwid? time swp gate source if signal gtsrc if gtsrc? 0: ext trigger swp rf is option. ext trigger gtsrc ext 1: if signal swp ext gate in gtsrc egt 2: rf signal swp rf signal gtsrc rf 3: ext gate in swp trigger mode free run trgsrc free trgsrc? 0: free run swp line trgsrc line 1: line swp video trgsrc video 2: video swp ext trgsrc ext 3: ext swp if signal trgsrc if 4: if signal swp rf signal trgsrc rf 5: rf signal swp trigger slope - trgslp fall trgslp? 0: - swp + trgslp rise 1: + swp trigger level trglvl * trglvl? integer (%) swp delay time trgdt * trgdt? time (sweep time to 1 sec) swp sweep time sw * sw? time swp st * st? time swp sweep time auto as as? 0: auto swp 1: mnl swp
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-39 table 5-19 util key (utility) (1 of 3) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format obw measure- ment obw measurement mode on obw on obwon? 0: off util off obw off 1: on util reading the result ??? obw? obw, fc util a total of 2 outputs (both for frequency) obw% obwper * obwper? real number (10.0 to 99.9%) util averaging number avgobw * avgobw? integer (1 to 999) util use "off" when "1" is set. parameter setup default obwst usr obwst? 0: std (unused) util manual obwst mnl 1: default util define default obwst def 2: manual util harmon- ics measure- ment harmonics measurement mode on harm on harmon? 0: off util off harm off 1: on util reading the result values ??? harm? number of sets n frequency1, level1 ... frequency n, level n util n = hrmnum? =delimiter harmonics number hrmnum * hrmnum? integer util fund frequency hrmfnd * hrmfnd? frequency util fund frequency on hrmfnd on hrmfndon? 0: off util off hrmfnd off 1: on util spurious spurious measurement on spuri on spurion? 0: off util off spuri off 1: on util reading the result values ??? spuri? number of times the measurement table n m1 f1, l1, j1 ... fm1, lm1, jm1 m2 f1,l1,j1 ... fm2, lm2, jm2 . . . . . . mn f1, l1, j1 ... fmn, lmn, jmn util number of times the measurement table must be repeated (0 to 10) m: number of times the spurious must be repeated (0 to 10) f: spurious frequency l: spurious level j: test conclusions =delimiter table selection sprtbl * sprtbl? integer (1 to 3) util saving the table information sprsv ??? ??? util loading the table information sprld ??? ??? util entering data in the table sprin * ??? * input number (integer), start frequency, stop frequency, rbw and limit value util deleting the table sprdel ??? ??? util deleting all data in the table.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-40 table 5-19 util key (utility) (2 of 3) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format eye opening measure- ment eye opening ratio on off eyeopn on eyeopn off eyeopnon? 0: off 1: on util reading the result ??? eyeopn? d1, d2 util d1: opening ratio (for amplitude) d2: opening ratio (for time) number of samples eyesmp * eyesmp? integer (2 to 999) util positioning the y cursor automatically eyeampm eyeampm? level util internal jitter compensation on eyecor on eyecor? 0: off util off eyecor off 1: on phase noise measure- ment c/n measurement mode on cnis on cnison? 0: off util off cnis off 1: on offset frequency data read- out ??? cnis? set number n offset frequency 1 level 1.... .... offset frequency n, level n util =delimiter table input cnofsin * ??? offset frequency util deleting the table cnofsdel ??? util deletes all data from the table. signal track on cnsig on cnsig? 0: off util off cnsig off 1: on average number cnavg * cnavg? integer (1 to 999) util when 1 is specified, the average function is turned off. phase jitter measure- ment phase jitter measurement mode on pjit on pjiton? 0: off util off pjit off 1: on result value readout ??? pjit? carrier level, total ssb noise and phase jitter util start offset frequency pjsrto * pjsrto? offset frequency util stop offset frequency pjstpo * pjstpo? offset frequency signal track on pjsig on pjsig? 0: off util off pjsig off 1: on average number pjavg * pjavg? integer (1 to 999) util when 1 is specified, the average function is turned off.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-41 table 5-19 util key (utility) (3 of 3) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format im measure- ment im measurement mode on imm on immon? 0: off util off imm off 1: on reference wave data read- out ??? immref? frequency, level util delta frequency readout ??? immdf? delta frequency distortion signal data read- out ??? immres? set number n ll1,lj1,ul1,uj1 ll2,lj2,ul2,uj2 .... lln,ljn,uln,ujn =delimiter util n: result set number corresponding to the degree lln: level difference in the lower fre- quency signal ljn: pass/fail judg- ment result for the lower fre- quency signal 0: pass 1: fail -1: judgment off uln: level difference for the upper fre- quency signal ujn: pass/fail judg- ment result for the upper fre- quency signal degree setting imodr * imodr? degree util only 3, 5, 7 or 9 can be specified. criteria input 3 rd order imls3 * imls3? level util 5 th order imls5 * imls5? 7 th order imls7 * imls7? 9 th order imls9 * imls9? pass/fail judgment on impfc on impfc? 0 : off util off impfc off 1 : on average number imavg * imavg? integer (1 to 999) util when 1 is specified, the average function is turned off. hi sense mode on imhs on imhs? 0 : off util off imhs off 1 : on
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-42 table 5-20 window key (window) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format window window on wdo on wdo? 0: off window off wdo off 1: on window window position wlx * wlx? frequency in the center of the window (starting from the left edge in time) window window width wdx * wdx? frequency (time) window separate screen separate screen zoom mltscr zm mltscr? 0: zoom off window f/t mltscr ft 1: zoom window t/t mltscr tt 2: f/t window off (screen reset) mltscr off 3: t/t window zoom window position zmpos * zmpos? frequency in the center of the window (starting from the left edge in time) window zoom window width zmwid * zmwid? frequency (time) window zoom on window zmon ??? ??? window zoom off zmoff ??? ??? window max peak pkzmx ??? ??? window next peak pkzmn ??? ??? window 3rd order peak pkzm3 ??? ??? window upper screen activated scrsel tra scrsel? 0: upper screen activated window lower screen activated scrsel trb 1: lower screen activated window
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-43 table 5-21 numeric keys/step keys/data knob/unit keys (entering data) function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format entering data 0 to 9 0 to 9 ??? ??? . (decimal point) . ??? ??? (step-up) up ??? ??? (step-down) dn ??? ??? ghz gz ??? ??? mhz mz ??? ??? khz kz ??? ??? hz hz ??? ??? mv mv ??? ??? mw mw ??? ??? db db ??? ??? ma ma ??? ??? sec sc ??? ??? ms ms ??? ??? s us ??? ??? enter ent ??? ???
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.9 gpib command codes 5-44 table 5-22 miscellaneous function listener code talker request panel key remarks code output format miscellaneous outputting error number ??? errno? integer refer to the error number found in the error message list. local lc ??? ??? lcl reading gpib address ??? ad? integer (0 to 30) specification of the delimitercr lf dl0 ??? ??? lf dl1 ??? ??? dl2 ??? ??? cr lf dl3 ??? ??? lf dl4 ??? ??? service request interruption on s0 ??? ??? off s1 ??? ??? status clear s2 ??? ??? service request mask rqs * rqs? decimal number correspond- ing to the srq bit outputting id of the instrument ??? *idn? manufacturer name (charac- ter string), instrument type (character string), serial number (character string) and revision (character string) initializing the instrument *rst ??? ??? clearing the queues related to the status byte *cls ??? ??? accessing the standard event enable register *ese *ese? decimal number correspond- ing to the register bits reading or clearing the standard event enable register ??? *esr? decimal number correspond- ing to the register bits accessing the service request enable register *sre *sre? decimal number correspond- ing to the register bits reading the status byte and mss bit ??? *stb? decimal number correspond- ing to the status byte accessing the operation status enable regis- ter opr opr? decimal number correspond- ing to the register bits reading or clearing the operation status reg- ister ??? oprevt? decimal number correspond- ing to the register bits reading of the self test result ??? *tst? 0: pass 1: power up & cpu block 2: synthe block 4: rf block 8: if output 16: log/ad block 32: if block for the item which resulted in an error, the return value is the value obtained by oring the related bits. pio data output pioout * ??? ??? outputs data with respect to 0 to 255 to the paral- lel port pins 2 thru 9 as a set of eight-bit data.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-45 5.2.10 example programs this section describes remote control examples used with gpib port. 5.2.10.1 sample programs for setting or reading measurement conditions caution visual basic 4.0 (referred to as vb henceforth) is used in the sample programs shown here. also, national instruments-made gpib board (referred to as ni-made for brevity henceforth) is used for the gpib control board; ni-made driver is used for the control driver. program examples using vb example vb-1: setting the center frequency after performing an analyzer master reset call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "ip") ? preset call ibwrt(spa, "cf 30mz") ? set the center frequency to 30 mhz. example vb-2: setting the start frequency to 300 khz, setting the stop frequency to 800 khz and adding 50 khz to the frequency offset. call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "fa 300kz") ? set the start frequency to 300 khz. call ibwrt(spa, "fb 800kz") ? set the stop frequency to 800 khz. call ibwrt(spa, "fo 50kz") ? add 50 khz to the frequency offset. example vb-3: setting the reference level to 87 db v (in 5 db/div) and the rbw to 100 khz call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "aunits dbuv") ? set the level unit to db v. call ibwrt(spa, "rl 87db") ? set the reference level to 87 db ( v). call ibwrt(spa, "dd 5db") ? set the vertical gradation to 5 db/div. call ibwrt(spa, "rb 100kz") ? set the rbw to 100 khz. example vb-4: setting the instrument using variables dim a as string dim b as string dim c as string a = "10" ? set the character string. b = "2" c = "20" call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf " & a & "mz") ? set the start frequency to a mhz. call ibwrt(spa, "sp " & b & "mz") ? set the span frequency to b mhz. call ibwrt(spa, "at " & c & "db") ? set the att to c db.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-46 example vb-5: saving set values in register 5 and recalling them from register 5 dim labelbuff as string ? character string buffer for the label labelbuff = "spectrum analyzer" ? set the label. call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 30mz") ? set the parameter. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 1mz") call ibwrt(spa, "det pos") call ibwrt(spa, "lon " & labelbuff) ? set the label. call ibwrt(spa, "sv reg_05") ? save the data in register 5. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 1gz") ? change the set parameters. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 200mz") call ibwrt(spa, "rc reg_05") ?recall the data from register 5. example vb-6: enter limit line1 in the table and turn the ltma on call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. ?call ibwrt(spa, "ip") ? reset the spectrum analyzer. call ibwrt(spa, "lmtadel") ? clear the table used for limit line 1. call ibwrt(spa, "aunits dbuv") ? set the unit of level to db v. call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 25mz,-57.5db") ? enter data use by limit line 1. call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 35mz,-57.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 35mz,-55.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 55mz,-55.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 55mz,-52.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 65mz,-52.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 65mz,-50.0db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 68mz,-50.0db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 68mz,-46.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 75mz,-46.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 75mz,-44.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 82mz,-44.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "lmtain 82mz,-42.5db") call ibwrt(spa, "fa 0mz") ? start frequency of 0 mhz call ibwrt(spa, "fb 100mz") ? stop frequency of 100 mhz call ibwrt(spa, "lmta on") ? turn limit line 1 on. example vb-7: sample program of the gated sweep call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "gtsrc ext") ? set the gate signal source to ext. call ibwrt(spa, "gtslp rise") ? set the gate signal slope to plus (+). call ibwrt(spa, "gtwid 10ms") ? set the window width of the gated sweep to 10 msec. call ibwrt(spa, "gtpos 10us") ? set the window position of the gated sweep to 10 sec. call ibwrt(spa, "gtswp on") ? turn the gated sweep on.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-47 5.2.10.2 sample programs for reading data in order to output measurement data or settings, use the "xx?" command. this ensures that the data is read when the device is in the talker mode. available output formats are listed in the table below. the delimiter positioned at the end of data can be specified from 5 types (refer to "others" in the gpib code list). once set, "xx?" command continues to operate until it is changed. 1= sign (a space for plus sign; "-" for minus sign) 2= mantissa of data 3= exponent of data 4= delimiter (cr/lf in initial setting can be changed with "dln" code.) output format frequency d.ddddddddddd e dd cr lf 12 34 data size (1 to 3) is a maximum of 19 bytes, and the unit is hz. example specify "cf?" and output as center frequency. level d.ddddddd e dd cr lf 12 3 4 data size (1 to 3) is a maximum of 19 bytes, and the unit corresponds to each unit setting. example specify "ml?" and output as marker level. time d.ddd e dd cr lf 12 3 4 data size (1 to 3) is a maximum of 19 bytes, and the unit is sec. example specify "sw?" and output sweep time. dddd cr lf 24 the maximum byte of the data size corresponds to the maximum size of the output data. example on/off status or averaging count is output.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-48 example vb-8: output the marker level dim sep as integer call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 30mz") ? set the parameter. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 1mz") call ibwrt(spa, "mk 30mz") ? the marker frequency is set to 30 mhz. call ibwrt(spa, "ts") call ibwrt(spa, "ml?") ? read the marker level. rdbuff = space(30) ? allocate a total of 30 bytes to the buffer area. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data (30 bytes max.). sep = instr(1, rdbuff, vbcrlf, 0) ? check the number of character to the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = "markerlevel = " & left(rdbuff, sep - 1) ? outputs the data on the screen. an example display: markerlevel = -16.22 example vb-9: reading the center frequency and displaying it dim sep as integer call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf?") ? query command for the center frequency. rdbuff = space(30) ? allocate the buffer memory space to 30 bytes. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data (30 bytes max.) sep = instr(1, rdbuff, vbcrlf, 0) ? check the number of characters prior to the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = "centerfreq = " & left(rdbuff, sep - 1) ? display the data on the screen. an example display: centerfreq = 30.000e+6
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-49 example vb-10: reading the level and display unit and displaying them dim sep as integer call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "rl?") ? query command for the reference level. rdbuff = space(30) ? allocate the buffer memory space to 30 bytes. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data (30 bytes max.) from the spectrum analyzer. sep = instr(1, rdbuff, vbcrlf, 0) ? check the number of characters prior to the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = "reflevel = " & left(rdbuff, sep - 1) ? display the data on the screen. call ibwrt(spa, "aunits?") ? query command for the level unit rdbuff = space(3) call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) sep = instr(1, rdbuff, vbcrlf, 0) ? check the number of characters prior to the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = richtextbox1.text & vbcrlf & "unit = " & left(rdbuff, sep - 1) ? display the previous result, followed by a return mark and the ? most recent result. an example display: reflevel = 0.0e + 0 unit = 0 example vb-11: executing the 6 db-down operation, reading the frequency and level and displaying them dim sep as integer call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 30mz") ? set the parameter. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 20mz") call ibwrt(spa, "mkbw 6db") ? set a 6 db down measurement. call ibwrt(spa, "ps") ? peak search. call ibwrt(spa, "xdb") ? perform the 6 db down measurement. call ibwrt(spa, "mfl?") ? query command for the marker level and frequency. rdbuff = space(50) ? allocate the buffer memory space to 50 bytes. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data (50 bytes max.) from the spectrum analyzer. sep = instr(1, rdbuff, vbcrlf, 0) ? check the number of characters prior to the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = "marker freq & level = " & left(rdbuff, sep - 1) ? display the data on the screen. an example display: marker freq & level = 400000, 1.16
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-50 example vb-12: measuring obw and displaying it dim leng1 as integer, leng2 as integer dim obw as string dim fc as string dim searchchar as string call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 30mz") ? send the command already set. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 1mz") call ibwrt(spa, "mk 30mz") call ibwrt(spa, "obw on") call ibwrt(spa, "ts") call ibwrt(spa, "obw?") ? send the query command. rdbuff = space(60) ? allocate the area to the read buffer. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the read buffer (the maximum number of bytes to be output ? is determined by the buffer area size). ? formatting output character string leng1 = instr(1, rdbuff, chr(44), 0) ? search for the first comma. obw = mid(rdbuff, 1, leng1 - 1) ? read the character prior to the comma. doevents leng2 = instr((leng1 + 1), rdbuff, chr(13), 0) ?determine the last data by searching for the delimiter. fc = mid(rdbuff, (leng1 + 1), (leng2 - 1)) ?read the data between the second comma and the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = "obw = " & obw & vbcrlf & "fc = " & fc & vbcrlf ? display the data on the screen. an example display: obw(99%) = 171000 fc = 2.503e+07
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-51 example vb-13: reading and displaying the three largest peak levels dim pk1 as string, pk2 as string, pk3 as string call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 0mz") ? apply the settings. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 100mz") call ibwrt(spa, "ps") ? search for the peak. call ibwrt(spa, "ml?") ? query command to search for the marker level rdbuff = space(25) ? reserve buffer memory space. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? receives the output. pk1 = leftb(rdbuff, (instrb(1, rdbuff, chr(13), 1) - 1)) ? read the data between the starting point and the delimiter. call ibwrt(spa, "nxp") ? search for the next peak. call ibwrt(spa, "ml?") rdbuff = space(25) call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) pk2 = leftb(rdbuff, (instrb(1, rdbuff, chr(13), 1) - 1)) ? read the data between the starting point and the delimiter. call ibwrt(spa, "nxp") call ibwrt(spa, "ml?") rdbuff = space(25) call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) pk3 = leftb(rdbuff, (instrb(1, rdbuff, chr(13), 1) - 1)) ? read the data between the starting point and the delimiter. richtextbox1.text = "1st pk = " & pk1 & vbcrlf & "2nd pk = " & pk2 & vbcrlf & "3rd pk = " & pk3 & vbcrlf ? display the data on the screen. an example display: 1st pk = 9.44 2nd pk = 10.06 3rd pk = 11.84
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-52 5.2.10.3 sample programs for inputting or outputting trace data trace data on the screen includes data for 501 or 1001 points on the frequency axis. for inputting and out- putting data, it is necessary to transfer data for 501 or 1001 points from the left side (start frequency) in order. each point level is expressed by an integer from 1792 to 14592 (however, if the trace exceeds the upper limit of the vertical scale, a value greater than 14592 is transferred). figure 5-4 relationship between screen graticule and trace data trace data can be input or output in either ascii or binary format. table 5-23 trace accuracy specification codes gpib code description tps sets the number of measurement points to 501. tpl sets the number of measurement points to 1001.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-53 table 5-24 i/o formati i/o format description ascii format dddd cr lf delimiter data for one point five-byte data without header input gpib code output gpib code memory a memory b taa tab taa? tab? binary format dd dd .......... dd dd + eoi delimiter low-order byte low-order byte for 1st point for1001/501st point high-order byte high-order byte for 1st point for 1001/501st point each point data is divided into two parts: high-and low- order bytes. eoi signal is attached at the end of the data for continuous 1001/501 points. input gpib code output gpib code memory a memory b tba tbb tba? tbb?
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-54 example vb-14: read the trace data in ascii format dim tr(1000) as string ? allocate an array in the buffer for 1001 points. dim i as integer call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "dl0") ? cr lf eoi call ibwrt(spa, "det neg") ? set it to the negative detector. call ibwrt(spa, "taa?") for i = 0 to 1000 step 1 ? repeat the operation for 1001 points. tr(i) = space(7) ? allocate a total of 7 bytes (5 bytes for the data, and 2 bytes for ? delimiters). call ibrd(spa, tr(i)) ? read the data. richtextbox1.text = richtextbox1.text & "tr(" & str(i) & ") = " & left(tr(i), 5) & vbcrlf ? output it to the screen. doevents next i call ibwrt(spa, "dl3") ? convert the delimiter back into the standard format. example vb-15: read the a memory data in binary format dim tr(1000) as integer ?allocate an array in the buffer for 1001 points dim i as integer dim res as string call ibclr(spa) ?preform a device clear call ibconfig(0, ibcendbitisnormal, 0) ?set the gpib-board software so that the end bit of the ibsta ?variables is set to 1 only when eoi has been received. call ibconfig(spa, ibcreadadjust, 1) ?set the read operation to have each pair of bytes swapped. call ibwrt(spa, "dl2") ?set the delimiter to eoi only. call ibwrt(spa, "det neg") ?set it to the negative detector. call ibwrt(spa, "tba?") ?query for trace a in binary data. call ibrdi(spa, tr(), 1001 * 2) ?read whole 1001 points data. for i = 0 to 1000 step 1 ?repeat the operation for 1001 points. res = res & str(tr(i)) & vbcrlf doevents next i richtextbox1.text = res ?display the data on the screen. call ibwrt(spa, "dl0") ?set the delimiter to default pattern (cr lf eoi). call ibconfig(0, ibcendbitisnormal, 1) ?reset the gpib software to the standard settings. call ibconfig(spa, ibcreadadjust, 0) ?reset the read operation condition to the normal setting.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-55 example vb-16: enter data into a memory in ascii mode (when the 501 point mode is set, change 1001 and 1000 to 501 and 500, respectively.) dim trdata(1000) as integer dim i as integer trdata(0) = 1792 ? provide a temporary data used to test the input (*). for i = 1 to 1000 step 1 trdata(i) = str(val(trdata(i - 1)) + 12) doevents next i ? when there is the data, the steps between the place marked with ? (* ) and this point are not required. call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "ab") ? set trace a to blank. call ibwrt(spa, "taa") ? set trace a in ascii. for i = 0 to 1000 step 1 ? send data corresponding to 1001 points. call ibwrt(spa, cstr(trdata(i))) ? obtain an unused file number. doevents next i call ibwrt(spa, "av") ? set trace a to view.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-56 5.2.10.4 program examples using the status byte example vb-17: execute single sweeping and wait until its finished (when not using srq) dim state as integer call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "si") ? turn the single sweep mode on. call ibwrt(spa, "opr8") ? enables sweep-end bit of operation status register call ibwrt(spa, "*cls") ? clear the status byte. call ibwrt(spa, "si") ? begin sweeping. do call ibwrt(spa, "*stb?") ? query command to read the status byte. rdbuff = space(8) ? reserve a maximum of 8 bytes including the delimiter. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data. state = val(rdbuff) ? convert the character string into numeric values. doevents ? check the loop for other events currently taking place. loop until (state and 128) ? exit from the loop if the sweep-end bit is set to 1. example vb-18:measure cw-acp, and read the measurements (when not using srq signals) dim state as integer dim sep1 as integer, sep2 as integer dim upf as string, lof as string, upl as string, lol as string dim i as integer dim cnt as integer call ibclr(spa) ? perform a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "acpst mnl") ? set acp measurement conditions manually. call ibwrt(spa, "cf 1500mz") ? set a center frequency of 1.5 ghz. call ibwrt(spa, "sp 250kz") ? set a span of 250 khz. call ibwrt(spa, "rb 1kz") ? set an rbw of 1 khz. call ibwrt(spa, "vb 3kz") ? set a vbw of 3 khz. call ibwrt(spa, "st 20sc") ? set a sweep time of 20 sec. call ibwrt(spa, "csbsdel") ? clear the channel space and bandwidth previously set. call ibwrt(spa, "csbsin 50kz,21kz") ? set a channel space of 50 khz and a bandwidth of 21 khz. call ibwrt(spa, "opr 16") ? set measuring bit of operation status register to enabled. call ibwrt(spa, "*cls") ? clear the status byte. call ibwrt(spa, "acp on") ? start the acp measurement. do call ibwrt(spa, "*stb?") ? query for the status byte. rdbuff = space(8) ? allocate 8 bytes. doevents call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data. state = val(rdbuff) ? convert the data in ascii format into binary format. doevents ? execute other events in windows at this time. loop until (state and 128) ? return to the do statement until the measuring bit is set to 1. call ibwrt(spa, "acp?") ? query for an acp measurement result. rdbuff = space(3) ? allocate a total of 3 bytes: 1 byte for integer and 2 bytes for ? delimiter. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data. cnt = cint(rdbuff) ? convert the buffer contents into integer-type data.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-57 for i = 1 to cnt step 1 rdbuff = space(81) ? allocate a total of 81 bytes: 19 4 bytes real number (max.) + ?,? ? 3 + crlf. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data. sep1 = instr(1, rdbuff, ",", 0) ? search for the item separator (this is a comma) from the head of ? the buffer. lof = left(rdbuff, sep1 - 1) ? read the character strings between the head of the buffer and the ? separator. sep2 = instr(sep1 + 1, rdbuff, ",", 0) ? search for the next item separator (this is a comma). lol = mid(rdbuff, sep1 + 1, sep2 - sep1 - 1) ? read the strings between the separators. sep1 = instr(sep2 + 1, rdbuff, ",", 0) ? search for the next item separator (this is a comma). upf = mid(rdbuff, sep2 + 1, sep1 - sep2 - 1) ? read the strings between the separators. sep2 = instr(sep1, rdbuff, chr(13), 0) ? search for the next item separator (this is the cr). upl = mid(rdbuff, sep1 + 1, sep2 - sep1 - 1) ? read the strings between the separators. richtextbox1.text = lof & " hz: " & lol & vbcrlf & upf & " hz: " & upl & vbcrlf ? output the screen. doevents next i example vb-19: reading the peak frequency and level at the end of a single sweep (when using srq) dim boardid as integer dim i as integer dim res as integer dim cflev as string boardid = 0 ? set the board id. call ibclr(spa) ? performs a device clear. call ibwrt(spa, "si") ? turn the single sweep mode on. call ibwrt(spa, "*cls") ? clear the status byte. call ibwrt(spa, "opr 8") ? enables the sweep-end bit of the operation status register call ibwrt(spa, "*sre 128") ? enables the operation status bit of the status byte. call ibwrt(spa, "s0") ? specify send mode for the srq signal. for i = 1 to 10 step 1 ? a loop of 10 times call ibwrt(spa, "si") ? begin sweeping call waitsrq(boardid, res) ? wait until srq interruption occurs. call ibwrt(spa, "ps") ? execute the peak search. call ibwrt(spa, "mfl?") ? query for marker frequency and level rdbuff = space(43) ? reserve 43 bytes. call ibrd(spa, rdbuff) ? read the data. cflev = left(rdbuff, instr(1, rdbuff, chr(13), 0) - 1) richtextbox1.text = richtextbox1.text & "freq ,lebel = " & cflev & vbcrlf ? display data on the screen and start a new line.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.2.10 example programs 5-58 doevents ? execute other events in windows if any. next i example vb-20 outputting the current screen data in bitmap format and saving it into the file (bit- map.bmp) note: depending on the copy image, compression of files and screen status, the amount of bitmap data varies. a data file of up to 300 kb can be output. tmo%=14 ? a timeout of 30 sec. call ibtmo(spa,tmo%) ? a timeout of 30 seconds is set. call ibwrt(spa,"dl2") ? selects only eoi as a delimiter. call ibwrt(spa,"hcimag scol") ? sets a simple color image to make a copy. call ibwrt(spa,"hccmprs off") ? turns the compression mode off. call ibwrt(spa,"bmp?") ? requests the bitmap data output. call ibrdf(spa,"bitmap.bmp") ? saves the bitmap data into the file. call ibwrt(spa,"dl0") ? changes the delimiter back to cr, lf and eoi.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.3 rs-232 remote control function 5-59 5.3 rs-232 remote control function most controllers (such as personal computers) do not have a gpib interface, but the r3131 series can still be controlled using the rs-232 interface. 5.3.1 gpib and rs-232 compatibility the control codes and functions are the same as those used for serial control, except for those which espe- cially refer to the gpib interface. 5.3.2 features of rs-232 remote control the following functions can be controlled by serial control. measurement conditions setup:measurement conditions each can be input in much the same as the key operation on the front panel. output of the setup status: both the setup status and data can be read out. status: status bytes which show the current status of the analyzer can be read out in the same way gpib readouts. 5.3.3 parameter setup window figure 5-5 parameter setup 1. transmission speed: select from 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200. 2. data length: select seven bits or eight bits as the number of data bits. 3. stop bit: select one or two bits. 4. parity check: select from none, odd or even. 5. flow control: select either none or xon/xoff.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.3.4 interface connection 5-60 5.3.4 interface connection figure 5-6 connection between the controller and the analyzer although the analyzer uses only three pins, the controller side needs more connections for input and out- put. note: 1. when you send or receive data using the cable connections shown in figure 5-7, set xon/xoff to valid (on). 2. dcd, dtr and dsr are not used in the analyzer. when you use cts and rts, use a cable with cross-con- nection to connect the controller to the analyzer. flow control is not performed using cts or rts. set xon/ xoff to valid (on) to perform flow control. personal computer rs-232 cable spectrum analyzer rear panel rs232 connector
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.3.5 data format 5-61 figure 5-7 cable wiring diagram 5.3.5 data format transmission messages between the analyzer and the controller are in ascii code character strings and followed by carriage returns (cr) and line feeds (lf). figure 5-8 data format pin no.(9pin) signal name remarks 1 dcd:data carrier detector receive carrier detection 2 rxd: receive data 3 txd: transmit data 4 dtr: data terminal ready 5 gnd: ground signal ground 6 dsr: data set ready 7 rts: request to send request signal for sending 8 cts: clear to send clear signal for sending 9 ci: data signal rate selector n.c 9pin 9pin 2 rxd 3 txd 3 txd 2 rxd 5 gnd 5 gnd 4 dtr 6 dsr 1 dcd 7 rts 8 cts spectrum analyzer side controller side lf cr70 + e00000000000. 3 + cf ? crlf controller side spectrum analyzer side
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.3.6 differences between rs-232 and gpib 5-62 note: 1. transmission data must be in ascii code. 2. delimit the data from the controller with or . query data and the gpib delimiters are the same. therefore, send dl0 or dl3 after serial port was opened (refer to the example of rs-232 remote pro- gram). data transmission example: personal computers can recognize both cf 30.0mz and cf 30.0mz . the format for query data is +3.00000000000e+07 (send dl0 or dl3). the output data of this rs-232 and gpib are the same number of characters except delimiters (cr and lf). 5.3.6 differences between rs-232 and gpib command code trace data input or output can only be formatted in ascii. bitmap data files cannot be transferred. note: the following commands are unavailable: tba, tbb and bmp. 5.3.7 panel control during remote control operation, spectrum analyzer panel control is affected as follows. the remote lamp does not light. the key panel is not disabled. note:if any settings are changed during remote control, the operation of the analyzer may become unstable.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 5.3.8 remote control usage examples 5-63 5.3.8 remote control usage examples the following examples show typical remote control commands, and are written in ?microsoft quick ba- sic? (licensed by microsoft corporation). the open command statement open? com1: 9600, n, 8, 1, asc? for random as #1 shown below has the following characteristics: baud rate is 9600 bps, no parity, 8 bit data length, stop bit of 1, ascii format and random access mode. example: this program is used to check the status byte register to see if the sweep has been completed. open ?com1:9600,n,8,1,asc? for random as #1 print #1, ?dl3? ? cr and lf are set as the gpib delimiter. print #1, ?si? ? single sweep is performed. print #1, ?opr8? ? sweep completion bit in the gpib operation register is set. print #1, ?cls? ? clearing the status bytes. print #1, ?si? ? single sweep is performed. meas.loop: ? read out the status bytes. print #1, ?*stb?? input #1, stat if (stat and 128) = 0 then goto meas.loop print #1, ?ps? ? peak search. print #1, ?ml?? ? read out the peak level. input#1,mlevel print mlevel end
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.1 r3264 specifications 6-1 6 specifications 6.1 r3264 specifications (1) frequency characteristics specification frequency range: 9 khz to 3.5 ghz harmonic order n=1 frequency reading accuracy: (frequency reading frequency reference accuracy + span span accu- racy + 0.15 resolution bandwidth+ 10 hz) marker frequency counter (span < 1 ghz) accuracy (s/n > 25 db): delta counter: resolution: (marker frequency frequency reference accuracy + 5 hz n + 1lsd) ( ? frequency frequency reference accuracy + 10 hz n + 2lsd) 1 hz to 1 khz reference frequency source stability aging: temperature stability: opt21 aging: temperature stability: opt22 aging: temperature stability: a warm-up (nominal): opt23 frequency accuracy: aging: temperature stability: warm-up: 3 10 -8 /day 1 10 -7 /year 1 10 -7 temperature range: 0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 2 c 5 10 -9 /day 8 10 -8 /year 5 10 -8 temperature range: 0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 2 c 3 10 -10 /day 2 10 -8 /year 5 10 -9 temperature range: 0 to 50 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 1 10 -8 /30 min in reference to the frequency measured 24 hours after 5 10 -9 /60 min the power-on at an ambient temperature of 25 c 5 10 -9 1 10 -10 /month 1 10 -9 temperature range:0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 1 10 -9 /15 min {
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.1 r3264 specifications 6-2 characteristics specification frequency stability residual fm (zero span): drift: < 3 hz np-p/0.1 sec same as the reference source (after a warm-up of 60 min.) signal purity: (dbc/hz) frequency span range: accuracy: 20 hz to 3.5 ghz, zero span 1% resolution bandwidth (3db) range: accuracy: selectivity: 1 hz to 10 mhz (1, 3, 10 sequences), 5 mhz 25%: rbw = 3 mhz, 5 mhz 15%: rbw = 100 hz to 1 mhz 25% (25 c 10 c): rbw = 30 hz 10%:rbw=1 hz to 100 hz (digital filter) <15:1 (rbw = 100 hz to 5 mhz) <20:1 (rbw = 30 hz) <5:1 (rbw = 1 hz to 100 hz, digital filter) video bandwidth range: 1 hz to 10 mhz (1, 3, 10 sequences), 5 mhz frequency sweep sweep time: zero span: span > 0 hz: accuracy: trigger: 1 sec to 1000 sec 20 msec to 1000 sec 3% (excluding digital filters) free run, line, video, external, if gated sweep gate position: resolution: gate width: resolution: trigger: 100 nsec to 1 sec 100 nsec 1 sec to 1 sec 100 nsec if (mixer input is -40 dbm or more) external trigger or external gate delayed sweep delay time: resolution: 100 nsec to 1 sec 100 nsec offset frequency 1 khz 10 khz 100 khz 1 mhz 9 khz to 1 ghz -100 -113 -118 -135 1 ghz to 2.6 ghz -100 -110 -118 -135 2.6 ghz to 3.5 ghz -98 -108 -112 -135
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.1 r3264 specifications 6-3 (2) amplitude range (3) dynamic range characteristics specification measurement range: +30 dbm to average noise level maximum safe input average continuous power (input att 10db): dc input: +30 dbm (1w) 50v display range log: linear: 10 10div 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5db/div 10% of reference level/div reference level range log: linear: -140 dbm to +60 dbm (in 0.1 db steps) 22.4nv to 223v (steps of about 1% of full scale) input att range: 0 to 75 db (5 db steps) characteristics specification average noise level: 1 db gain compression: 10 mhz to 100 mhz -3 dbm 100 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 dbm resolution bandwidth 100 hz (analog), input att 0 db, video bandwidth 1 hz frequency average noise level 10 khz -100 dbm 100 khz -101 dbm 1 mhz -125 dbm 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz -(130 - 2f (ghz)) dbm resolution bandwidth 1 hz (digital), input att 0 db frequency average noise level 10 khz -120 dbm 100 khz -121 dbm 1 mhz -141 dbm 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz -(150 - 2f (ghz)) dbm
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.1 r3264 specifications 6-4 (4) spurious response (5) amplitude accuracy characteristics specification 2nd order harmonic distortion: < -70 dbc (10 mhz to 3.5 ghz, mixer level -30 dbm) 2 signal 3rd order harmonic distortion: ( ? f 5khz when digital filters are used) < -70 dbc (10 mhz to 100 mhz, mixer level -30 dbm) < -80 dbc (100 mhz to 1 ghz, mixer level -30 dbm) < -85 dbc (1 ghz to 3.5 ghz, mixer level -30 dbm) residual response (no input, input att 0 db, 50 ? termination) < -100 dbm (1 mhz to 3.5 ghz) < -90 dbm (300 khz to 3.5 ghz) characteristics specification frequency response (input att 10 db) flatness (relative values): for a 30 mhz calibration single: 1.5 db (9 khz to 3.5 ghz) 3.0 db (9 khz to 3.5 ghz) calibration signal accuracy (30 mhz): -10 dbm 0.3 db if gain error (after automatic calibration): 0 dbm to -50 dbm 0.5 db 0 dbm to -80 dbm 0.7 db scale display accuracy (after automatic calibration) log: linear: 0 db to -90 db 0.85 db max 0.2 db/1 db 5% of reference level input att switching error (in ref- erence to 10 db, at 15 db to 75 db) 9 khz to 3.5 ghz 1.1 db/5 db steps, 2.0 db max resolution bandwidth switching error (resolution bandwidth in reference to 300 khz, after automatic cali- bration): < 0.3 db (rbw = 100 hz to 5 mhz) < 1.0 db (rbw = 30 hz) < 0.5 db (rbw = 1 hz to 100hz, digital filter) total level accuracy 1.0 db (typical) frequency range: 50 mhz to 2.6 ghz rbw: 3 khz to 1 mhz frequency span < rbw 20 input att: 10 db log scale display: 0 db to -50 db reference level: 0 dbm to -50 dbm detection mode: sample ambient temperature: 20 c to 30 c s/n ratio 20 db
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.1 r3264 specifications 6-5 (6) input and output characteristics specification rf input connector: impedance: vswr (input att 10 db): n-type female 50 ? (nominal) < 1.5 : 1 (< 3.5 ghz) (nominal) calibration signal output connector: frequency: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, front panel 30 mhz (1 frequency reference accuracy) 50 ? (nominal) -10 dbm 0.3 db 10 mhz frequency reference output connector: impedance: frequency accuracy: amplitude range: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 10 mhz frequency reference accuracy 0 dbm 5 db 10 mhz frequency reference input connector: frequency: frequency (opt25): impedance: amplitude range: bnc female, rear panel 10 mhz automatically switched to 10 mhz, 15 mhz or 19.6608 mhz 50 ? (nominal) -5 dbm to +5 dbm probe power supply: * 12.6v (100ma) (nominal) 21.4 mhz, if output connector: impedance: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 421.4 mhz, if output connector: impedance: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) video output connector: vga (15 pins, female), rear panel 640 480 dots (equivalent to vga) x axis output connector: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel 1 k ? (nominal), dc coupled about -5v to +5v y axis output connector: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel 220 ? (nominal) about 2v for full scale (with 10 db/div) external trigger input connector: impedance: trigger level: bnc female, rear panel 10 k ? (nominal), dc coupled ttl level * this probe power supply is not available if opt22 or opt23 is installed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.1 r3264 specifications 6-6 (7) general specifications external gate input connector: impedance: stops sweeping: allowed to sweep: bnc female, rear panel 10 k ? (nominal), dc coupled while a ttl output is at low level. while a ttl output is at high level. trigger output connector: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel ttl level i/o interface gpib: rs232: printer: extended i/o port: fdd: ieee-488 bus connector, rear panel d-sub 9pins, rear panel d-sub 25pins, rear panel d-sub 25pins, rear panel 3.5 inch floppy disk drive direct print: output with esc/p, pcl, esc/p raster commands characteristics specification temperature operating environment range storage environment range relative humidity 0 c to +50 c -20 c to +60 c 85% or less (without condensation) ac input power source automatic switching to 100 vac or 220 vac for 100 vac: 100 to 120 vac, 50 or 60 hz for 220 vac: 220 to 240 vac, 50 or 60 hz power consumption 300 va or below mass 18 kg or less (not including options, accessories, etc.) dimensions approximately 178(h) 355(w) 423.5(d)mm (rear feet and connectors are not included in above dimensions) characteristics specification
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-7 6.2 r3267 specifications (1) frequency characteristics specification frequency range: frequency reading accuracy: (frequency reading frequency reference accuracy + span span accu- racy + 0.15 resolution bandwidth+ 10 hz) marker frequency counter (span < 1 ghz) accuracy (s/n > 25 db): delta counter: resolution: (marker frequency frequency reference accuracy + 5 hz n + 1lsd) ( ? frequency frequency reference accuracy + 10 hz n + 2lsd) 1 hz to 1 khz reference frequency source stability aging: temperature stability: opt21 aging: temperature stability: opt22 aging: temperature stability: a warm-up (nominal): opt23 frequency accuracy: aging: temperature stability: warm-up: 3 10 -8 /day 1 10 -7 /year 1 10 -7 temperature range: 0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 2 c 5 10 -9 /day 8 10 -8 /year 5 10 -8 temperature range: 0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 2 c 3 10 -10 /day 2 10 -8 /year 5 10 -9 temperature range: 0 to 50 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 1 10 -8 /30 min in reference to the frequency measured 24 hours after 5 10 -9 /60 min the power-on at an ambient temperature of 25 c 5 10 -9 1 10 -10 /month 1 10 -9 temperature range:0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 1 10 -9 /15 min 100 hz to 8 ghz frequency frequency band harmonic order n 100 hz to 3.5 ghz 0 1 1.6 ghz to 3.5 ghz 1 1 3.5 ghz to 7 ghz 2 1 6.9 ghz to 8 ghz 3 1 built-in yig tuning pre-selector at 1.6 ghz to 8 ghz {
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-8 characteristics specification frequency stability residual fm (zero span): drift: < 3 hz np-p/0.1 sec same as the reference source (after a warm-up of 60 min.) signal purity: (dbc/hz) frequency span range: accuracy: 20 hz to 8 ghz, zero span 1% resolution bandwidth (3db) range: accuracy: selectivity: 1 hz to 10 mhz (1, 3, 10 sequences), 5 mhz 25%: rbw = 3 mhz, 5 mhz 15%: rbw = 100 hz to 1 mhz 25% (25 c 10 c): rbw = 30 hz 10%:rbw=1 hz to 100 hz (digital filters) <15:1 (rbw = 100 hz to 5 mhz) <20:1 (rbw = 30 hz) <5:1 (rbw = 1 hz to 100 hz, digital filters) video bandwidth range: 1 hz, 10 mhz (1, 3, 10 sequences), 5 mhz frequency sweep sweep time: zero span: span > 0 hz: accuracy: trigger: 1 sec to 1000 sec 20 msec to 1000 sec 3% (excluding digital filters) free run, line, video, external, if gated sweep gate position: resolution: gate width: resolution: trigger: 100 nsec to 1 sec 100 nsec 1 sec to 1 sec 100 nsec if (mixer input is -40 dbm or more) external trigger or external gate delayed sweep delay time: resolution: 100 nsec to 1 sec 100 nsec offset frequency 1 khz 10 khz 100 khz 1 mhz 100 hz to 1 ghz -100 -113 -118 -135 1 ghz to 2.6 ghz -100 -110 -118 -135 2.6 ghz to 8 ghz -98 -108 -112 -135
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-9 (2) amplitude range (3) dynamic range characteristics specification measurement range: +30 dbm to average noise level maximum safe input average continuous power (input att 10db): dc input: +30 dbm (1w) 0v (dc signal must not be applied) display range log: linear: 10 10div 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5db/div 10% of reference level/div reference level range log: linear: -140 dbm to +60 dbm (in 0.1 db steps) 22.4nv to 223v (steps of about 1% of full scale) input att range 0 to 75 db (5 db steps) characteristics specification average noise level 1 db gain compression: 10 mhz to 100 mhz -3 dbm 100 mhz to 8ghz 0 dbm resolution bandwidth 100 hz (analog), input att 0 db, video bandwidth 1 hz frequency frequency band average noise level 1 khz 0 -90 dbm 10 khz 0 -100 dbm 100 khz 0 -101 dbm 1 mhz 0 -125 dbm 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 -(130 - f (ghz)) dbm 1.6 ghz to 3.5 ghz 1 -125 dbm 3.5 ghz to 7.0 ghz 2 -125 dbm 6.9 ghz to 8.0 ghz 3 -125 dbm resolution bandwidth 1 hz (digital), input att 0 db frequency frequency band average noise level 10 khz 0 -120 dbm 100 khz 0 -121 dbm 1 mhz 0 -141 dbm 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 -(150 - f (ghz)) dbm 1.6 ghz to 3.5 ghz 1 -145 dbm 3.5 ghz to 7.0 ghz 2 -145 dbm 6.9 ghz to 8.0 ghz 3 -145 dbm
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-10 (4) spurious response characteristics specification 2nd order harmonic distortion 2 signal 3rd order harmonic distortion image/multiple/out-band response residual response (no input, input att 0 db, 50 ? termination) frequency range frequency band mixer level < -70 dbc 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 -30 dbm < -90 dbc > 1.6 ghz 1, 2, 3 -10 dbm ? f 5khz (when digital filters are used) frequency range frequency band mixer level < -70 dbc 10 mhz to 100 mhz 0 -30 dbm < -80 dbc 100 mhz to 1 ghz 0 -30 dbm < -85 dbc 1 ghz to 3.5 ghz 0 -30 dbm < -90 dbc 1.6 ghz to 8 ghz 1, 2, 3 -30 dbm frequency range < -70 dbc 10 mhz to 8 ghz frequency range < -100 dbm 1 mhz to 3.5 ghz < -90 dbm 300 khz to 8 ghz
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-11 (5) amplitude accuracy characteristics specification frequency response (with an input att of 10 db, band 1, 2 or 3 is automatically tuned on the prese- lector): flatness within the bands (relative values) complementary error due to band switching 0.5 db for a 30 mhz calibration signal 100 hz to 8.0 ghz 3.0 db calibration signal accuracy (30 mhz) -10 dbm 0.3 db if gain error (after automatic calibration) 0 dbm to -50 dbm 0.5 db 0 dbm to -80 dbm 0.7 db scale display accuracy (after automatic calibration) log: linear: 0 db to -90 db 0.85 db max 0.2 db/1 db 5% of reference level input att switching error (in ref- erence to 10 db, at 15 db to 75 db) 100 hz to 8 ghz 1.1 db/5 db steps, 2.0 db max resolution bandwidth switching error (resolution bandwidth in reference to 300 khz, after automatic cali- bration): < 0.3 db (rbw = 100 hz to 5 mhz) < 1.0 db (rbw = 30 hz) < 0.5 db (rbw = 1 hz to 100hz, digital filters) total level accuracy 1.0 db (typical) frequency range: 50 mhz to 2.6 ghz (frequency band : 0) rbw: 3 khz to 1 mhz frequency span < rbw 20 input att: 10 db logarithmic scale display: 0 db to -50 db reference level: 0 dbm to -50 dbm detection mode: sample ambient temperature: 20 c to 30 c s/n ratio 20 db frequency band frequency range 0 100 hz to 3.5 ghz 1.5 db 0 50 mhz to 2.6 ghz 1.0 db 1 1.6 ghz to 3.5 ghz 1.5 db 2 3.5 ghz to 7.0 ghz 1.5 db 3 6.9 ghz to 8.0 ghz 1.5 db
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-12 (6) input and output characteristics specification rf input connector: impedance: vswr (input att 10 db setting frequency): n-type female 50 ? (nominal) < 1.5 : 1 (< 3.5 ghz) (nominal) < 2.1 : 1 (> 3.5 ghz) (nominal) calibration signal output connector: frequency: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, front panel 30 mhz (1 frequency reference accuracy) 50 ? (nominal) -10 dbm 0.3 db 10 mhz frequency reference output connector: impedance: frequency accuracy: amplitude range: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 10 mhz frequency reference accuracy 0 dbm 5 db 10 mhz frequency reference input connector: frequency: frequency (opt25): impedance: amplitude range: bnc female, rear panel 10 mhz automatically switched to 10 mhz, 15 mhz or 19.6608 mhz 50 ? (nominal) -5 dbm to +5 dbm probe power supply: * 12.6v (100ma) (nominal) 21.4 mhz, if output connector: impedance: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 421.4 mhz, if output connector: impedance: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) video output connector: vga (15 pins, female), rear panel 640 480 dots (equivalent to vga) x axis output connector: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel 1 k ? (nominal), dc coupled about -5v to +5v y axis output connector: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel 220 ? (nominal) about 2v for full scale (with 10 db/div) external trigger input connector: impedance: trigger level: bnc female, rear panel 10 k ? (nominal), dc coupled ttl level * this probe power supply is not available if opt22 or opt23 is installed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.2 r3267 specifications 6-13 (7) general specifications external gate input connector: impedance: stops sweeping: allowed to sweep: bnc female, rear panel 10 k ? (nominal), dc coupled while a ttl output is at low level. while a ttl output is at high level. trigger output connector: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel ttl level i/o interface gpib: rs232: printer: extended i/o port: fdd: ieee-488 bus connector, rear panel d-sub 9pins, rear panel d-sub 25pins, rear panel d-sub 25pins, rear panel 3.5 inch floppy disk drive direct print: output with esc/p, pcl, esc/p raster commands characteristics specification temperature operating environment range storage environment range relative humidity 0 c to +50 c -20 c to +60 c 85% or less (without condensation) ac input power source automatic switching to 100 vac or 220 vac for 100 vac: 100 to 120 vac, 50 or 60 hz for 220 vac: 220 to 240 vac, 50 or 60 hz power consumption 300 va or below mass 18 kg or less (not including options, accessories, etc.) dimensions approximately 178(h) 355(w) 423.5(d)mm (rear feet and connectors are not included in above dimensions) characteristics specification
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-14 6.3 r3273 specifications (1) frequency characteristics specification frequency range: frequency reading accuracy: (frequency reading frequency reference accuracy + span span accu- racy + 0.15 resolution bandwidth+ 10 hz) marker frequency counter (span < 1 ghz) accuracy (s/n > 25 db): delta counter: resolution: (marker frequency frequency reference accuracy + 5 hz n + 1lsd) ( ? frequency frequency reference accuracy + 10 hz n + 2lsd) 1 hz to 1 khz reference frequency source stability aging: temperature stability: opt21 aging: temperature stability: opt22 aging: temperature stability: a warm-up (nominal): opt23 frequency accuracy: aging: temperature stability: warm-up: 3 10 -8 /day 1 10 -7 /year 1 10 -7 temperature range: 0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 2 c 5 10 -9 /day 8 10 -8 /year 5 10 -8 temperature range: 0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 2 c 3 10 -10 /day 2 10 -8 /year 5 10 -9 temperature range: 0 to 50 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 1 10 -8 /30 min in reference to the frequency measured 24 hours after 5 10 -9 /60 min the power-on at an ambient temperature of 25 c 5 10 -9 1 10 -10 /month 1 10 -9 temperature range:0 to 40 c in reference to the frequency measured at 25 c 1 10 -9 /15 min 100 hz to 26.5 ghz 18 ghz to 60 ghz (external mixer used, synchonizable with up to 325 ghz) frequency frequency band harmonic order n 100 hz to 3.5 ghz 0 1 3.5 ghz to 7.5 ghz 1 1 7.4 ghz to 15.4 ghz 2 2 15.2 ghz to 26.5 ghz 3 4 built-in yig tuning pre-selector at 3.5 ghz to 26.5 ghz {
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-15 characteristics specification frequency stability residual fm: drift: < 3 hz np-p/0.1 sec same as the reference source (after a warm-up of 60 min.) signal purity: (dbc/hz) frequency span range: accuracy: 20 hz to 26.5 ghz, zero span 1% resolution bandwidth (3db) range: accuracy: selectivity: 1 hz to 10 mhz (1, 3, 10 sequences), 5 mhz 25%: rbw = 3 mhz, 5 mhz 15%: rbw = 100 hz to 1 mhz 25% (25 c 10 c): rbw = 30 hz 10%: rbw = 1 hz to 100 hz (digital filters) <15:1 (rbw = 100 hz to 5 mhz) <20:1 (rbw = 30 hz) <5:1 (rbw = 1 hz to 100hz, digital filters) video bandwidth range: 1 hz to 10 mhz (1, 3, 10 sequences), 5 mhz frequency sweep sweep time: zero span: span > 0 hz: accuracy: trigger: 1 sec to 1000 sec 20 msec to 1000 sec 3% (excluding digital filters) free-run, line, video, external, if gated sweep gate position: resolution: gate width: resolution: trigger: 100 nsec to 1 sec 100 nsec 1 sec to 1 sec 100 nsec if (mixer input is -40 dbm or more) external trigger or external gate delayed sweep delay time: resolution: 100 ns to 1 s 100 ns offset frequency 1 khz 10 khz 100 khz 1 mhz 100 hz to 1 ghz -100 -113 -118 -135 1 ghz to 2.6 ghz -100 -110 -118 -135 2.6 ghz to 7.5 ghz -98 -108 -112 -135 7.4 ghz to 15.4 ghz -89 -102 -106 -129 15.2 ghz to 26.5 ghz -83 -96 -100 -123
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-16 (2) amplitude range (3) dynamic range characteristics specification measurement range +30 dbm to average noise level maximum safe input average continuous power (input att 10db): dc input: +30 dbm (1w) 0v (dc signal must not be applied) display range log: linear: 10 10div 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5db/div 10% of reference level/div reference level range log: linear: -140 dbm to +60 dbm (in 0.1 db steps) 22.4nv to 223v (steps of about 1% of full scale) input att range 0 to 70 db (10 db steps) characteristics specification average noise level 1 db gain compression: 10 mhz to 100 mhz -3 dbm 100 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 dbm 3.5 ghz to 7.5 ghz -10 dbm 7.5 ghz to 26.5 ghz -3 dbm resolution bandwidth 100 hz (analog) , input att 0 db, video bandwidth 1 hz frequency frequency band average noise level 1 khz 0 -90 dbm 10 khz 0 -100 dbm 100 khz 0 -101 dbm 1 mhz 0 -125 dbm 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 -(130 - f (ghz)) dbm 3.5 ghz to 7.5 ghz 1 -125 dbm 7.4 ghz to 15.4 ghz 2 -122 dbm 15.2 ghz to 22.0 ghz 3 -120 dbm 22.0 ghz to 26.5 ghz 3 -117 dbm resolution bandwidth 1 hz (digital), input att 0 db frequency frequency band average noise level 10 khz 0 -120 dbm 100 khz 0 -121 dbm 1 mhz 0 -141 dbm 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 -(150 - f (ghz)) dbm 3.5 ghz to 7.5 ghz 1 -145 dbm 7.4 ghz to 15.4 ghz 2 -142 dbm 15.2 ghz to 22.0 ghz 3 -140 dbm 22.0 ghz to 26.5 ghz 3 -137 dbm
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-17 (4) spurious response characteristics specification 2nd order harmonic distortion 2 signal 3rd order harmonic distortion image/multiple/out-band response residual response (no input, input att 0 db, 50 ? termination) frequency range frequency band mixer level < -70 dbc 10 mhz to 3.5 ghz 0 -30 dbm < -100 dbc > 3.5 ghz 1, 2, 3 -10 dbm ? f 5khz (when digital filters are used) frequency range frequency band mixer level < -70 dbc 10 mhz to 100 mhz 0 -30 dbm < -80 dbc 100 mhz to 1 ghz 0 -30 dbm < -85 dbc 1 ghz to 3.5 ghz 0 -30 dbm < -70 dbc 3.5 ghz to 7.5 ghz 1 -30 dbm < -75 dbc 7.5 ghz to 26.5 ghz 2, 3 -30 dbm frequency range < -70 dbc 10 mhz to 18 ghz < -60 dbc 10 mhz to 23 ghz < -50 dbc 10 mhz to 26.5 ghz frequency range < -100 dbm 1 mhz to 3.5 ghz < -90 dbc 300 khz to 26.5 ghz
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-18 (5) amplitude accuracy characteristics specification frequency response (with an input att of 10 db, band 1, 2 or 3 is automatically tuned on the prese- lector): flatness within the bands relative values complementary error due to band switching 0.5 db for a 30 mhz calibration signal 100 hz to 26.5 ghz 5.0 db calibration signal accuracy (30 mhz) -10 dbm 0.3 db if gain error (after automatic calibration) 0 dbm to -50 dbm 0.5 db 0 dbm to -80 dbm 0.7 db scale display accuracy (after automatic calibration) log: linear: 0 db to -90 db 0.85 db max 0.2 db/1 db 5% of reference level input att switching error (in ref- erence to 10 db, at 20 db to 70 db) 100 hz to 12.4 ghz 1.1 db/10 db steps, 2.0 db max 12.4 hz to 18 ghz 1.3 db/10 db steps, 2.5 db max 18 ghz to 26.5 ghz 1.8 db/10 db steps, 3.5 db max resolution bandwidth switching error (resolution bandwidth in reference to 300 khz, after automatic cali- bration): < 0.3 db (rbw = 100 hz to 5 mhz) < 1.0 db (rbw = 30 hz) < 0.5 db (rbw = 1 hz to 100 hz, digital filters) total level accuracy 1.0 db (typical) frequency range: 50 mhz to 2.6 ghz (frequency band : 0) rbw: 3 khz to 1 mhz frequency span < rbw 20 input att: 10 db logarithmic scale display: 0 db to -50 db reference level: 0 dbm to -50 dbm detection mode: sample ambient temperature: 20 c to 30 c s/n ratio 20 db frequency band frequency range 0 100 hz to 3.5 ghz1.5 db 0 50 mhz to 2.6 ghz1.0 db 1 3.5 ghz to 7.5 ghz1.5 db 2 7.4 ghz to 15.4 ghz3.5 db 3 15.4 ghz to 26.5 ghz4.0 db
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-19 (6) input and output characteristics specification rf input connector: impedance: vswr (input att 10 db): n-type female (can be converted to sma) 50 ? (nominal) < 1.5 : 1 (< 3.5 ghz) (nominal) < 2.1 : 1 (> 3.5 ghz) (nominal) calibration signal output connector: frequency: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, front panel 30 mhz (1 frequency reference accuracy) 50 ? (nominal) -10 dbm 0.3 db 10 mhz frequency reference output connector: impedance: frequency accuracy: amplitude range: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 10 mhz frequency reference accuracy 0 dbm 5 db 10 mhz frequency reference input connector: frequency: frequency (opt25): impedance: amplitude range: bnc female, rear panel 10 mhz automatically switched to 10 mhz, 15 mhz or 19.6608 mhz 50 ? (nominal) 0 dbm 5 db probe power supply: * 12.6v (100ma) (nominal) 21.4 mhz, if output connector: impedance: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 421.4 mhz, if output connector: impedance: bnc female, rear panel 50 ? (nominal) 1st lo output connector: impedance: frequency range: amplitude: sma female, front panel 50 ? (nominal) 3.921 ghz to 7.921 ghz > +10 dbm video output connector: vga (15 pins, female), rear panel 640 480 dots (equivalent to vga) x axis output connector: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel 1 k ? (nominal), dc coupled about -5v to +5v y axis output connector: impedance: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel 220 ? (nominal) about 2v for full scale (with 10 db/div) * this probe power supply is not available if opt22 or opt23 is installed.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.3 r3273 specifications 6-20 (7) general specifications external trigger input connector: impedance: trigger level: bnc female, rear panel 10 k ? (nominal), dc coupled ttl level external gate input connector: impedance: stops sweeping: allowed to sweep: bnc female, rear panel 10 k ? (nominal), dc coupled while a ttl output is at low level. while a ttl output is at high level. trigger output connector: amplitude: bnc female, rear panel ttl level i/o interface gpib: rs232: printer: extended i/o port: fdd: ieee-488 bus connector, rear panel d-sub 9pins, rear panel d-sub 25pins, rear panel d-sub 25pins, rear panel 3.5 inch floppy disk drive direct print: output with esc/p, pcl, esc/p raster commands characteristics specification temperature operating environment range storage environment range relative humidity 0 c to +50 c -20 c to +60 c 85% or less (without condensation) ac input power source automatic switching to 100 vac or 220 vac for 100 vac: 100 to 120 vac, 50 or 60 hz for 220 vac: 220 to 240 vac, 50 or 60 hz power consumption 300 va or below mass 18 kg or less (not including options, accessories, etc.) dimensions approximately 178(h) 355(w) 423.5(d)mm (rear feet and connectors are not included in above dimensions) characteristics specification
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) 6.4 specifications for the memory card (option) 6-21 6.4 specifications for the memory card (option) specifications memory card connector 68-pin two piece connector interface compliant with jeida ver4.0 external dimensions type-i (86 54 3.3mm) type-ii (86 54 5mm) environmental conditions operating temperature: 0 c to 55 c storage temperature: -20 c to 60 c relative humidity: 95% or less (without condensation) note: the data shown above may vary depending on card manufacturers.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.1 before contacting with a problem a-1 appendix a.1 before contacting with a problem when a problem occurs, check the list below. if you cannot fix the problem, contact a sales representative from the address and telephone number located at the end of this manual. the problems shown below are not covered by warranty. problem probable cause solution power indicator does not light. two power switches are not turned on. the main power switch (on the rear panel) and the power switch (on the front panel) must be turned on. the power cable is not con- nected properly. turn off the main power and the power switches, and then connect the power cable to the ac power con- nector on the analyzer. finally, con- nect the other end of the power cable to the outlet (refer to section 1.3.4). the power fuse is blown. check the power fuse (refer to section 1.3.3). if the fuse is blown, an abnor- mal condition may have occurred. contact a sales representative for repair. error message is displayed. an operational error occurred. refer to the list of error messages to fix the problem (see section a.2). a malfunction or failure of the analyzer is the cause of this problem. no trace is displayed on the screen with the sweep indicator lit. trace intensity is too low. adjust the trace using the inten- sity button. bad connection with the input cable or connector. reconnect the input cable or connec- tor. not sweeping the sweep mode is set to sin- gle. set the mode to repeat. signal level is incorrect. amptd cal has not been adjusted. perform the calibration. pressing a key has no effect. gpib is set to the remote con- trol. cancel the program currently being executed and press the lcl key. cannot read from the floppy disk drive (recall function). defective floppy disk confirm that the floppy disk is defec- tive by trying it in another drive. defective floppy disk drive contact a sales representative for repairs.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.1 before contacting with a problem a-2 problem probable cause solution cannot save to a floppy disk (save function). the write protect tab is in the on position. move the write protect tab to the off position. the floppy disk is not format- ted. format the floppy disk. insufficient memory use another floppy disk.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.2 error message a-3 a.2 error message in this section, the error messages that are displayed while the analyzer is being used are described. code error message remarks 1 sound demodulation is active. turn sound demodulation off. 2 vertical scale is set to linear. set the scale to db/div. 3 preselector is turned on. select manual tuning. 5 span is set to 0 hz. change the span. 7 trace mode is set to blank. change to write mode. 8 not available for baseband freq. move marker before executing. 9 power measurement is active. turn power measurement off. 10 signal track is active. turn signal track off. 11 noise measurement is active. turn noise measurement off. 13 frequency counter is active. turn frequency counter off. 14 delta marker is not active. turn the delta marker on. 15 external mixer is selected. set the mixer to internal. 17 not available in separate-screen mode. set to full-screen mode. 18 view/blank trace mode is selected. set the trace to write mode. 19 trigger source incorrect. set the trigger source to video/if. set the trigger source to video or if. change the trigger source to video or if. 20 marker not on selected trace. move the marker first. 22 scale not set to 10db/div. change to 10db/div first. 23 parameter is out of range. 25 calculated power is off the scale. calculated result is outside the scale. set the reference level to a higher value. 26 editor is active. quit the editor first.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.2 error message a-4 27 frequency table contains no data. there is no data in the frequency table. enter data into the table. 28 no cal signal detected. check the cal out signal. 30 not available for obw measurements. quit obw first. 31 not available for harmonics measurements. quit harmonics first. 32 not available for spurious measurements. quit spurious first. 33 not available for acp measurements. quit acp first. 34 not available for acp graph mode. quit acp graph mode first. 35 eye opening measurement is active. turn eye opening measurement off. the eye opening measurement function is being performed. turn the eye opening measurement func- tion off. 36 only available in separate-screen mode using sample detector. 37 internal mixer is selected. set the mixer to external. 39 trace average is operating. turn trace average off. 41 trace point is set to 501. change to 1001. 42 not available. turn off zoom mode. 43 no trace data. 44 attenuator is set to manual. select auto mode. 45 the active marker is out of range. move the marker or check the search conditions. 46 no peak points found. check the search conditions. 47 there are no more peak points. 48 trace max/min hold is active. turn max/mix hold off. 49 normal marker is not active. turn the normal marker on. 52 currently sweeping. stop the sweep before proceeding. code error message remarks
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.2 error message a-5 60 vertical scale is set to db/div. set the scale to linear. the vertical axis is not set to a linear scale. set the linear scale. 61 not available for c/n measurements. quit c/n first. disabled during a phase noise measure- ment. terminate the phase noise measurement. 62 not available for phase jitter measurements. quit phase jitter first. disabled during a phase jitter measure- ment. terminate the phase jitter measurement. 63 not available for im measurements. quit im meas. first. disabled during an odd-harmonic mea- surement. terminate the odd-harmonic measurement. 67 not available in f/t or f/f mode. cannot be executed while the f/t, the f/f or the zoom function is being used. reset the zoom function. 68 not available in t/t or t/f mode. cannot be executed while the t/t, the t/f or the zoom function is being used. reset the zoom function. 69 not available in t/t mode. 70 display line is not active. the display line cannot be selected because it is not active. 71 limit line 1 is not active. limit line 1 cannot be selected because it is not active. 72 limit line 2 is not active. limit line 2 cannot be selected because it is not active. 73 no limit lines are active. limit line 1 and limit line 2 cannot be selected because they are not active. 74 invalid data mode. set to relative mode. the y data mode is set to the absolute mode. change y data mode to relative mode. 75 not available. set to f/t or f/f mode. 76 no 3rd order peak found. check the search conditions. 77 this function is not available. the trace is not zoomed in. 78 this function is already active. the trace is already zoomed in. 79 trace normalize is active. turn trace normalize off. 80 not available in gated sweep mode. 81 not available in manual sweep mode. 82 not available in window sweep mode. 83 not available in either manual or window sweep mode. code error message remarks
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.2 error message a-6 85 incorrect data. set span to (1.0 + alpha)*tf or more. the measurement condition is incorrect. change the measurement condition to meet the following: frequency span > (1.0 + rolloff factor) symbol rate 87 root nyquist filter is active. turn the filter off. 88 separate-screen mode is active. change to full-screen mode. 90 not available. set xy anchor first. 95 not available. turn off artificial analog mode. 96 not available. turn on artificial analog mode. 100 not available in high speed adc mode. 105 not available in frequency domain mode. 110 not available in continuous peak mode. 111 not available in continuous xdb down mode. 115 trigger source is not video or ext. set trigger to video or ext. 120 not available. change the sweep time to less than 500sec. 125 not available in digital rbw mode. disabled while the digital rbw mode is set. 126 reached the limit of span in digital rbw mode. the value for span is at the maximum and cannot be increased while in the digital rbw mode. 127 not available. change span to less than the limit. the current span value is greater than the limit value. reduce the value until it is below the limit value which corresponds to the targeted rbw. 300 printer is not ready. check printer setup. 301 printer cable problem. check printer cable. 302 printer not responding. 304 sio port is busy. serial i/o port is in operation. check to see if the item is properly set in the rs232 dialog box under the config menu. code error message remarks
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.2 error message a-7 305 input buffer overflow. the input buffer overflowed. send the data again to the input buffer. 400 input att cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 401 if step amp cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 402 log linearity cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 403 total gain cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 404 rbw switching cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 405 amplitude mag cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 406 insufficient cal data. execute cal all. cannot be corrected because of insuffi- cient correction conditions. perform cal all. 409 normal adc cal failed. the calibration failed. run the user self test to check the problem again. 600 illegal parameter(s). 601 illegal file or device name. 602 incompatible firmware version. data cannot be used with this analyzer. 603 cannot be formatted. the device cannot be formatted. try to format it using personal computer and so on. 604 cannot rename this file. the file name on a ram disk cannot be changed. 605 corrupt file data. the saved data cannot be used since it is corrupt. 607 specified device does not exist. the specified device name cannot be found. use the correct device name. 608 no media present. the device is not ready for operation. insert a floppy disk or the memory card. 609 directory not found. code error message remarks
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.2 error message a-8 610 file already exists. 611 file not found. 612 invalid disk format (type 1) the data saved in the floppy or memory card is corrupt. format the floppy disk or memory card. 613 write-protected file. this file cannot be deleted because it is a read-only file. 614 disk is full. 615 write-protected file. this file is a read-only type. 616 read-only media. this media is a read-only type. slide the write-protect switch to the write position. 618 invalid boot sector signature. the boot signature cannot be recognized. the data saved in the floppy or memory card is corrupt. format the floppy or memory card. 619 crc error. crc error occurred. try one more time. if the problem continues, format the media. 621 invalid frequency-correction data. contact a service engineer. 625 device name too long. the device name is too long. specify it properly. 626 extension too long. the file extension is too long. a maximum of 3 characters is allowed. 627 filename too long. the file name is too long. a maximum of 8 characters is allowed. 628 pathname too long. the pass name is too long. specify it properly. 631 i/o error. an access error to the floppy disk or mem- ory card occurred. try it again. if the problem continues, for- mat the media. 633 invalid disk format (type 2) the disk geometry is invalid. format the floppy disk or memory card. 634 selected file or register is empty. there is no data in the file or register. specify the saved data. 800 the last process is in progress. the spectrum analyzer is busy taking mea- surements repeatedly. this process continues until the measure- ments are complete the number of times specified. code error message remarks
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-9 a.3 glossary average noise level this sensitivity represents spectrum analyzer?s capability of detecting the smallest signal and is directly re- lated with noises generated from a spectrum analyzer itself. the sensitivity, however, varies depends on the resolution bandwidth used. in general, the maximum input sensitivity of a spectrum analyzer is expressed as average noise level when the instrument is used with its minimum resolution bandwidth. bandwidth accuracy the bandwidth accuracy of the resolution bandwidth filter is expressed by the deviation from the nominal value of the 3 db lowered point. this deficiency has almost no effect when measuring normal signals at a continuous level, but it should be taken into consideration when measuring the level of a noise signal. bandwidth selectivity the bandpass filter normally attenuates using a gaussian distribution instead of the so-called rectangular characteristic. consequently, if two adjacent signals of different sizes are mixed, the smaller signal hides at the tail of the larger signal (figure a-1). therefore, the bandwidth at a certain attenuation range (60 db) should also be defined. the ratio between the 3 db width and 60 db width is expressed as the bandwidth selectivity (bw60 db/bw3 db). figure a-1 bandwidth selectivity bandwidth switching uncertainty several resolution bandwidth filters are used to obtain an optimal resolution in signal spectrum analysis ac- cording to the scan width. when switching from one resolution bandwidth filter to another while measuring one signal, an error is generated for the differences in loss. this error is defined as the bandwidth switching uncertainty. (a) separation of signal at different levels (b) if filter selectivity
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-10 figure a-2 bandwidth switching uncertainty frequency response this term represents amplitude characteristics (frequency characteristics) for a given frequency. in the spec- trum analyzer, frequency response means the frequency characteristics (flatness) of the input attenuator and mixer for the input frequency, and is given in ? db. gain compression if the input signal is greater than a certain value, the correct value is not displayed on the screen, and the input signal appears as if it were compressed. this phenomenon is called gain compression, and it reflects an error in the linearity of the input signal range. normally, the gain compression for a spectrum analyzer is specified as the input signal level that produces a 1 db error from a perfect linear response. if gain uncertainty the uppermost scale on the screen is the reference used to read the absolute level of an input signal on the spectrum analyzer. the level set for this uppermost scale is referred to as the reference level. the reference level is set using the ref level key and displayed in dbm or db . the absolute accuracy of this display is determined by the if gain uncertainty assuming the input attenuator is at a constant level. figure a-3 if gain uncertainty maximum input level this is the maximum level allowed for the input circuit of the spectrum analyzer. the level can be modified by the input attenuator. 1db switching error
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-11 maximum input sensitivity this is the maximum sensitivity of the spectrum analyzer for detecting signals. sensitivity depends on the resolution bandwidth and is affected by the noise generated by the spectrum analyzer itself. the maximum input sensitivity is normally reflected as the average noise level in the minimum resolution bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer. noise sidebands spectrum analyzer efficiency is reduced by noise generated in the local oscillator and phase lock loop of the analyzer. this noise will appear in the vicinity of the spectrum on the screen. to compensate for this, the sideband of the analyzer is defined so that signals out of the sideband can be an- alyzed in a certain range. this range is called the noise sideband. the spectrum analyzer's noise sideband characteristics are shown in the following example. example: suppose the noise level measured in the resolution bandwidth of 1 khz is -70 db at 20 khz apart from the carrier. the noise level is normally expressed by the energy contained in the 1 hz band- width (figure a-4(b)). with a bandwidth of 1 hz, the following applies: since the value is -70 db when the bandwidth is 1 khz, the signals within the 1 hz bandwidth will be lower than this by about 10 log 1 hz/1 khz [db], or about 30 db; consequently, it is expressed as -100 db/hz at 20 khz apart from the carrier when the resolution bandwidth is 1 khz. figure a-4 noise sidebands occupied bandwidth when information is transmitted through radio waves, the extension of the frequency spectrum is caused along with the modulation. the occupied bandwidth is defined as the width of frequency spectrum that oc- cupies 99% of all averaged electric power (see figure a-5).
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-12 figure a-5 occupied bandwidth quasi peak value measurements reception interference for wireless communication generally occurs as impulse noise. interference due to noise energy is evaluated in proportion to the quasi peak value. the parameters required for this evaluation, such as measurement bandwidth, detection time constant and so on, are defined as the quasi peak value. there are two standards which affect this sort of measurement: jrtc for japan only, and cispr (interna- tional special committee on radio interference) which applies internationally. residual fm the short-term frequency stability of the local oscillators built in the spectrum analyzer is expressed as re- sidual fm. the frequency width fluctuating per unit time is expressed as p-p. this also determines the mea- surement limit value when measuring the residual fm of a signal. residual response residual response is a measure of how much (in the input level calculation) the spurious signal generated by the spectrum analyzer is suppressed. residual response is generated by leaks of signals such as local oscilla- tion output in the spectrum analyzer. this should be taken into consideration when analyzing a low-level in- put signal. resolution bandwidth the spectrum analyzer uses the bandpass filter (bpf) to analyze the frequency components contained in the input signal. the 3db bandwidth of the bpf is called the resolution bandwidth (see figure a-6(a) below). bpf characteristics should be set according to the sweep width and the sweep speed used for the trace. this spectrum analyzer sets the optimal value for the sweep width. in general, smaller bandwidths improve reso- lution so the resolution of the spectrum analyzer should be expressed using the narrowest resolution band- width (see figure a-6(b) below). p=0.5% p=0.5% p=99% amplitude fu fl frequency 0 0 occupied bandwidth
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-13 figure a-6 resolution bandwidth spurious response spurious signals are signals that cause distortion to an ideal signal, and are classified according to their char- acteristics. second harmonic distortion: this is the distortion caused by the non-linearity of a spectrum analyzer (especial- ly generated in the mixer) when an ideal, undistorted signal is input to the spec- trum analyzer. this performance determines spectrum analyzer?s capability of measuring harmonic distortion (see figure a-7). third order distortion: this is the distortion caused by the non-linearity of a spectrum analyzer when two signals with different frequencies f1 and f2 are input, thus outputting two signals: one signal with frequency 2f1-f2; and another signal with frequency 2f2-fi. the amplitude of these signals depends on the input levels at the mixer (see figure a-7). the maximum value is specified. image/multiple/extra-band responses: in addition to the two types of spurious signals described above, there is a third type called "non-harmonic spurious" that is generated by the spectrum analyzer with a frequency proper to each spectrum analyzer. there are three types of re- sponses in the non-harmonic spurious: the image, multiple and extra-band re- sponses. te?????? (a) te?? (b) rbw signal spacing rbw = resolution bandwidth signal spacing resolution bandwidth (a) (b) resolution
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-14 figure a-7 spurious response vswr (voltage standing wave ratio) this shows the state of impedance matching when a spectrum analyzer is connected to a voltage source whose output impedance is ideal and nominal. the vswr is expressed as the ratio of the maximum value to minimum value of a standing wave which consists of traveling and reflected waves. the vswr is another expression of the reflection coefficient or return loss. referring to figure a-8, the signal at the receiving end e 1 is the same as the signal at the transmitting end (e 0 , or the spectrum analyzer input section) if the impedance of the receiving end is matched to that of the transmitting end. the reflection coefficient is expressed in the formula shown below when the reflected wave e r exists due to a mismatch between the impedances. reflection coefficient m = reflected wave e r /traveling wave e 0 the return loss is expressed in the formula shown below. return loss = 20 log e r / e 0 [db] vswr = (e 0 + e r ) / (e 0 - e r ) the relationship of vswr with the reflection coefficient is as follows. vswr = (1 + | m | ) / (1 - | m | ) the range of vswr is between 1 and the nearer to 1 this value is, the better the state of impedance match- ing is. figure a-8 v.s.w.r traveling wave e 1 receiver sender e 0 spectrum analyzer reflected wave signal to be measured
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.3 glossary a-15 zero span the spectrum analyzer sweeps at any frequency along the horizontal axis as the time axis but will not sweep in zero span mode.
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) a.4 db conversion formulas a-16 a.4 db conversion formulas definitions 0dbv = 1vrms ydbv = 20log 0dbm = 1mw ydbm = 10log 0db v = 1 vrms ydb v = 20log 0dbpw = 1pw ydbpw = 10log conversion formulas if r = 50 ? : if r = 75 ? : dbv ? (dbm - 13db) dbv ? (dbm - 11db) db v ? (dbm + 107db) db v ? (dbm + 109db) db vemf ? (dbm + 113db) db vemf ? (dbm + 115db) dbpw ? (dbm + 90db) dbpw ? (dbm + 90db) examples converting 1mv into db v: 20log = 20log 10 3 = 60db v converting 0dbm into db v: 0dbm + 107db = 107db v(r = 50 ? ) 0dbm + 109db = 109db v(r = 75 ? ) converting 60db v into dbm: 60db v - 107db = -47dbm(r = 50 ? ) 60db v - 109db = -49dbm(r = 75 ? ) converting 10v/m into db v/m: 20log = 140db v/m relationship between dbm and watt +50dbm +40dbm +30dbm +20dbm +10dbm +0dbm -10dbm -20dbm -30dbm 100w 10w 1w 100mw 10mw 1mw 0.1mw 0.01mw 0.001mw xv 1v 1mw xmw 1 v x v xpw 1pw 1mv 1 v { { 10v/m 1 v/m
ext-1 dimensional outline drawing unit : mm note this drawing shows external dimensions of this instrument. the difference in products and options used can cause a change in the appearance of the instrument. dimensional outline drawing
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-1 [symbol] nyquist filter ........................................ 3-15, 3-61 nyquist filter on/off ......................... 3-15, 3-59 nyquist filter setup .............................. 3-15, 3-60 % am measure ....................................... 3-13, 3-52 [numerics] 0.5 db/div ................................................ 3-12 1 db/div ................................................... 3-12 1/delta marker on/off ......................... 3-14, 3-53 10 db/div ................................................. 3-12 10, 5, 2, 1 or 0.5db/div ........................... 3-49 2 db/div ................................................... 3-12 3rd order ................................................. 3-18, 3-82 3rd order measure .................................. 3-13, 3-52 3rd order peak ........................................ 3-19, 3-85 5 db/div ................................................... 3-12 5th order ................................................. 3-18, 3-82 7th order ................................................. 3-18, 3-82 9th order ................................................. 3-18, 3-82 [a] a .............................................................. 3-7, 3-9, 3-20, 3-33 a b ................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-21, 3-26 abc ........................................................ 3-10 accessories ............................................. 1-2 acp ......................................................... 2-87, 3-15, 3-59, 4-3 acp measurement conditions ............... 2-137 acp off ................................................ 3-15, 3-62 active marker ......................................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 active trace a/b .................................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-62, 3-83 additional functions ............................... 4-12 adjacent channel leakage power .......... 2-87, 4-3 all auto .................................................. 3-10, 3-37 am modulation frequency .................... 2-117 am signals ............................................. 2-117 amplitude mag ..................................... 3-8, 3-28 anchor .................................................... 3-14, 3-54 artificial analog a ................................. 3-7, 3-21 artificial analog on/off ...................... 3-18, 3-21, 3-80 att ......................................................... 3-7, 3-24 att auto/mnl ................................... 3-7, 3-24 att switch count .................................. 3-9, 3-35 attenuator ............................................... 3-24 auto ..................................................... 3-10 auto adjust ............................................. 3-10, 3-43 auto increment ....................................... 3-9, 3-33 auto tune ............................................... 3-11, 3-45 average a ............................................... 3-7, 3-20 average b ............................................... 3-8, 3-25 average loss on/off ........................... 3-11, 3-47 average power ........................................ 3-15, 3-58 average times ........................................ 3-15, 3-58 average times on/off ......................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-61, 3-78, 3-81, 3-82, 3-83 [b] b .............................................................. 3-8, 3-9, 3-25, 3-33 band lock on/off ................................ 3-11, 3-47 band select ............................................. 3-11, 3-46 basic measurement conditions .............. 2-130 baud rate ................................................ 3-9, 3-30 bias posi/nega ................................... 3-11, 3-46 blank a ................................................... 3-7, 3-20 blank b ................................................... 3-8, 3-25 bs window on/off .............................. 3-15, 3-60 burst signals ........................................... 2-97 burst signals ............................................ 2-101 [c] c/n meas ................................................ 3-18, 3-81 c/n meas off ........................................ 3-18, 3-81 cal ........................................................ 3-8, 3-28 cal 10 mhz ref ...................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal all ..................................................... 2-62, 3-8, 3-28 cal corr on/off ................................... 3-8, 3-28 cal each item .......................................... 2-64, 3-8, 3-28 cal sig level .......................................... 3-8, 3-28 calculation using no measurement window ................................................... 4-10 calculation using the measurement window ................................................... 4-11 calibration .............................................. 1-15, 2-61, 3-28 carrier frequency and power measurements ......................................... 2-125 cdma .................................................... 2-75 cdma channel power ........................... 2-81 center ...................................................... 3-11, 3-45 alphabetical index alphabetical index
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-2 cf step size auto/mnl ..................... 3-11, 3-45 channel position ..................................... 3-15, 3-58 channel power ........................................ 3-15, 3-58 channel width ........................................ 3-15, 3-58 cleaning .................................................. 1-13 clear ........................................................ 3-16, 3-68 clear file ................................................. 3-16, 3-68 clear register ......................................... 3-16, 3-66 coarse ..................................................... 3-8, 3-28 color ....................................................... 3-10, 3-44 command syntax .................................... 5-12 compression ........................................... 3-9, 3-33 config .................................................. 3-9, 3-30 configuration .......................................... 3-30 connector section ................................... 2-3 cont down on/off ............................... 3-13, 3-52 cont peak on/off ................................. 3-17, 3-74 continuous sweep .................................. 3-65 control section ....................................... 2-9 copy ...................................................... 3-9, 3-36 copy all .................................................. 3-16, 3-69 copy config ............................................ 3-9, 3-30 copy device ........................................... 3-9, 3-33 copy mode ............................................. 3-9, 3-31, 3-32 copy table 1 to 2 .................................... 3-10, 3-43 copy table 2 to 1 .................................... 3-10, 3-43 corr factor .............................................. 3-16, 3-68 correction edit ........................................ 3-12, 3-49 correction factor .................................... 3-12, 3-49 correction on/off ................................ 3-12, 3-49 counter .................................................... 3-13, 3-51 counter on/off .................................... 3-13, 3-51 couple ................................................. 3-10, 3-37 couple function ...................................... 3-37 couple to f(t) ........................................ 3-17, 3-73 cs/bs setup ........................................... 3-15, 3-59 [d] data format ............................................ 3-16, 3-67, 5-61 data formats ........................................... 5-13 data length ............................................. 3-9, 3-30 data readout ........................................... 3-64 date and time ......................................... 2-146 date/time ............................................... 3-9, 3-34 day .......................................................... 3-9, 3-34 db v/ hz ............................................ 3-13 db/div ...................................................... 3-12, 3-49 dbc/hz .................................................... 3-13, 3-51 dbm ......................................................... 3-12, 3-49 dbm/hz ................................................... 3-13, 3-51 dbmv ...................................................... 3-12, 3-49 db v ....................................................... 3-12, 3-49 db v/ hz ............................................... 3-51 db vemf ................................................ 3-12, 3-49 dbpw ...................................................... 3-12, 3-49 default .................................................... 3-8, 3-15, 3-29, 3-61, 3-78 default ip ................................................ 3-16, 3-66 defaults configuration values ............... 3-87 define default .................................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-61, 3-78 delete ...................................................... 3-18, 3-79, 3-81 delete line .............................................. 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 delta cf ............................................. 3-14, 3-56 delta cf step ..................................... 3-14, 3-56 delta marker step .............................. 3-14, 3-56 delta span .......................................... 3-14, 3-56 delta marker ........................................... 3-14, 3-53, 3-54 delta marker on/off ............................ 3-14, 3-53 delta markers ......................................... 2-105 delta y disp mode cusr/data ................ 3-7, 3-22 det select auto/mnl ........................ 3-7, 3-8, 3-20, 3-23, 3-25, 3-27 device ram/a/b ................................... 3-15, 3-16, 3-64, 3-68 device ram/fd ..................................... 3-15, 3-16, 3-64, 3-68 differences between rs-232 and gpib . 5-62 digital modulation signal ...................... 2-71 disp mode rel/abs.l/abs.r ............. 3-13, 3-52 display control ....................................... 3-10, 3-44 display control section ............... 2-6 display format ........................................ 3-40 display line ............................................ 2-26, 3-14, 3-17, 3-54, 3-73 display line on/off ............................ 3-10, 3-40 display line pos. .................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-21, 3-26 display on/off ..................................... 3-9, 3-35 display section ....................................... 2-2 displaying spectrums ............................. 2-18 dual parameters ...................................... 2-53, 2-57 dynamic range ....................................... 2-36
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-3 [e] edit table ................................................ 3-18, 3-79, 3-81 enter title ............................................... 3-16, 3-66 entering data .......................................... 2-14 entry section ...................................... 2-7 environmental conditions ...................... 1-4 error message ............................... a-3 example programs .................................. 5-45 execute selftest ....................................... 3-9, 3-35 expanded functions ................................ 2-130 ext mixer config .................................... 3-11, 3-46 eye opening ........................................... 3-18, 3-79 eye opening calculation ........................ 4-10 eye opening off ................................... 3-18, 3-81 [f] f/t ........................................................... 3-19, 3-85 f/t function ........................................... 2-49 factory defaults ...................................... 3-87 features of rs-232 remote control ....... 5-59 file .......................................................... 3-9, 3-32 file format .............................................. 3-9, 3-32 file no. ................................................... 3-9, 3-33 fine ......................................................... 3-8, 3-29 fixed marker function ........................... 2-111 fixed marker on/off ........................... 3-14, 3-53 fixed mkr peak .................................... 3-13, 3-51 floppy ..................................................... 3-9, 3-33 floppy disk ............................................. 2-142 floppy disk drive section ..................... 2-4 flow control ........................................... 3-9, 3-30 fm signals .............................................. 2-120, 2-123 format ................................................ 3-40 format ..................................................... 3-9, 3-34 format card a ........................................ 3-9, 3-16, 3-34, 3-69 format card b ........................................ 3-9, 3-16, 3-34, 3-69 format floppy ......................................... 3-9, 3-16, 3-34, 3-69 formatting media ................................... 2-142 freq ...................................................... 3-11, 3-45 freq corr on/off .................................. 3-8, 3-29 freq offset on/off ............................... 3-11, 3-45 frequency ................................................ 3-45 frequency deviation ................................ 2-120 frequency domain .................................. 2-41, 2-53 front panel .............................................. 2-1 full screen .............................................. 4-3 full screen mode .................................... 2-87 full span ................................................. 3-17, 3-71 functional description ............................ 3-20 fund frequency on/off .................... 3-18, 3-78 fuse ......................................................... 1-5 [g] gate position ........................................... 3-17, 3-76 gate src ext gate ................................... 3-17, 3-76 gate src if trigger ................................. 3-17 gate src trigger ...................................... 3-76 gate width .............................................. 3-17, 3-76 gated sweep ........................................... 2-97, 3-76, 4-8 gated sweep on/off ............................ 3-17, 3-77 glossary ........................................... a-9 gpib ....................................................... 5-7 gpib address ......................................... 3-9, 3-30 gpib and rs-232 compatibility ............ 5-59 gpib command codes ........................... 5-21 gpib command index ............................ 5-1 gpib interface functions ....................... 5-9 gpib remote control ............................. 3-48 gpib remote programming ................... 5-7 gpib setup ............................................. 5-8 graph ...................................................... 3-15, 3-61 graph on/off ....................................... 3-15, 3-61 gray#1 .................................................... 3-10, 3-44 gray#2 .................................................... 3-10, 3-44 [h] hard copy ............................................... 2-140 harmonic distortion measurements ....... 2-105 harmonics ............................................... 3-18, 3-78 harmonics number ................................. 3-18, 3-78 harmonics off ....................................... 3-18, 3-78 hi sens on/off ..................................... 3-18, 3-83 hour ........................................................ 3-9, 3-34 [ i ] if step amp ........................................... 3-8, 3-28 im meas .................................................. 3-18, 3-82 im meas off .......................................... 3-18, 3-83 initialization ............................................ 3-63 input att ............................................... 3-8, 3-28 input saturation ....................................... 4-1 insert ....................................................... 3-18, 3-79, 3-81 insert line ............................................... 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 interface connection ................................ 5-60 interface messages .................................. 5-10
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-4 introduction .................................. 1-1 [l] label ....................................................... 3-10, 3-43 label delete ............................................ 3-10, 3-43 label entry ............................................. 3-10, 3-43 last span ................................................. 3-17, 3-71 lcl ......................................................... 3-11, 3-48 level .................................................... 3-12, 3-49 level correction data ............................. 2-29 limit line ............................................... 3-10, 3-14, 3-16, 3-40, 3-54, 3-67 limit line 1 ............................................ 3-10, 3-17, 3-41, 3-73 limit line 1/2 ......................................... 3-10, 3-43 limit line 2 ............................................ 3-10, 3-17, 3-41, 3-73 limit line edit ........................................ 3-10, 3-43 limit line function ................................. 2-65 limit line setup ..................................... 3-10, 3-40 limit posi ................................................ 3-17, 3-72 limit setup ............................................. 3-18, 3-82 limit width ............................................. 3-17, 3-72 limited-life parts .................................... 1-15 linear ...................................................... 3-12, 3-49 list of settings ........................................ 3-86 list off .................................................. 3-13, 3-51 list reg/file ........................................... 3-15, 3-16, 3-64, 3-68 load table .............................................. 3-18, 3-79 log linearity .......................................... 3-8, 3-28 loss:freq .............................................. 3-16, 3-68 loss:freq edit ......................................... 3-11, 3-47 loss:freq on/off ................................. 3-11, 3-47 [m] manual .................................................... 3-15, 3-61, 3-78 manual tune ........................................... 3-11, 3-45 marker ..................................................... 3-53 marker ................................................ 3-56 marker cf .......................................... 3-14, 3-56 marker cf step .................................. 3-14, 3-56 marker marker step ........................... 3-14, 3-56 marker ref ......................................... 3-14, 3-56 marker list on/off .............................. 3-14, 3-54 marker no. .............................................. 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 marker off ............................................ 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-54, 3-55, 3-62 marker off ............................................... 3-57 marker on .............................................. 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 marker section .................................. 2-5 marker step size auto/mnl ............... 3-14, 3-55 max hold a ............................................ 3-7, 3-20 max hold b ............................................ 3-8, 3-25 max peak ................................................ 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 meas ..................................................... 3-13, 3-51 measurement ........................................... 3-51, 5-45 measurement conditions ........................ 2-130, 5-45 measurement examples .......................... 2-71 measurement section ..................... 2-4 measuring frequency using counter ..... 2-23 measuring window ................................. 2-26, 3-19, 3-84 media format .......................................... 3-9, 3-33 medium ................................................ 3-10 memory card .......................................... 2-143 memory card ........................................... 6-21 menu index ............................................. 3-1 menu map ............................................... 3-7 menu print .............................................. 3-9, 3-32, 3-33 message exchange protocol ................... 5-11 min att on/off .................................. 3-7, 3-24 min hold a ............................................. 3-7, 3-21 min hold b ............................................. 3-8, 3-26 min peak ................................................. 3-17, 3-72 minute ..................................................... 3-9, 3-34 mixer int/ext ...................................... 3-11, 3-46 mkr ....................................................... 3-14, 3-53 mkr .................................................. 3-14, 3-56 mkr key ........................................... 3-56 modulation factor ................................... 2-117 modulation index .................................... 2-123 mono#1 ................................................... 3-10, 3-44 mono#2 ................................................... 3-10, 3-44 month ...................................................... 3-9, 3-34 multi marker ........................................... 3-14, 3-53 multi mkr off ..................................... 3-14, 3-54 multi mkr setup ................................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 [n] narrow ............................................... 3-10 negative .................................................. 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 next min peak ........................................ 3-17, 3-72 next peak ................................................ 3-14, 3-17,
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-5 3-19, 3-53, 3-72, 3-84, 3-85 next peak left ........................................ 3-17, 3-72 next peak right ...................................... 3-17, 3-72 next result ............................................. 3-18, 3-79 noise corr on/off ................................ 3-15, 3-59 noise/hz ................................................. 3-13, 3-51 noise/hz off ......................................... 3-13, 3-51 normal .................................................... 2-105, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 normal marker ....................................... 3-14, 3-53 normalize ................................................ 3-16, 3-67 normalize a ............................................ 3-7, 3-21 normalize a on/off ............................ 3-7, 3-21 normalize b ............................................ 3-8, 3-26 normalize b on/off ............................. 3-8, 3-26 normalize with store corr. ..................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-21, 3-26 [o] obw ....................................................... 2-84, 3-18, 3-78 obw measurement conditions .............. 2-137 obw off ............................................... 3-18, 3-78 obw% .................................................... 3-18, 3-78 occupied bandwidth ............................... 2-84 off ......................................................... 3-14, 3-57 offset ...................................................... 3-10, 3-42, 3-43 operating environment ........................... 1-4 operating menus ..................................... 2-14 operating the markers ............................ 2-18 operation .......................................... 2-1 option ..................................................... 2-143 option section ........................................ 2-9 order ....................................................... 3-9, 3-18, 3-34, 3-82 [p] panel control .......................................... 5-62 panel description .................................... 2-1 paper feed ............................................... 3-9, 3-32 parameter setup ...................................... 3-15, 3-18, 3-61, 3-78 parameter setup window ....................... 5-59 parameters range ................................... 3-90 parity bit ................................................. 3-9, 3-30 pass range .............................................. 3-10, 3-41 pass/fail judgement on/off ................ 3-10, 3-18, 3-43, 3-83 pass/fail judgments ................................ 2-65 pbw ........................................................ 3-8, 3-28 peak cf .............................................. 3-14, 3-56 peak ref ............................................. 3-14, 3-56 peak delta y ........................................... 3-14, 3-17, 3-19, 3-54, 3-73, 3-85 peak list ................................................. 2-108, 3-13, 3-51 peak list freq ......................................... 3-13, 3-14, 3-51, 3-54 peak list level ....................................... 3-13, 3-14, 3-51, 3-54 peak x db down .................................... 3-13, 3-52 peak zooming ......................................... 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 phase jitter .............................................. 3-18, 3-81 phase jitter measurement ....................... 4-12 phase jitter off ...................................... 3-18, 3-82 phase noise ............................................. 3-18, 3-81 pll band width ..................................... 3-10, 3-38 positive .................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 power .................................................. 3-15, 3-58 power average a .................................... 3-7, 3-22 power average b .................................... 3-8, 3-26 power cable ............................................ 1-7 power meas off .................................... 3-15, 3-58 power on count ..................................... 3-9, 3-35 power supply specifications .................. 1-5 power switch .......................................... 2-3 precautions in use .................................. 1-8 presel tune ............................................. 3-11, 3-45 preselector 1.6 ghz/3.6 ghz ................. 3-11, 3-46 preset .................................................. 3-15, 3-63 prev result .............................................. 3-18, 3-79 principle of measurement ....... 4-1 printer ...................................................... 3-9, 3-30, 3-33 printer command .................................... 3-9, 3-31 problem ................................................... a-1 product description ................................ 1-1 pulsed rf signals ................................... 2-125 [r] r3264 specifications ..................... 6-1 r3267 specifications ..................... 6-7 r3273 specifications ..................... 6-14 rbw ....................................................... 3-86
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-6 rbw auto/mnl ................................. 3-10, 3-37 rbw switching ...................................... 3-8, 3-28 rbw:span on/off ............................... 3-10, 3-37 rbw 100hz anlg/dgtl ................... 3-10, 3-38 rcl ......................................................... 3-15, 3-64 reading data ........................................... 5-47 rear panel ............................................... 2-12 recall ...................................................... 3-15, 3-64 recall file ............................................... 3-15, 3-64 recall on power .................................. 3-15, 3-64 recall register ........................................ 3-15, 3-64 ref offset on/off ................................ 3-12, 3-49 reference .......................................... 3-1 reference ................................................ 3-10, 3-42 reference marker on/off .................... 3-13, 3-52 reference object ..................................... 3-14, 3-54 reg #ip .................................................. 3-16 reg#1 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#1, #2, #3, #4, #5 ............................ 3-64, 3-66 reg#10 .................................................. 3-15, 3-16 reg#2 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#3 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#4 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#5 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#6 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#6, #7, #8, #9, #10 .......................... 3-64, 3-66 reg#7 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#8 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#9 .................................................... 3-15, 3-16 reg#ip ................................................... 3-66 release object ........................................ 3-14, 3-54 release protect ........................................ 3-16, 3-68 remote control usage examples ........... 5-63 remote section ................................... 2-8 remove anchor ...................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-22, 3-40 rename ................................................... 3-16, 3-68 repeat ................................................. 3-15, 3-65 reset marker ........................................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-53, 3-62 resolution 1 hz ...................................... 3-13 resolution 1 khz .................................... 3-13 resolution 1 khz, 100 hz, 10 hz or 1 hz 3-51 resolution 10 hz .................................... 3-13 resolution 100 hz .................................. 3-13 result area posi up/low ..................... 3-10, 3-44 revision .................................................. 3-9, 3-35 rolloff factor .......................................... 3-15, 3-60 root nyquist filter ................................. 4-6 rs232 ...................................................... 3-9, 3-30 rs-232 and gpib ................................... 5-62 rs-232 remote control function .......... 5-59 [s] sample .................................................... 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26, 3-40 sampling times ...................................... 3-7, 3-18, 3-21, 3-80 save ...................................................... 3-16, 3-66 save ......................................................... 3-16, 3-66 save file ................................................. 3-16, 3-66 save item setup ...................................... 3-16, 3-66 save register .......................................... 3-16, 3-66 save table ............................................... 3-18, 3-79 save/recall section ................................ 2-5 screen annotation ................................... 2-10 screen data ............................................. 2-138 screen full/sepa/carrier ............. 3-15, 3-61 screen label ........................................... 2-147 screen reset ............................................ 3-19, 3-85 search condition ..................................... 3-17, 3-72 selftest .................................................... 3-9, 3-35 separate display ............................... 2-93 separate screen ....................................... 4-3 set anchor .............................................. 3-7, 3-10, 3-22, 3-40 set resolution ......................................... 3-86 setup ....................................................... 3-16, 3-67 setup media ............................................ 3-16, 3-69 show result ............................................ 3-18, 3-79 signal ident on/off .............................. 3-11, 3-47 signal track on/off ............................. 3-14, 3-18, 3-54, 3-81, 3-82 single .................................................. 3-17, 3-70 single sweep ........................................... 3-70 slope ....................................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 sort .......................................................... 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 source ..................................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 span ...................................................... 3-17, 3-71 specifications ................................. 6-1 spurious .................................................. 3-18, 3-68, 3-79 spurious off .......................................... 3-18, 3-79 srart offset .............................................. 3-18 srch ...................................................... 3-17, 3-72 start ......................................................... 3-11, 3-45 start offset .............................................. 3-82 status byte .............................................. 5-56
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-7 status bytes ............................................. 5-14 stop ......................................................... 3-11, 3-45 stop bit ................................................... 3-9, 3-30 stop offset .............................................. 3-18, 3-82 store ........................................................ 3-8, 3-29 storing ..................................................... 1-14 sweep time ............................................ 3-75 sweep time auto/mnl ...................... 3-10, 3-17, 3-37, 3-75 sweep-time ............................................ 3-86 swp ........................................................ 3-17, 3-75 symbol rate 1/t ..................................... 3-15, 3-60 system checkout .................................... 1-10 [t] t/t .......................................................... 3-19, 3-85 table init ................................................. 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 3-18, 3-43, 3-47, 3-50, 3-60, 3-79, 3-81 table no.1/2/3 ........................................ 3-18, 3-79 test mode exit ........................................ 3-9, 3-35 third order intermodulation distortion . 2-114 time domain .......................................... 2-44, 2-57, 2-101 time ratio corr on/off ....................... 3-18, 3-80 total gain ............................................... 2-63, 3-8, 3-28 total power ............................................. 3-15, 3-58 trace ....................................................... 3-16, 3-67 trace a ................................................... 3-14, 3-20, 3-54 trace a detector ..................................... 3-7, 3-20, 3-22 trace b .................................................... 3-25 trace b detector ..................................... 3-8, 3-25, 3-26 trace data ............................................... 5-52 trace detector ......................................... 3-10, 3-40 trace marker move ................................ 3-14, 3-54 trace point 1001/501 .............................. 3-9, 3-35 transporting ............................................ 1-14 trc disp pause/cont ......................... 3-7, 3-21 trigger delay .......................................... 3-17, 3-75 trigger level .......................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 trigger setup .......................................... 3-17, 3-75, 3-76 two signals ............................................ 2-33 [u] uncal message .................................... 2-39 units ........................................................ 3-12, 3-49 user define ............................................. 3-10, 3-42, 3-43 util ....................................................... 3-18, 3-78 utility ...................................................... 3-78 [v] vbw ....................................................... 3-86 vbw auto/mnl ................................. 3-10, 3-37 vbw:rbw on/off .............................. 3-10, 3-37 view a .................................................... 3-7, 3-20 view b .................................................... 3-8, 3-25 volts ........................................................ 3-12, 3-49 [w] watts ....................................................... 3-12, 3-49 wide ...................................................... 3-10 wide band digital modulation signal ... 2-78 window ............................................... 3-19, 3-84 window on/off ................................... 3-19, 3-84 window position ..................................... 3-19, 3-84 window sweep on/off ........................ 3-17, 3-19, 3-77, 3-84 window width ........................................ 3-19, 3-84 write a ................................................... 3-7, 3-20 write b .................................................... 3-8, 3-25 write protect ........................................... 3-16, 3-66 [x] x cursor position .................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-22, 3-40, 3-80 x data mode ........................................... 3-10, 3-42 x db down ............................................. 3-13, 3-51 x db left ................................................ 3-13, 3-52 x db right .............................................. 3-13, 3-52 x range .................................................. 3-17, 3-72 x1 ............................................................ 3-12 x1, x2, x5 or x10 ..................................... 3-49 x10 .......................................................... 3-12 x2 ............................................................ 3-12 x5 ............................................................ 3-12 xdb down .............................................. 3-13, 3-51 xy cursor ............................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-21, 3-40, 3-80 xy cursor on/off ................................ 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-22, 3-40, 3-80
r3267 series spectrum analyzer operation manual (vol.1) alphabetical index i-8 [y] y cursor auto set ................................... 3-18, 3-80 y cursor position .................................... 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-22, 3-40, 3-80 y data mode ........................................... 3-10, 3-42 y range .................................................. 3-17, 3-73 year ......................................................... 3-9, 3-34 [z] zero span ................................................ 3-17, 3-71 zoom ....................................................... 3-19, 3-84 zoom off ................................................. 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 zoom on window ................................... 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 zoom position ......................................... 3-19, 3-84, 3-85 zoom width ............................................ 3-19, 3-84, 3-85
important information for advantest software please read carefully: this is an important notice for the software defined herein. computer programs including any additions, modifications and updates thereof, operation manuals, and related materials provided by advantest (hereafter referred to as "software"), included in or used with hardware produced by advantest (hereafter referred to as "products"). software license all rights in and to the software (including, but not limited to, copyright) shall be and remain vested in advantest. advantest hereby grants you a license to use the software only on or with advantest products. restrictions (1) you may not use the software for any purpose other than for the use of the products. (2) you may not copy, modify, or change, all or any part of, the software without permission from advantest. (3) you may not reverse engineer, de-compile, or disassemble, all or any part of, the software. liability advantest shall have no liability (1) for any product failures, which may arise out of any misuse (misuse is deemed to be use of the software for purposes other than it's intended use) of the software. (2) for any dispute between you and any third party for any reason whatsoever including, but not limited to, infringement of intellectual property rights.
limited warranty 1. unless otherwise specifically agreed by seller and purchaser in writing, advantest will warrant to the purchaser that during the warranty period this product (other than consumables included in the product) will be free from defects in material and workmanship and shall conform to the specifications set forth in this operation manual. 2. the warranty period for the product (the "warranty period") will be a period of one year commencing on the delivery date of the product. 3. if the product is found to be defective during the warranty period, advantest will, at its option and in its sole and absolute discretion, either (a) repair the defective product or part or component thereof or (b) replace the defective product or part or component thereof, in either case at advantest , s sole cost and expense. 4. this limited warranty will not apply to defects or damage to the product or any part or component thereof resulting from any of the following: (a) any modifications, maintenance or repairs other than modifications, maintenance or repairs (i) performed by advantest or (ii) specifically recommended or authorized by advantest and performed in accordance with advantest , s instructions; (b) any improper or inadequate handling, carriage or storage of the product by the purchaser or any third party (other than advantest or its agents); (c) use of the product under operating conditions or environments different than those specified in the operation manual or recommended by advantest, including, without limitation, (i) instances where the product has been subjected to physical stress or electrical voltage exceeding the permissible range and (ii) instances where the corrosion of electrical circuits or other deterioration was accelerated by exposure to corrosive gases or dusty environments; (d) use of the product in connection with software, interfaces, products or parts other than software, interfaces, products or parts supplied or recommended by advantest; (e) the occurrence of an event of force majeure, including, without limitation, fire, explosion, geological change, storm, flood, earthquake, tidal wave, lightning or act of war; or (f) any negligent act or omission of the purchaser or any third party other than advantest. 5. except to the extent expressly provided herein, advantest hereby expressly disclaims, and the purchaser hereby waives, all warranties, whether express or implied, statutory or otherwise, including, without limitation, (a) any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose and (b) any warranty or representation as to the validity, scope, effectiveness or usefulness of any technology or any invention. 6. the remedy set forth herein shall be the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser for breach of warranty with respect to the product. 7. advantest will not have any liability to the purchaser for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential or punitive damages, including, without limitation, loss of anticipated profits or revenues, in any and all circumstances, even if advantest has been advised of the possibility of such damages and whether arising out of breach of contract, warranty, tort (including, without limitation, negligence), strict liability, indemnity, contribution or otherwise.
customer service description in order to maintain safe and trouble-free operation of the product and to prevent the incurrence of unnecessary costs and expenses, advantest recommends a regular preventive maintenance program under its maintenance agreement. advantest , s maintenance agreement provides the purchaser on-site and off-site maintenance, parts, maintenance machinery, regular inspections, and telephone support and will last a maximum of ten years from the date the delivery of the product. for specific details of the services provided under the maintenance agreement, please contact the nearest advantest office listed at the end of this operation manual or advantest , s sales representatives. some of the components and parts of this product have a limited operating life (such as, electrical and mechanical parts, fan motors, unit power supply, etc.). accordingly, these components and parts will have to be replaced on a periodic basis. if the operating life of a component or part has expired and such component or part has not been replaced, there is a possibility that the product will not perform properly. additionally, if the operating life of a component or part has expired and continued use of such component or part damages the product, the product may not be repairable. please contact the nearest advantest office listed at the end of this operation manual or advantest , s sales representatives to determine the operating life of a specific component or part, as the operating life may vary depending on various factors such as operating condition and usage environment. claim for damage in shipment to original buyer the product should be thoroughly inspected immediately upon original delivery to buyer. all material in the container should be checked against the enclosed packing list or the instruction manual alternatively. advantest will not be responsible for shortage unless notified immediately. if the product is damaged in any way, a claim should be filed by the buyer with carrier immediately. (to obtain a quotation to repair shipment damage, contact advantest or the local supplier.) final claim and negotiations with the carrier must be completed by buyer.
sales & support offices advantest america measuring solutions, inc. (north america) new jersey office 258 fernwood avenue, edison, nj 08837 phone: (1) (732) 346-2600 facsimile: (1) (732) 346-2610 santa clara office 3201 scott blvd., santa clara, ca 95054 phone: (1) (408) 988-7700 facsimile: (1) (408) 987-0688 rohde & schwarz engineering and sales gmbh (europe) mhldorfstra?e 15, d-81671 mnchen, germany p.o.b. 80 14 29, d-81614 mnchen, germany phone: (49) (89) 4129-13711 facsimile: (49) (89) 4129-13723 advantest (singapore) pte. ltd. (singapore) 438a alexandra road, #8-03/06 alexandra technopark, singapore 119967 phone: (65) (6) 274-3100 facsimile: (65) (6) 274-4055 advantest korea co., ltd. (korea) 16fl., miraewasaram bldg., 942-1 daechi-dong, kangnam-ku, seoul, korea phone: (82) (02) 3452-7710 facsimile: (82) (02) 3452-7970 advantest (suzhou) co., ltd. (china) 5f, no. 46 factory building, no. 555 gui ping road, shanghai, china 200233 phone: (86) (21) 6485-2725 facsimile: (86) (21) 6485-2726 shinjuku-ns building, 4-1, nishi-shinjuku 2-chome, shinjuku-ku, tokyo 163-0880, japan phone:+81-3-3342-7500 facsimile:+81-3-5322-7270 telex:232-4914 advan j technology support on the leading edge

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of ADVANTESTR3264

	To Download ADVANTESTR3264 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .